XXX

Technical Specifications
Material, Page No. 1
GOVERNMENT OF THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF BANGLADESH

OFFICE OF THE EXECUTIVE ENGINEER
PWD DIVISION, DHAKA
Museum of Human evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.
Ref no-2/664/699
Dated: 20 September 2011

INVITATION FOR TENDERS
Sealed tenders are hereby invited from the eligible tenderers as defined in the tender document for the under listed
works as per terms & conditions stated below
1.
Project name
Museum of Human evolution and Research Center,

Dhaka.
2.
Source of funds
Government of Bangladesh (BOG)
3.
Ministry Division
Ministry of Science & Technology
4.
Name of Agency
Public works department
5.
Tender name
Construction of the Museum building
6.
Location of site
Agargaon, Dhaka.
7.
Time for completion of the work
24 (twenty four) Months
8.
Tendering Method
Open Tendering Method(OTM)
7.
Eligibility of tenderers
Contractors firm with eligibility stated in tender document

as per CPTU regulation-2003, having experience of
implementing R.C.C building or similar type of work
within the past 3 years.
9.
Price of tender document
TK. 2500.00 (two thousand) only
10.
Amount of tender security
TK. 2,50,000.00 (two lac fifty thousand)
11.
Name & address of the office(s) selling

tender document
Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.
12.
Name & address of the office(s) receiving

tenders
13.
Name & address of the office(s) opening

tenders
14.
Last date & time for selling tender document
30-Jan.-2012 during office hours on all working days
15.
Last date & time for submission of tender
31-Jan.-2012 up to 12.30 p.m.
document
16.
Date & time for opening tenders
31-Jan.-2012 at 3.00 p.m.
17.
Special instructions
The procuring Entity reserves the right to reject all tenders

prior to acceptance.
Md. Mamunur Rahman

Executive Engineer,
Table of Contents
Section 1.
A.
Instructions to BIDDERS ................................................................6

General ......................................................................................................... 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Tender Document ........................................................................................... 8

7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Tender: Sealing and Marking ..................................................................................... 15

Tender: Submission Deadline ..................................................................................... 15
Tender: Submitted Late ............................................................................................. 15
Tender: Modification, Substitution or Withdrawal ..................................................... 16
Tender Opening and Evaluation .................................................................... 16

37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
G.
Tender: Only one ..................................................................................................... 11

Tender: Preparation Costs ......................................................................................... 11
Tender: Language ...................................................................................................... 11
Tender: Contents of Tender........................................................................................ 11
Tender: Submission Sheet and Bill of Quantities ......................................................... 11
Tender: Alternatives .................................................................................................. 11
Tender: Prices and Discounts ..................................................................................... 12
Tender: Currency ...................................................................................................... 12
Documents Establishing Eligibility of the Tenderer ..................................................... 12
Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Conformity of Materials, Equipment and Services
13
Documents Establishing the Conformity of the Technical Specification ...................... 13
Documents Establishing the Tenderers Qualifications ................................................ 13
Tenderer: Disqualification .......................................................................................... 14
Tender: Validity ......................................................................................................... 14
Tender: Security ........................................................................................................ 14
Tender: Format and Signing....................................................................................... 15
Tender Submission ....................................................................................... 15

33.
34.
35.
36.
F.
Evaluation Criteria ...................................................................................................... 9

Experience Criteria .................................................................................................... 10
Financial Criteria ....................................................................................................... 10
Personnel Capacity ..................................................................................................... 10
Equipment Capacity ................................................................................................... 10
Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA) ...................................................... 10
Tender Preparation ...................................................................................... 11

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
E.
Tender Document: Sections .......................................................................................... 8

Tender Document: Clarification ................................................................................... 9
Tender Document: Pre-Tender Meeting........................................................................ 9
Tender Document: Amendment .................................................................................... 9
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria .............................................................. 9

11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
D.
Scope of Tender ........................................................................................................... 6

Source of Funds ........................................................................................................... 6
Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices ................................................... 6
Eligible Tenderers ........................................................................................................ 7
Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services .................................................................. 8
Site Visit ...................................................................................................................... 8
Tender: Opening ........................................................................................................ 16

Tender: Confidentiality .............................................................................................. 16
Tender: Clarification .................................................................................................. 17
Tenderer: Contacting the Employer ........................................................................... 17
Tender: Responsive ness ............................................................................................. 17
Tender: Non-conformities,Errors, and Omissions ...................................................... 17
Tender: Correction of Arithmetical Errors ................................................................. 18
Tender: Preliminary Examination .............................................................................. 18
Tender: Technical Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18
Tender: Financial Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18
Tender: No Negotiation .............................................................................................. 19
Tender: Comparison .................................................................................................. 20
Tenderer: Post-qualification ....................................................................................... 20
Tenders: Employers Right to Accept or to Reject Any or All ...................................... 20
Contract Award............................................................................................ 20
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
Section 2.
Award Criteria........................................................................................................... 20
Notification of Award ................................................................................................. 20
Performance Security ................................................................................................. 20
Contract Signing ........................................................................................................ 21
Advising Unsuccessful Tenderers ................................................................................ 21
Adjudicator ................................................................................................................ 21
Tenderers Right to Complain .................................................................................... 21
Tender Data Sheet ........................................................................22
Section 3. Project Brief .....................................................................................27

Section 4.
A.
General Conditions of Contract ...................................................28

General ........................................................................................................ 28
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
B.
Time Control ................................................................................................ 37

42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
C.
Definitions .................................................................................................................. 28
Contract Documents ................................................................................................... 30
Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices ................................................. 30
Interpretation ............................................................................................................ 30
Documents Forming the Contract and Priority of Documents ..................................... 31
Eligibility ................................................................................................................... 31
Governing Language .................................................................................................. 32
Governing Law ......................................................................................................... 32
Gratuties / Agency fees ............................................................................................... 32
Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA) ...................................................... 32
Confidential Information ............................................................................................ 32
Communications and Notices ...................................................................................... 33
Copyright ................................................................................................................... 33
Assignment ................................................................................................................ 33
Sub-Contracting ......................................................................................................... 33
Other Contractors ...................................................................................................... 33
Contractors Responsibilities ...................................................................................... 33
Employers Responsibil- ities ...................................................................................... 33
Scope of Works .......................................................................................................... 33
Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 33
Engineers Decisions ................................................................................................... 34
Queries about the Contract conditions ........................................................................ 34
Delegation .................................................................................................................. 34
Contractors Personnel ............................................................................................... 34
Approval of the Contractors Temporary Works ........................................................ 34
Instructions ................................................................................................................ 34
Site Investigation Reports ........................................................................................... 34
Possession of the Site .................................................................................................. 35
Access to the Site ........................................................................................................ 35
Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment .................................................... 35
Discoveries ................................................................................................................. 35
Welfare of Labour ...................................................................................................... 35
Child Labour ............................................................................................................. 35
No Night and Friday Work ......................................................................................... 35
Employers and Contractors Risks ............................................................................ 35
Employers Risks ....................................................................................................... 36
Contractors Risks ..................................................................................................... 36
Insurance ................................................................................................................... 36
Taxes and Duties ........................................................................................................ 37
Limitation of Liability ................................................................................................ 37
Force Majeure............................................................................................................ 37
The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date ................................... 37
Programme of Works ................................................................................................. 37
Pro Rata Progress ...................................................................................................... 38
Early Warning ........................................................................................................... 38
Extension of the Intended Completion Date ................................................................ 38
Acceleration ............................................................................................................... 39
Delays Ordered by the Engineer ................................................................................. 39
Management Meetings ............................................................................................... 39
Quality Control ............................................................................................ 39

50.
Contractor to Construct the Works ............................................................................ 39
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
Works open to Inspection ........................................................................................... 39

Identifying Defects ..................................................................................................... 39
Tests .......................................................................................................................... 39
Examination of Work before covering up.................................................................... 39
Correction of Defects .................................................................................................. 39
Uncorrected Defects ................................................................................................... 39
Cost Control ................................................................................................. 40
D.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
Bill of Quantities ........................................................................................................ 40

Changes in the Quantities ........................................................................................... 40
Variations .................................................................................................................. 40
Payments for Variations ............................................................................................. 40
Cash Flow Forecasts ................................................................................................... 40
Payment Certificates .................................................................................................. 40
Payments ................................................................................................................... 41
Compensation Events ................................................................................................. 42
Change in Laws and Regulations ................................................................................ 43
Price Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 43
Retention ................................................................................................................... 43
Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................... 43
Bonus ......................................................................................................................... 44
Advance Payment ....................................................................................................... 44
Performance Security ................................................................................................. 44
Day works .................................................................................................................. 44
Cost of Repairs ........................................................................................................... 45
Completion of the Contract ........................................................................... 45
E.
74.
75.
76.
77.
Completion ................................................................................................................ 45
Taking Over ............................................................................................................... 45
Final Account ............................................................................................................. 45
As-built Drawings and Manuals .................................................................................. 45
Termination and Settlement of Disputes ........................................................ 45
F.
78.
1.
79.
80.
81.
82.
Termination ............................................................................................................... 45
46
Payment upon Termination ........................................................................................ 46
Property ..................................................................................................................... 47
Frustration ................................................................................................................. 47
Settlement of Disputes ................................................................................................ 48
Section 5.
Particular Conditions of Contract ..............................................50
Section 6.
Bill of Quantities ..........................................................................54
Section 7. General Specification ......................................................................67

B. PLUMBING WORKS ............................................................................................ 33
4
GRADIENTS .............................................................................................................. 34
SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................2

Section 9. Drawings .........................................................................................116
Section 1.
A.
1.
General
Scope of
Tender
1.1
The Employer, as indicated in the Tender Data Sheet (TDS) issues this Tender
Document for the procurement of Works and Related Services incidental thereto as
specified in the TDS and as detailed in Section 6: Bill of Quantities. The name of the
Tender and the number and identification of its constituent lot(s) are stated in the TDS.
1.2
The successful Tenderer will be required to complete the Works by the Intended
Completion Date specified in the Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC).7
1.3
Throughout this Tender Document:
(a)
the term in writing means communicated in written form with proof

of receipt;
(b)
if the context so requires, singular means plural and vice versa; and
(c)
2.
3.
Instructions to BIDDERS
Source of
Funds
Corrupt,
Fraudulent,
Collusive or
Coercive
Practices
day means calendar day.
2.1
The Employer has been allocated public funds as indicated in the TDS and intends
to apply a portion of the funds to eligible payments under the Contract for which
this Tender Document is issued.
2.2
For the purpose of this provision, public funds means any monetary resources
appropriated to procuring entities under Government budget, or revenues generated
by statutory bodies and corporations, or aid grants and credits put at the disposal of
procuring entities by the development partners through the Government.
2.3
Payments by the development partner, if so indicated in the TDS, will be made

only at the request of the Government and upon approval by the development
partner in accordance with the applicable Loan / Credit / Grant Agreement, and
will be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of that Agreement.
3.1
The Government requires that Employers, as well as Tenderers and Contractors,

shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the implementation of
procurement proceedings and the execution of Contracts under public funds.
3.2
In pursuance of this requirement, the Employer shall :
(a)
exclude the Tenderer from participation in the procurement proceedings

concerned or reject a proposal for award; and
(b)
declare a Tenderer ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of

time, from participation in procurement proceedings under public funds;
if it, at any time, determines that the Tenderer has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive or coercive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Contract under
public funds.
3.3
Should any corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practice of any kind come to
the knowledge of the Employer, it shall, in the first place, allow the Tenderer to
provide an explanation and shall, take actions only when a satisfactory explanation
is not received. Such exclusion and the reasons thereof, shall be recorded in the
record of the procurement proceedings and promptly communicated to the
Tenderer concerned. Any communications between the Tenderer and the Employer
related to matters of alleged fraud or corruption shall be in writing.
3.4
4.
Eligible
Tenderers
The Government defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth
below as follows:
(a)
corrupt practice means offering, giving, or promising to give, directly

or indirectly, to any officer or employee of a Procuring Entity or other
governmental/private authority or individual a gratuity in any form, an
employment or any other thing or service of value, as an inducement
with respect to an act or decision of, or method followed by, a Procuring
Entity in connection with the procurement proceeding;
(b)
fraudulent practice means a misrepresentation or omission of facts in

order to influence a procurement proceeding or the execution of a
Contract to the detriment of the Employer;
(c)
collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement among two and

more Tenderers with or without the knowledge of the Employer (prior to
or after Tender submission) designed to establish Tender prices at
artificial, non-competitive levels and to deprive the Employer of the
benefits of free, open and genuine competition; and
(d)
coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or

indirectly, persons or their property to influence the procurement
proceedings, or affect the execution of a Contract.
3.5
The Government requires that the Employers personnel have an equal obligation not to
solicit, ask for and/or use coercive methods to obtain personal benefits in connection
with the said proceedings.
4.1
This Invitation for Tenders is open to eligible Tenderers from all countries, except
for any specified in the TDS.
4.2
A Tenderer may be a physical or juridical individual or body of individuals, or

company, association or any combination of them under agreement in the form of
an intended or existing joint venture, consortium or association (JVCA), invited to
take part in public procurement or seeking to be so invited or submitting a Tender
in response to an Invitation for Tenders. All members of the JVCA shall be jointly
and severally liable to the Employer. JVCA is distinct from Contractor
Subcontractor arrangement where the entire responsibility for contract execution
rests with the Contractor.
4.3
A Government-owned enterprise in Bangladesh may also participate in the Tender

if it is legally and financially autonomous, it operates under commercial law, and it
is not a dependent agency of the Employer.
4.4
The Tender shall provide in Section 5: Tender and Contract Forms, a statement that
the Tenderer (including all members of a JVCA) is not associated, nor has been
associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with a consultant or any other entity
that has prepared the design, specifications and other documents for this Invitation
for Tenders.
5.
6.
4.5
The Tenderer shall not be under a declaration of ineligibility for corrupt,

fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.2.
4.6
The Tenderer with a consistent history of litigation or a number of arbitration

awards against it, shall not be eligible to Tender.
4.7
The Tenderer shall have the legal capacity to enter into the Contract.
4.8
The Tenderer shall not be insolvent, be in receivership, be bankrupt or being

wound up, its business activities shall not be suspended, and it shall not be the
subject of legal proceedings for any of the foregoing.
4.9
The Tenderer shall have fulfilled its obligations to pay taxes and social security
contributions under the relevant national laws and regulations.
Eligible
Materials,
Equipment and
Services
Site Visit
B.
Tender Document
7.
Tender
Document:
Sections
5.1
All materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract are eligible,
unless their origin is from a country specified in the TDS.
5.2
For purposes of this clause, origin means the place where the materials and
equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, or the place from which the
related services are supplied.
5.3
The origin of materials and equipment and services is distinct from the nationality of
the Tenderer.
6.1
The Tenderer, at the Tenderers own responsibility and risk, is encouraged to visit
and examine the Site and obtain all information that may be necessary for
preparing the Tender and entering into a Contract for performance of the Works.
6.2
The Tenderer should ensure that the Employer is informed of the visit in adequate
time to allow it to make appropriate arrangements.
6.3
The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the Tenderers own expense
7.1
The Sections comprising the Tender Document are listed below.

Section 1 Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)
Section 2 Tender Data Sheet (TDS)
Section 3 General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Section 4 Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC)
Section 5 Tender and Contract Forms
Section 6 Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
Section 7 General Specifications

Section 8 Particular Specifications
Section 9 Drawings
8.
9.
Tender
Document:
Clarification
Tender
Document: PreTender
Meeting
10. Tender
Document:
Amendment
7.2
The Employer will reject any tender submission if the Tender Document was not
purchased directly from the Employer, or through its agent as stated in the TDS.
7.3
The Tenderer is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms, and specifications in
the Tender Document as well as in Tender Amendments, if any. Failure to furnish all
information or documentation required by the Tender Document may result in the
rejection of the Tender.
8.1
A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification of the Tender Document shall

contact the Employer in writing at the Employers address indicated in the TDS. The
Employer will respond in writing to any request for clarification received no later than
seven (7) days prior to the deadline for submission of Tenders.
8.2
The Employer shall forward copies of its response to all those who have purchased the
Tender Document, including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its
source.
9.1
To clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter arising in the Tender
Document, the Employer may, if stated in the TDS, invite prospective Tenderers to
attend a Pre-Tender Meeting at the place, date and time as specified in the TDS.
Tenderers are encouraged to attend the meeting, if it is held.
9.2
The Tenderer is requested to submit any questions in writing so as to reach the

Employer not later than five (5) days prior to the date of the meeting.
9.3
Minutes of the pre-Tender meeting, including the text of the questions raised and
the responses given, together with any responses prepared after the meeting, will
be transmitted within seven (7) days to all those who purchased the Tender
document.
9.4
Non-attendance at the pre-Tender meeting will not be a cause for disqualification

of a Tenderer
10.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of Tenders, the Employer, for any
reason, on its own initiative or in response to a clarification request in writing from a
Tenderer, having purchased the Tender Document, may amend the Tender Document
by issuing an amendment.
10.2 Any amendment issued shall become an integral part of the Tender Document and
shall be communicated in writing to all those who have purchased the Tender
Document.
10.3 To give a prospective Tenderer reasonable time in which to take an amendment into
account in preparing its Tender, the Employer may, at its discretion, extend the
deadline for the submission of Tenders. In the event that an amendment is issued with a
period of only one third or less of the Tendering period remaining, then the deadline for
the submission of Tenders may be extended by the Employer, if so requested by a
substantial number of Tenderers.
C.
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
11. Evaluation
Criteria
11.1 The following evaluation criteria will be applicable, unless otherwise indicated in
the TDS:
12. Experience
Criteria
(a)
completion time; and
(b)
adjustments for minor deviations on substantially responsive tenders.
12.1 The Tenderer shall possess the necessary professional and technical qualifications
and competence, financial resources, equipment and other physical facilities,
managerial capability, specific experience, reputation, and the personnel, to
perform the Contract.
12.2 To qualify for a multiple number of lots in a package for which Tenders are invited
in the Invitation for Tenders, the Tenderer shall demonstrate having resources and
experience sufficient to meet the aggregate of the qualifying criteria for the
individual lots.
12.3 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of construction experience
to qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract:
(a)
a minimum number of years of general experience in the construction of

works as specified in the TDS; and
(b) specific experience as a prime Contractor or Subcontractor in the

construction of at least the number of completed Contracts stated in the TDS
of a nature, complexity and construction technology similar to the proposed
Works over the period stated in the TDS.
13. Financial
Criteria
13.1 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of financial capacity to
qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract.
(a)
the average annual construction turnover as specified in the TDS during the
period specified in the TDS; and
(b) the minimum Tender capacity as specified in the TDS.
13.2 The Tenderer shall submit satisfactory bank references and documents
demonstrating availability of funds/liquid assets and/or credit facilities from its
banker(s) to successfully complete the Contract, as specified in the TDS.
13.3 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence that all claims, arbitration or
other litigation case have been satisfactorily resolved, and if not, they shall have no
serious negative impact on the financial capacity of the Tenderer.
14. Personnel
Capacity
14.1 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of personnel capacity to
qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract:
(a)
a Construction Project Manager with qualifications and experience as

specified in the TDS;
(b) the minimum number of Engineers with qualifications and experience as

specified in the TDS; and
(c)
other key staff with qualifications and experience as specified in the TDS.
15. Equipment
Capacity
15.1 The Tenderer shall own or have assured access through lease, hire, or other such
16. Joint Venture,

Consortium or
Association
(JVCA)
16.1 The figures for each of the partners of a JVCA shall be added together to determine the
method, of the essential equipment, in full working order, as specified in the TDS.
Tenderers compliance with the minimum qualifying criteria; however, for a JVCA to
qualify, each of its partners must meet at least twenty-five (25) percent of minimum
criteria for an individual Tenderer, and the partner in charge at least forty (40) percent
of those minimum criteria. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in
rejection of the JVCA Tender. Subcontractors experience and resources will not be
taken into account in determining the Tenderers compliance with the qualifying
criteria.
D.
Tender Preparation
17. Tender:
one
Only
17.1 A Tenderer shall submit only one (1) Tender for each lot, either individually or as a
partner in a JVCA. A Tenderer who submits or participates in more than one (1)
Tender will cause all the Tenders with that Tenderers participation to be rejected.
18. Tender:
Preparation
Costs
18.1 The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission
19. Tender:
Language
19.1 The Tender, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the Tender shall
of its Tender, and the Employer shall not be responsible or liable for those costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the Tendering process.
be written in the English or Bangla language, unless specified otherwise in the TDS.
Supporting documents and printed literature furnished by the Tenderer that are part of
the Tender may be in another language, provided they are accompanied by an
accurate translation of the relevant passages in the English or Bangla language, in
which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Tender, such translation shall govern.
19.2 The Tenderer shall bear all costs of translation to the governing language and all risks
of the accuracy of such translation.
20. Tender:
Contents of
Tender
21. Tender:
Submission
Sheet and Bill of
Quantities
20.1 The Tender prepared by the Tenderer shall comprise the following:
(a)
The Tender Submission Sheet.
(b)
The priced Bill of Quantities for each lot.
(c)
Tender Security.
(d)
Alternative tender.
(e)
Written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Tender to

commit the Tenderer.
(f)
Documentary evidence establishing the Tenderers eligibility to

Tender, including the Tenderer Information Sheet.
(g)
Documentary evidence establishing the Tenderers qualifications to

perform the Contract, if its Tender is accepted;
(h)
Description of work method and schedule.
(i)
Any other document as specified in the TDS.
21.1 The Tenderer shall submit the Tender Submission. This document shall be completed
without any alterations to its format, filling in all blank spaces with the information
requested, failing which the Tender may be rejected as being incomplete.
21.2 The Tenderer shall submit the priced Bill of. If in preparing its Tender, the Tenderer
has made errors in the unit price or the total price, and wishes to correct such errors
prior to submission of its Tender, it may do so, but shall ensure that each correction is
suitable initialled by the authorised person of the Tenderer and that a statement shall
be made as to the total number of corrections made, at the end of the priced Bill of
Quantities.
22. Tender:
Alternatives
22.1 Unless otherwise stated in the TDS, alternative Tenders shall not be considered.
22.2 If so allowed in the Tender Data Sheet, Tenderers wishing to offer technical
alternatives to the requirements of the Tender Documents must also submit a Tender
that complies with the requirements of the Tender Documents, including the basic
technical design as indicated in the drawings and specifications. In addition to
submitting the basic Tender, the Tenderer shall provide all information necessary for a
complete evaluation of the alternative(s) by the Employer, including design
calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction
methods and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the
lowest evaluated Tender conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be
considered by the Employer.
22.3 When alternative times for completion are explicitly invited, a statement to that effect
will be included in the TDS, as will the method of evaluating different times for
completion.
23. Tender: Prices
and Discounts
23.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Tenderer in the Tender Submission Sheet and
in the Bill of Quantities shall conform to the requirements specified below.
23.2 The Tenderer shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the
Bill of Quantities (BOQ). Items against which no rate or price is entered by the
Tenderer will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed
covered by the rates for other items and prices in the BOQ.
23.3 The price to be quoted in the Tender Submission Sheet and shall be the total price of
the Tender, excluding any discounts offered.
23.4 The Tenderer shall quote any unconditional discounts and the methodology for their
application in the Tender Submission Sheet.
23.5 Unless otherwise provided in the TDS and the PCC, the rates and prices quoted
by the Tenderer are subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract
in accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 66. The Tenderer shall furnish
the indices and weightings for the price adjustment formulae in the PCC. The
Employer may require the Tenderer to justify its proposed indices and
weightings.
23.6 If so indicated in the TDS, Tenders are being invited for individual lots or for any
combination of lots. Tenderers wishing to offer any price reduction for the award of
more than one lot shall specify in their Tender the price reductions applicable to each
lot, or alternatively, to any combination of lots within the package. Price reductions or
discounts will be considered in the Tender evaluation, provided the Tenders for all
lots are submitted and opened at the same time.
23.7 All duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or
for any other causes, as of the date twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline
for submission of Tenders, shall be included in the rates and prices and the total
Tender Price submitted by the Tenderer.
24. Tender:
Currency
24.1 All prices shall be quoted in Bangladesh Taka.
25. Documents
Establishing
Eligibility of the
Tenderer
25.1 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence to establish its eligibility.
(a)
complete the eligibility declarations in the Tender Submission Sheet, Tender

and Contract Forms; and
(b) if the Tenderer is an existing or intended JVCA, it must submit the Tenderer
Information Sheet and a copy of the JVCA Agreement, or a letter of intent
to enter into such an agreement. The respective document shall be signed by
all legally authorised signatories of all the parties to the existing or intended
JVCA, as appropriate.
26. Documents
Establishing the
Eligibility and
Conformity of
Materials,
Equipment and
Services
26.1 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence to establish the origin of all
materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract.
26.2 To establish the conformity of the materials, equipment and services to be supplied
under the Contract, the Tenderer shall furnish, as part of its Tender, the documentary
evidence (which may be in the form of literature, drawings or data) that these
conform to the technical specifications and standards specified in Section General
Specifications and Particular Specifications.
27. Documents
27.1
Establishing the
Conformity of the
Technical
Specification
28. Documents
Establishing the
Tenderers
Qualifications
The Tenderer shall furnish a Technical Specification including a statement of work

methods and schedule and any other information as stipulated in TDS, in sufficient
detail to demonstrate the adequacy for the Tenderers submission to meet the work
requirements and the completion time.
28.1 Tenderers shall submit documentary evidence.

28.2 Tenderers shall submit the Tenderer Information Sheet, Tender and Contract Forms.
28.3 Tenderers shall include the following information and documents with their Tenders:
(a)
total monetary value of construction work performed for each of the last five (5)
years;
(b) experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of, and details of
work under way or Contractually committed and clients who may be
contacted for further information on those Contracts;
(c)
major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract;
(d) qualification and experience of key site management and technical

personnel proposed for the Contract;
(e) reports on the financial standing of the Tenderer, such as profit and loss
statements and corresponding auditors reports for the past five (5) years;
(f) financial reports or balance sheets or profit and loss statements or auditors
reports or bank references with documents or a combination of these
demonstrating the availability of liquid assets to successfully complete the
contract;
(g) evidence of adequacy of working capital for this Contract (access to line(s)
of credit and availability of other financial resources);
(h) authority to seek references from the Tenderers bankers; and

(i)
information on past (5 years) litigation in which the Tenderer has been involved
or in which the Tenderer is currently involved.
28.4 Tenders submitted by a JVCA shall comply with the following requirements, and any
other requirements as specified in the TDS:
(a) the Tender shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all partners;

(b) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract terms;
(c) one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, authorized to incur
liabilities, and receive instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners
of the joint venture; and
(d) the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be done
exclusively with the partner in charge.
29. Tenderer:
Disqualification
29.1 The Employer shall disqualify a Tenderer who submits a document containing
false information for purposes of qualification or misleads or makes false
representations in proving its qualification requirements. If such an occurrence is
proven, the Employer may declare such a Tenderer ineligible, either indefinitely
or for a stated period of time, from participation in future procurement
proceedings
29.2 The Employer may disqualify a Tenderer who has record of poor performance
such as abandoning the works, not properly completing the Contract, inordinate
delays, litigation history or financial failures.
30. Tender: Validity
30.1 Tenders shall remain valid for the period specified in the TDS after the date of Tender
submission prescribed by the Employer. A Tender valid for a shorter period shall be
rejected by the Employer as non responsive.
30.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the Tender validity period, the
Employer may solicit the Tenderers consent to an extension of the period of validity
of their Tenders. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. The Tender
Security provided shall also be suitably extended promptly. If a Tenderer does not
respond or refuses the request it shall not forfeit its Tender Security, but its Tender
shall no longer be considered in the evaluation proceedings. A Tenderer agreeing to
the request will not be required or permitted to modify its Tender.
31. Tender: Security
31.1 The Tenderer shall furnish as part of its Tender, a Tender Security in original form
and in the amount specified in the TDS.
31.2 The Tender Security shall:

(a) at the Tenderers option, be either;
(i)
in the form of a bank draft or pay order, or
(ii)
in the form of an irrevocable bank guarantee issued by a scheduled

Bank of Bangladesh.
(b)
be payable promptly upon written demand by the Employer in the case of

the conditions listed in ITT Sub-Clause 31.5 being invoked; and
(c)
Remain valid for a period of twenty eight (28) days beyond the original
validity period of Tenders.
31.3 A Tender not accompanied by a valid Tender Security in accordance with ITT SubClause 31.2 shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.
31.4 Unsuccessful Tenderers Tender Security will be discharged or returned within

twenty eight (28) days of the end of the Tender validity period specified in ITT SubClause 30.1 and 30.2 The Tender Security of the successful Tenderer will be
discharged upon the Tenderers furnishing of the Performance Security pursuant to
ITT Clause 53 and signing the Contract Agreement.
31.5 The Tender Security may be forfeited:

(a)
if a Tenderer withdraws its Tender during the period of Tender validity

specified by the Tenderer on the Tender Submission Sheet, except as
provided in ITT Sub-Clause 30.2; or
(b) if the successful Tenderer fails to:

(i)
accept the correction of its Tender Price pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause

43.2; or
31.6
(ii)
furnish a Performance Security in accordance with ITT Clause 53; or
(iii)
sign the Contract in accordance with ITT Clause 54.
The Tender Security of a JVCA shall be in the name of the JVCA that submits the
Tender. If the JVCA has not been legally constituted at the time of tendering, the
Tender Security shall be in the name of all intended JVCA partners as named in the
letter of intent mentioned in ITT Sub-Clause 25.1
32.1 The Tenderer shall prepare one (1) original of the documents comprising the Tender
32. Tender: Format

and Signing
as described in ITT Sub-Clause 20.1 and clearly mark it ORIGINAL. In addition,

the Tenderer shall prepare the number of copies of the Tender, as specified in the TDS
and clearly mark each of them COPY. In the event of any discrepancy between the
original and the copies, the original shall prevail.
32.2 The original and each copy of the Tender shall be typed or written in indelible ink and
shall be signed by the person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Tenderer. This
authorization shall consist of a written authorization and shall be attached to the
Tenderer Information Sheet The name and position held by each person signing the
authorization must be typed or printed below the signature. All pages of the original
and of each copy of the Tender, except for un-amended printed literature, shall be
numbered sequentially and signed or initialled by the person signing the Tender.
32.3 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if they are signed or
initialled by the person(s) signing the Tender
E.
Tender Submission
33. Tender: Sealing

and Marking
33.1 The Tenderer shall enclose the original in one (1) envelope and all the copies of the
Tender in another envelope, duly marking the envelopes as ORIGINAL and
COPY. These two (2) envelopes shall then be enclosed in one (1) single outer
envelope.
33.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:

(a) bear the name and address of the Tenderer;
(b) be addressed to the Employer at the address specified in the TDS;
(c) bear the name of the Tender and the Tender Number as specified in the
TDS; and
(d) bear a statement DO NOT OPEN BEFORE.... the time and date for
Tender opening as specified in the TDS..
33.3 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required by ITT Sub-Clause 33.2, the
Employer will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of
the Tender
34. Tender:
Submission
Deadline
34.1 Tenders must be received by the Employer at the address specified in ITT (instruction
to tenderers) Sub Clause 33.2 no later than the date and time specified in the TDS.
34.2 The Tender may be hand delivered, posted by registered mail or sent by courier. The
Employer shall, on request, provide the Tenderer with a receipt showing the date and
time when its Tender was received.
34.3 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Tenders
by amending the Tender Document in accordance with ITT Clause 10, in which case
all rights and obligations of the Employer and Tenderers previously subject to the
deadline shall thereafter be subject to the new deadline as extended.
35. Tender:
Submitted Late
35.1 Any Tender received by the Employer after the deadline for submission of Tenders in
accordance with ITT Clause 34 shall be declared late, will be rejected, and returned
unopened to the Tenderer.

36. Tender:
Modification,
Substitution or
Withdrawal
36.1 A Tenderer may modify, substitute or withdraw its Tender after it has been submitted
by sending a written notice, duly signed by the same authorized representative, and
shall include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 32.2,
(except that no copies of the withdrawal notice are required). The corresponding
substitution or modification of the Tender must accompany the respective written
notice. The written notice must be:
(a)
submitted in accordance with ITT Clauses 32 and 33 (except that withdrawal

notices do not require copies), and in addition, the respective envelopes shall
be clearly marked MODIFICATION, SUBSTITUTION, OR WITHDRAWAL;
and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of
Tenders, in accordance with ITT Clause 34.
36.2 Tenders requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 36.1 shall be
returned unopened to the Tenderers, only after the Tender opening.
36.3 No Tender may be modified, substituted, or withdrawn after the deadline for
submission of Tenders specified in ITT Clause 34.
36.4 Tenderers may only offer discounts to, or otherwise modify the prices of their Tenders
by including Tender modifications in the original Tender submission, or by submitting
Tender modifications in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 30.1.
F.
Tender Opening and Evaluation
37. Tender:
Opening
37.1 The Employer shall open the Tenders in public, including modifications or
substitutions made pursuant to ITT Clause 36, at the time, on the date, and only at the
one place specified in the TDS. Tenders for which an acceptable notice of withdrawal
has been submitted pursuant to ITT Clause 36 shall not be opened. Tenderers or their
authorised representatives shall be allowed to attend and witness the opening of
Tenders, and shall sign a register evidencing their attendance.
37.2 The name of the Tenderer, Tender modifications, substitutions or withdrawals,

total amount of each Tender, number of corrections, discounts, and the presence or
absence of requisite Tender Security, any alternatives, if so permitted, and such
other details as the Employer, at its discretion, may consider appropriate, shall be
read out aloud and recorded. Only discounts and alternative offers read out at the
Tender opening shall be considered for evaluation. All pages of the original
Tender, except for un-amended printed literature, will be initialled by a minimum
of three (3) members of the Employers Tender opening committee.
37.3 Minutes of the Tender opening shall be made by the Employer and furnished to
any Tenderer upon receipt of a written request. The minutes shall include, as a
minimum: the name of the Tenderer and whether there is a withdrawal,
substitution, or modification; the Tender Price, per lot if applicable, including any
discounts and alternative offers; and the presence or absence of a Tender Security,
if one was required.
37.4 Tenders not opened and read out at the Tender opening shall not be considered,
irrespective of the circumstances, and shall be returned unopened to the Tenderer.
37.5 No Tender shall be rejected at the Tender opening, except for late Tenders, which shall
be returned unopened to the Tenderer pursuant to ITT Clause 35.
38. Tender:
38.1 After the opening of Tenders, information relating to the examination, clarification, and
Confidentiality
evaluation of Tenders and recommendations for award shall not be disclosed to

Tenderers or other persons not officially concerned with the evaluation process until
after the award of the Contract is announced.
39. Tender:
Clarification
39.1 The Employer may ask Tenderers for clarification of their Tenders in order to facilitate
40. Tenderer:
Contacting the
Employer
40.1 Following the opening of the Tenders and until the Contract is signed no Tenderer
the examination and evaluation of Tenders. The request for clarification and the
response shall be in writing, and any changes in the prices or substance of the Tender
shall not be sought, offered or permitted, except to confirm the correction of
arithmetical errors discovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the Tenders, in
accordance with ITT Clause 43.
shall make any unsolicited communication to the Employer or try in any way to
influence the Employers examination and evaluation of the Tenders.
40.2 Any effort by a Tenderer to influence the Employer in its decisions on the
examination, evaluation, comparison, and post-qualification of the Tenders or
Contract award may result in the rejection of its Tender.
40.3 Notwithstanding ITT Sub-Clause 40.1, from the time of Tender opening to the time of
Contract award, if any Tenderer wishes to contact the Employer on any matter related
to the tendering process, it should do so in writing.
41. Tender:
Responsive ness
41.1 The Employers determination of a Tenders responsiveness is to be based on the

contents of the Tender itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
41.2 A substantially responsive Tender is one that conforms in all respects to the
requirements of the Tender Document without material deviation, reservation, or
omission. A material deviation, reservation, or omission is one that:
(a)
affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the

Works specified in the Contract; or
(b) limits in any substantial way, or is inconsistent with the Tender Document,
the Employers rights or the Tenderers obligations under the Contract; or
(c)
if rectified would unfairly affect the competitive position of other Tenderers

presenting substantially responsive Tenders.
41.3 If a Tender is not substantially responsive to the Tender Document, it shall be rejected
by the Employer and shall not subsequently be made responsive by the Tenderer by
correction of the material deviation, reservation, or omission.
41.4 There shall be no requirement as to the minimum number of responsive Tenders.
42. Tender: Nonconformities,Er

rors, and
Omissions
42.1 The Employer may regard a Tender as responsive even if it contains minor deviations
that do not materially alter or depart from the characteristics, terms, conditions and
other requirement set forth in the Tender Document or if it contains errors or oversights
that are capable of being corrected without affecting the substance of the Tender.
42.2 Provided that a Tender is substantially responsive, the Employer may request that the
Tenderer submits the necessary information or documentation, within a reasonable
period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities or omissions in the Tender
related to documentation requirements. Such omission shall not be related to any
aspect of the rates of the Tender reflected in the Priced Bill of Quantities. Failure by the
Tenderer to comply with the request may result in the rejection of its Tender.
43. Tender:
Correction of
Arithmetical
Errors
43.1 Provided that the Tender is substantially responsive, the Employer shall correct
arithmetical errors on the following basis:
(a)
if there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the line item total price
that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall
prevail and the line item total price shall be corrected, unless in the opinion of
the Employer there is an obvious misplacement of the decimal point in the
unit price, in which case the total price as quoted shall govern and the unit
price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of

subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected; and
(c)
if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in words

shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related to an
arithmetical error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevail subject to
(a) and (b) above.
43.2 Any arithmetical error or other discrepancies as stated in ITT Sub-Clause 43.1
shall be immediately notified to the concerned Tenderer.
43.3 Any Tenderer that does not accept the correction of errors, as determined by the
application of ITT Sub-Clause 43.1, shall be disqualified and its Tender Security
may be forfeited.
44. Tender:
Preliminary
Examination
44.1 The Employer shall firstly examine the Tenders to confirm that all documentation
requested in ITT Clause 20 has been provided, and to determine the completeness of
each document submitted.
44.2 The Employer shall assess whether the Tenderers Qualifications as per Section C are
substantially met. Any negative determination by the Employer will result in rejecting
the Tender as non-responsive without the need for further evaluation as per ITT clauses
45 and 46.
45. Tender:
Technical
Evaluation
45.1 The Employer shall secondly examine the Tender to confirm that all terms and
conditions specified in the GCC and the PCC have been accepted by the Tenderer
without any material deviation or reservation.
45.2 The Employer shall evaluate the technical aspects of the Tender submitted in
accordance with ITT Clauses 26 and 27, to confirm that all requirements specified
General Specifications and Particular Specifications of the Tender Document have
been met without any material deviation or reservation.
45.3 If, after the examination of the terms and conditions and the technical aspects of the
Tender, the Employer determines that the Tender is not substantially responsive in
accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 41.3, it shall reject the Tender.
46. Tender:
Financial
46.1 The Employer shall thirdly evaluate each Tender that has been determined, up to this
stage of the evaluation, to be substantially responsive.
Evaluation
46.2 To evaluate a Tender, the Employer shall consider the following:

(a)
the Tender price, excluding Provisional Sums and the provision, if any, for
contingencies in the Summary Bill of Quantities, but including Daywork,
where priced competitively;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetical errors pursuant to ITT SubClause 43.1;
(c)
appropriate adjustments in order to take into consideration discounts or other

price modifications offered pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 23.4;
(d) appropriate adjustments for any other acceptable variations or deviations

pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 42.1; and
(e)
application of all the evaluation factors indicated in ITT Clause 11.
46.3 Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors which are in excess of
the requirements of the Tender Document or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for
the Employer will not be taken into account in Tender evaluation.
46.4 The estimated effect of any price adjustment provisions under GCC Clause 66, applied
over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in Tender
evaluation.
46.5 If so indicated in the TDS (ITT Sub-Clause 23.6), the Tender Document shall allow
Tenderers to quote separate prices for one or more lots, and shall allow the Employer to
award one or multiple lots to more than one Tenderer following the methodology
specified in ITT Sub-Clause 46.6.
46.6 To determine the lowest-evaluated lot or combination of lots, the Employer shall take
into account:
(a)
The experience and resources sufficient to meet the aggregate of the

qualifying criteria for the individual lot;
(b) the lowest-evaluated Tender for each lot calculated in accordance with the
requirements of Evaluation Criteria;
(c)
the price reduction per lot or combination of lots and the methodology for
their application as offered by the Tenderer in its Tender; and
(d) the Contract-award sequence that provides the optimum economic

combination taking into account any limitations due to constraints in Works
or execution capacity determined in accordance with the post-qualification
criteria under ITT Clause 49.
46.7 If the lowest Evaluated Tender is seriously unbalanced or front loaded in the opinion of
the Employer, the Employer may require the Tenderer to produce detailed price
analysis for any or all items of the BOQ, to demonstrate the internal consistency of
those prices with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of
the price analysis, taking into consideration the schedule of estimated Contract
payments, the Employer may require that the amount of the Performance Security set
forth in ITT Clause 53 be increased at the expenses of the Tenderer to a level sufficient
to protect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default by such Tenderer
during Contract implementation, if awarded the contract.
47. Tender: No
Negotiation
47.1 No negotiations shall be held with the lowest or any other Tenderer.
47.2 A Tenderer shall not be required, as a condition for award, to undertake responsibilities
not stipulated in the Tender documents, to change its price, or otherwise to modify its
Tender.
48. Tender:
Comparison
48.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive Tenders to determine the
49. Tenderer: Postqualification
49.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Tenderer that is selected
lowest-evaluated Tender, in accordance with ITT Clause 46.
as having submitted the lowest evaluated and substantially responsive Tender is

qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
49.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary evidence of
the Tenderers qualifications submitted by the Tenderer, pursuant to ITT Clause 28, to
clarifications in accordance with ITT Clause 39 and the qualification criteria indicated
in ITT Clauses 11 to 16 inclusive. Factors not included therein shall not be used in the
evaluation of the Tenderers qualification.
49.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award of the Contract to the
Tenderer. A negative determination shall result in rejection of the Tenderers Tender,
in which event the Employer shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated Tender to make
a similar determination of that Tenderers capabilities to perform satisfactorily
50. Tenders:
Employers
Right to Accept
or to Reject
Any or All
G.
50.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept any Tender, to annul the Tender
proceedings, or to reject any or all Tenders, at any time prior to Contract award,
without thereby incurring any liability to Tenderers, or any obligation to inform
Tenderers of the grounds for the Employers actions.
Contract Award
51. Award Criteria
51.1 The Employer shall award the Contract to the Tenderer whose offer is
substantially responsive to the Tender Document and that has been determined to
be the lowest evaluated Tender, provided further that the Tenderer is determined
to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
52. Notification of
Award
52.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of Tender validity, the Employer shall notify the
successful Tenderer, in writing, that its Tender has been accepted.
52.2 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the Notification of Award shall
constitute a binding Contract.
52.3 The Notification of Award shall state the value of the proposed Contract, the amount
of the Performance Security, the time within which the Performance Security shall be
submitted and the time within which the Contract shall be signed.
53. Performance
Security
53.1 Within fourteen (14) days of the receipt of Notification of Award from the
Employer, the successful Tenderer shall furnish the Performance Security for the
due performance of the Contract in the amount specified in the TDS using for that
purpose the Performance Security Form furnished in Tender and Contract Forms.
53.2 The Performance Security shall be valid until a date twenty eight (28) days after
the date of issue of the certificate of completion.
53.3 The proceeds of the Performance Security shall be payable to the Employer
unconditionally upon first written demand as compensation for any loss resulting
from the Contractors failure to complete its obligations under the Contract.
54. Contract Signing
54.1 At the same time as the Employer issues the Notification of Award, the Employer
shall send the Contract Agreement and all documents forming the Contract, to the
successful Tenderer.
54.2 Within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of the Contract Agreement, the successful
Tenderer shall sign, date, and return it to the Employer.
54.3 Failure of the successful Tenderer to submit the Performance Security, pursuant to
ITT Sub-Clause 53.1, or sign the Contract, pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 54.2, shall
constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the
Tender Security. In that event, the Employer may award the Contract to the next
lowest evaluated responsive Tenderer at their quoted price (corrected for arithmetical
errors), who is assessed by the Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract
satisfactorily.
54.4 Immediately upon receipt of the signed Contract Agreement and Performance
Security from the successful Tenderer, the Employer shall discharge and return the
successful Tenderers Tender Security.
55. Advising
Unsuccessful
Tenderers
55.1 Upon the successful Tenderers furnishing of the Performance Security pursuant to
ITT Clause 53, and signing of the Contract pursuant to ITT Clause 54, the Employer
shall also notify all other Tenderers that their Tenders have been unsuccessful.
55.2 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any unsuccessful Tenderer who,
after notification in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 55.1, requests in writing for the
Employer to communicate the grounds on which its Tender was not selected.
56. Adjudicator
56.1 The Employer proposes the person named in the TDS to be appointed as
Adjudicator under the Contract, at an hourly fee and for those reimbursable
expenses specified in the TDS.
56.2 If the Tenderer disagrees with this proposal, the Tenderer should state so in its
Tender. If, in the Notification of Award, the Employer and the Tenderer has still
not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Adjudicator shall be
appointed by the Appointing Authority designated in the TDS.
57. Tenderers Right
to Complain
57.1
Any Tenderer has the right to complain if it has suffered or may suffer loss or
damage due to a breach of a duty imposed on the Employer by the Public
Procurement Regulations 2003 (PPR).
57.2
The complaint shall firstly be processed through an administrative review

following the procedures set out in Regulation 51 of the PPR. The place and
address for the first step in the submission of complaints to the Administrative
Authority is provided in the TDS.
57.3
If not satisfied with the outcome of the administrative review, the Tenderer may
complain to the Review Panel pursuant to Regulation 53 of the PPR.
Section 2.
ITT Clause
Tender Data Sheet
Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in the Instructions to Tenderers

A. General
ITT 1.1
The Employer is Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Head Office

represented by General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation
Authority
The Name of the Tender is:
Coxs Bazar International Airport, Coxs Bazar.
The number and identification of lots comprising the Tender are:
Not Applicable
ITT 2.1
The source of public funds is CAAB and Government of Bangladesh
ITT 2.3
The name of the Development Partner is: Not applicable
ITT 4.1
Tenderers from the following countries are not eligible: Israel
ITT 5.1
Materials, equipment and service from the following countries are not eligible: Israel
B. Tender Document
ITT 7.2
The following are authorized agents of the Employer for the purpose of issuing the Tender
Document: "None"
ITT 8.1
For clarification of Tenders purposes only, the Employer's address is:

Attention: Superintending Engineer (Civil)
Address: Establishment & Engineering Division, CAAB
Head Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka
Telephone: 880-3-8652426-34/ext. 5603
Facsimile number: 888-2-652426
Electronic mail address:
C. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
ITT 11.1
The work is to be completed within the stipulated time as mentioned in the IFT.
ITT 12.3(a)
The minimum period of general experience of the Tenderer in the building construction works
shall be 5 (five) years.
ITT 12.3(a)
The required number of similar contracts completed shall be 1 over a period of last 5 years
building works: civil and electrical tk. 350.00 (three hundred fifty) lakh in a single tender.
ITT 12.3(b)
The Tenderer shall have a minimum average annual Construction turnover during last 5 (five)
years amounting to Tk. 71.00 (seventy one) Lac. The bidder shall submit audit reports and a
certificate from an audit firm clearly mentioning the amount of annual turnover in the last five
years.
ITT 13.1(a)
The minimum tender capacity shall be : 250 (two hundred fifty) lakh
[the following formulae may be used to calculate the tender capacity:
Assessed tender capacity = (A x N x 1.5-B)
Where
A = maximum value of works performed in any one year during last five years
N= completion time of the proposed work in years
B= value of existing commitments and works to be completed during the next N years
ITT 13.1(b)
The minimum amount of free funds (Liquid Assets) and/or credit facilities not of other
contractual commitments of the successful Tenderer shall be Tk. 25 (twenty five) Lac.
ITT 14.1(a)
A construction project manager shall have the following qualifications and experience: the tender
shall have proposed a construction project manager (site-in-charge), graduate engineer (civil) for
the project, having 7 (seven) years experience in supervision of works including not less than 5
(five) years as manager.
ITT 14.1(b)
The maximum number of engineers with qualifications and experiences shall be as follow:
a)
Graduate civil engineer:

A senior engineer having at least 5 years professional experience including experience
in structural works.
b) Diploma in civil engineering at least 01 (one) number having at

least 7 years field experience in similar works.
c)
ITT 14.1(c)
Diploma in electrical engineering at least 01 (one) number having at least 7 years field
experience in similar works.
Other key staff with qualifications and experience shall be as follows :

Not applicable.
D. Preparation of Tender
ITT 19.1
The tender, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the tender shall be in the
English language.
ITT 20.1(i)
The tenderer shall submit with its tender the following additional documents :
List of professional and technical personnel to be deployed in the project (form w-9 in
section 5)
-
Curriculum vitae (cv) of professional and technical personnel to b e deployed in the

project ( form w-10 in section 5)
Tenders submitted under joint-venture arrangement must accompany the joint venture.
The joint venture agreement must contain the specific responsibilities and duties of the
parties for execution of the work and also designate the person empowered by the
parties to sign the tender on behalf of the joint venture. A resolution in this regard duly
signed by the persons signing the joint- venture agreement shall have to be submitted
along with the joint venture agreement. Tenders submitted by a JV shall comply with
the requirements specified in Clause 28.4 (section 1).
Valid and up to date trade license

CB & A category contractor and supervisory license from electrical licensing board of
the govt.
Article of incorporation or registration of the firm
Up to date tax clearance certificate
VAT registration certificate
Original letter naming the person authorized to sign on behalf of the tenderer.
Certificate of satisfactory completion of building construction work of minimum value
as specified in TDS
Statement of annual average turnover for the last three years
List of equipment owned
CV of technical personnel
Statement from the banker confirming liquid asset/credit limit
ITT 22.1
Alternative tenders will not be permitted.
ITT 22.3
There shall not be alternative times for completion of the works.
ITT 23.5
The prices quoted by the tenderer shall be fixed for the duration of the contract.
ITT 23.6
Tenders are being invited for an individual lot.
&
ITT 46.5
ITT 27.1
The required Technical Documents shall include the following additional information:
I.
Work plan/ program (form W-11 in section 5)
II.
ITT 28.4
Statement of work method/ methodology (form W-11 in section 5)
III.
Construction plant/ machinery and equipment to be used in the project (form W-12 in
section 5)
IV.
Technical specification and brochures of machinery/plant to be incorporated in the work
A tender submitted by a JVCA shall also comply with the following requirements:
a)
In case of a successful tender the form of agreement shall be signed so as to be legally

binding on all partners.
b) The authorization of one partner being nominated as in charge shall be evidenced by

submitting a power of attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the
partners.
c)
A relevant statement to the effect that all the partners of the joint venture shall be liable
jointly and severally for the execution of the contract, shall be included in the
authorization mentioned under (b) above as well as in the form of tender and the form
of agreement (in case of a successful tender).
d) A copy of the agreement entered into by the joint venture partners shall be submitted
with the tender.
ITT 30.1
The tender validity period shall be 120days.

In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry to the original tender validity period, the employer
may request the tenderer for a specification extension in the period of validity. The request and
the responses thereto shall be made in writing or by cable. A tenderer may refuse the request
without forfeiting his tender security. a tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required nor
permitted to modify his tender, but will be required to extend the validity of his tender security
discharge and forfeiture of tender security shall continue to appy during the extended period of
tender validity.
ITT 31.1
The amount of the tender security shall be tk 02,50,000 (Two lakh fifty thousand) in the form of
bank draft or pay order from any scheduled bank or in the form of irrevocable bank guarantee
issued from other than Publc Works Department (PWD) limited in favour of the executive
engineer, Cox,s Bazar District Office will have to be enclosed with the ORIGINAL tender.
ITT 32.1
In addition to the original of the tender, One copy (to be copied by the tenderer form the original
copy) shall be submitted.
E. Submission of Tender
ITT 33.2(c)
The inner and the outer envelops shall bear the following additional identification marks:
Name of work: Coxs Bazar International Airport, Coxs Bazar
For Tender submission purposes only, the employers address is:

Attention: General Manager
Address: Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh, Head
Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka.
The deadline for the submission of the tender is:
Time & date: As mentioned in the invitation for the tender (IFT)
F. Opening and Evaluation of Tender
ITT 37.1
The Tender opening shall take place at:

Address: TOC & TEC Room of Engineering Department of CAAB, Head Office Building (5th
Floor), Kurmitola, Dhaka-1000.
G. Award of Contract
ITT 53.1
The amount of Performance Security shall be 12% (twelve percent) of the Contract Price from
any scheduled bank of Bangladesh.
ITT 53.2
If the time for completion of the work is extended the validity of performance security is to be
extended accordingly up to a date 28 days beyond the issuance
ITT 54.2
The Contractor shall be required to execute 03 (three) copies of contract agreement in nonjudicial stamp of Tk. 150/- (Taka one hundred & fifty) each.
ITT 56.1
The Adjudicator proposed by the Employer is General Manager, CAAB, Establishment &
Engineering Division. The hourly fee shall be
Tk. 2,500/- (Two thousand five hundred) only and the reimbursable
expenses shall be limited to Tk.10,000/- (Taka Ten thousand) only.
ITT 56.2
In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator is the
President of the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh.
ITT 57.2
The name and address of the office where complaints to the Procuring Entity under Regulation
51 are to be submitted is: General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Engineering
Department, Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh, Head Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka.
Section 3. Project Brief

Project Brief
Name of the Project: Museum of Human Hisotory
Site: Agargaon
Site Area: 6.7 acre
The Museum of Human HIstory is a museum demonstrating physical as well as civilizational Evolution of Human.
The project aims to be a scientific demonstrative aid to those who study anthropology in Bangladesh. It also has a
purpose to help general people understand the science of Evolution. The research facilites within will help the
researchers in Bangladesh who work with the subject.
There will be a museum with demonstrative exhibits of Human Evolution. Resource facilities like Library and
research center and a congregation hall for exhibitions will also be provided.
The Museum will work in collaboration with the Authorities of the Science Museum which stands just to the south
of the site.
Section 4.
A.
General
1.
Definitions
1.1
General Conditions of Contract
The following words and expressions shall have the meaning hereby assigned to
them. Boldface type is used to identify the defined terms:
(a)
The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the Employer and

the Contractor to resolve disputes in the first instance, as provided for in
GCC Sub-Clause 82.2.
(b)
Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities

forming part of the Tender.
(c)
Compensation Events are those defined in GCC Clause 64.
(d)
Completion Certificate means the Certificate issued by the Engineer as

evidence that the Contractor has executed the Works in all respects as
per drawing, specifications and Conditions of Contract.
(e)
The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified

by the Engineer, in accordance with GCC Clause 74.
(f)
ContractAgreement means the Agreement entered into between the

Employer and the Contractor, together with the Contract Documents
referred to therein, including all attachments, appendices, and all
documents incorporated by reference therein to execute, complete, and
maintain the Works.
(g)
Contract Documents means the documents listed in GCC Clause 5,

including any amendments thereto.
(h)
Contractor means the natural person, private or government enterprise,

or a combination of the above, whose Tender to carry out the Works has
been accepted by the Employer and is named as such in the PCC and the
Contract Agreement, and includes the legal successors or permitted
assigns of the Contractor.
(i)
Contract Price means the price payable to the Contractor as specified in

the Contract Agreement, subject to such additions and adjustments
thereto or deductions therefrom, for the execution, completion and
maintenance of the Works in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract.
(j)
The Contractors Tender is the completed Tender Document including

the priced offer submitted by the Contractor to the Employer.
(k)
Day means calendar day.
(l)
Day works are varied work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for
the Contractors employees and Equipment, in addition to payments for
associated Materials and Plant.
(m)
A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the
Contract.
(n)
The Defects Correction Certificate is the certificate issued by Engineer

upon correction of defects by the Contractor.
(o)
The Defects LiabilityPeriod is the period named in the PCC and

calculated from the Completion Date.
(p)
Drawings include calculations and other information provided in Section

9 or approved by the Engineer for the execution and completion of the
Contract.
(q)
The Employer is the party named in the PCC who employs the
Contractor to carry out the Works.
(r)
The Engineer is the person named in the PCC (or any other competent
person appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor) who is
responsible for supervising the execution and completion of the Works
and administering the Contract.
(s)
Equipment is the Contractors machinery and vehicles brought

temporarily to the Site to construct the Works.
(t)
GCC mean the General Conditions of Contract.
(u)
Government means the Government of the Peoples Republic of

Bangladesh.
(v)
The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employers
Notification of Award.
(w)
The Intended Completion Date is the date specified in the PCC on

which the Contractor shall complete the Works and may be revised if
extension of time or an acceleration order is issued by the Engineer.
(x)
Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the

Contractor for incorporation in the Works.
(y)
Month means calendar month.
(z)
Owner means Ministry of Public works Bangladesh.
(aa)
PCC means the Particular Conditions of Contract.
(aa)
Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical,
electrical, chemical, or biological function..
(ab)
The Site is the area defined as such in the PCC.
(ac)
Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in the Tender
Document and are factual and interpretative reports about the surface and
subsurface conditions at the Site.
(ad)
Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the

Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the
Engineer.
(ae)
The Start Date is the date given in the PCC and it is the latest date when
the Contractor shall commence execution of the Works. It does not
necessarily coincide with any of the Site Possession Dates.
(af)
Subcontractor means any natural person, private or government entity,

or a combination of the above, including its legal successors or permitted
assigns, who has a Contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the
work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site.
(ag)
Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and

removed by the Contractor that are needed for construction or
installation of the Works.
(ah)
A Variation is an instruction given by the Engineer that varies the

Works.
(ai)
The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct,
install, and hand over to the Employer, as defined in the PCC.
(aj)
Writing means any hand-written, type-written, or printed

communication including telex, cable and facsimile transmission.
2.
Contract
Documents
2.1
Subject to the order of precedence set forth in GCC Sub-Clause 5.1, all documents
forming the Contract (and all parts thereof) are intended to be correlative,
complementary, and mutually explanatory.
3.
Corrupt,
Fraudulent,
Collusive or
Coercive
Practices
3.1
The Government requires that Employers, as well as Contractors shall observe the
highest standard of ethics during the implementation of procurement proceedings
and the execution of Contracts under public funds.
3.2
In pursuance of this requirement, the Employer shall

(a)
exclude the Contractor from participation in the procurement

proceedings concerned or reject a proposal for award; and
(b)
declare a Contractor ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period

of time, from participation in procurement proceedings under public
fund;
if it at any time determines that the Contractor has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive or coercive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Contract under
public fund.
4.
Interpretation
3.3
Should any corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practice of any kind referred
to in GCC Sub-Clause 3.4 come to the knowledge of the Employer, it shall, in the
first place, allow the Contractor to provide an explanation and shall, take actions as
stated in GCC Sub-Clause 3.2 only when a satisfactory explanation is not received.
Such exclusion and the reasons thereof, shall be recorded in the record of the
procurement proceedings and promptly communicated to the Contractor
concerned. Any communications between the Contractor and the Employer related
to matters of alleged corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices shall be in
writing.
3.4
The Government defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth
below as follows:
(a)
corrupt practice means offering, giving, or promising to give, directly

or indirectly, to any officer or employee of a Procuring Entity or other
governmental/private authority or individual a gratuity in any form, an
employment or any other thing or service of value, as an inducement
with respect to an act or decision of, or method followed by, a Procuring
Entity in connection with the procurement proceeding;
(b)
fraudulent practice means a misrepresentation or omission of facts in

order to influence a procurement proceedings or the execution of a
Contract to the detriment of the Employer,
(c)
collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement among two or more

Tenderers with or without the knowledge of the Employer (prior to or
after proposal submission) designed to establish Tender prices at
artificial, non-competitive levels and to deprive the Employer of the
benefits of free, open and genuine competition; and
(d)
coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or

indirectly, persons or their property to influence the procurement
proceedings, or affect the execution of a Contract.
3.5
The Government requires that the Clients personnel have an equal obligation not
to solicit, ask for and/or use coercive methods to obtain personal benefits in
connection with the said proceedings.
4.1
In interpreting the GCC, singular also means plural, male also means female or
neuter, and the other way around. Headings in the GCC shall not be deemed part
thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construance of the

Contract. Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract
unless specifically defined.
4.2
Entire Agreement
(a)
4.3
4.4
Non-waiver
(a)
Subject to GCC Sub-Clause 4.3(b), no relaxation, forbearance, delay, or

indulgence by either party in enforcing any of the terms and conditions
of the Contract or the granting of time by either party to the other shall
prejudice, affect, or restrict the rights of that party under the Contract,
neither shall any waiver by either party of any breach of Contract operate
as waiver of any subsequent or continuing breach of Contract.
(b)
Any waiver of a partys rights, powers, or remedies under the Contract

must be in writing, dated, and signed by an authorized representative of
the party granting such waiver, and must specify the right and the extent
to which it is being waived.
Severability
(a)
4.5
6.
Documents
Forming the
Contract and
Priority of
Documents
Eligibility
5.1
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or rendered

invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or unenforceability
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provisions and
conditions of the Contract.
Sectional completion
(a)
5.
The Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the Employer and
the Contractor and supersedes all communications, negotiations and
agreements (whether written or oral) of parties with respect thereto made
prior to the date of Contract Agreement.
If sectional completion is specified in the PCC, references in the GCC to

the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date
apply to any section of the Works (other than references to the
Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the
Works).
The following documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the

following order of priority:
(a)
the signed Contract Agreement;
(b)
the letter of Notification of Award
(c)
the completed Tender Submission Sheet as submitted by the Tenderer;
(d)
the priced Bill of Quantities as submitted by the Tenderer;
(e)
the Particular Conditions of Contract;
(f)
the General Conditions of Contract;
(g)
the General and Particular Specifications;
(h)
the Drawings, and;
(i)
any other document listed in the PCC as forming part of the Contract.
6.1
The Contractor and its Sub-Contractors shall have the nationality of a country other
than any specified in the PCC.
6.2
All materials, equipment, plant, and supplies used by the Contractor in both
permanent and temporary works and services supplied under the Contract shall
have their origin in the countries except any specified in the PCC.
7.
Governing
Language
7.1
The Contract as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the Contract
exchanged by the Contractor and the Employer, shall be written in English unless
otherwise stated in the PCC. Supporting documents and printed literature that are
part of the Contract may be in another language, provided they are accompanied by
an accurate translation of the relevant passages in English, in which case, for
purposes of interpretation of the Contract, this translation shall govern.
7.2
The Contractor shall bear all costs of translation to the governing language and all
risks of the accuracy of such translation.
8.
Governing
Law
8.1
The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of
the Peoples Republic of Bangladesh.
9.
Gratuties /
Agency fees
9.1
No fees, gratuities, rebates, gifts, commissions or other payments, other than those
shown in the Tender or the Contract, shall be given or received in connection with
the procurement process or in the Contract execution.
10. Joint Venture,

Consortium or
Association
(JVCA)
10.1
If the Contractor is a joint venture, consortium, or association, all of the parties

shall be jointly and severally liable to the Employer for the fulfilment of the
provisions of the Contract and shall designate one party to act as a leader with
authority to bind the joint venture, consortium, or association. The composition or
the constitution of the joint venture, consortium, or association shall not be altered
without the prior consent of the Employer.
11. Confidential
Information
11.1
The Employer and the Contractor shall keep confidential and shall not, without the
written consent of the other party hereto, divulge to any third party any
documents, data, or other information furnished directly or indirectly by the other
party hereto in connection with the Contract, whether such information has been
furnished prior to, during or following completion or termination of the Contract.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may furnish to its Sub-Contractor such
documents, data, and other information it receives from the Employer to the extent
required for the Sub-Contractor to perform its work under the Contract, in which
event the Contractor shall obtain from such Sub-Contractor an undertaking of
confidentiality similar to that imposed on the Contractor under GCC Clause 11.
11.2
The Employer shall not use such documents, data, and other information received
from the Contractor for any purposes unrelated to the Contract. Similarly, the
Contractor shall not use such documents, data, and other information received from the
Employer for any purpose other than the design, construction, or other work and
services required for the performance of the Contract.
11.3
The obligation of a party under GCC Sub-Clauses 11.1 and 11.2 above, however, shall
not apply to information that:
11.4
a)
the Employer or Contractor needs to share with institutions participating

in the financing of the Contract;
b)
now or hereafter enters the public domain through no fault of that party;
c)
can be proven to have been possessed by that party at the time of

disclosure and which was not previously obtained, directly or indirectly,
from the other party; or
d)
otherwise lawfully becomes available to that party from a third party that
has no obligation of confidentiality.
The above provisions of GCC Clause 11 shall not in any way modify any undertaking
of confidentiality given by either of the parties hereto prior to the date of the Contract
in respect of the Works or any part thereof.
11.5
The provisions of GCC Clause 11 shall survive completion or termination, for

whatever reason.
12. Communication 12.1

s and Notices
Communications between Parties (notice, request or consent required or permitted

to be given or made by one party to the other) pursuant to the Contract shall be in
writing to the address specified in the PCC.
12.2
A notice shall be effective when delivered or on the notices effective date,

whichever is later.
12.3
A Party may change its address for notice hereunder by giving the other Party
notice of such change to the address.
13. Copyright
13.1
The copyright in all drawings, documents, and other materials containing data and
information furnished to the Employer by the Contractor herein shall remain vested in
the Contractor, or, if they are furnished to the Employer directly or through the
Contractor by any third party, including Suppliers of materials, the copyright in such
materials shall remain vested in such third party.
14. Assignment
14.1
The Contractor shall not assign, in whole or in part, its obligations under the Contract,
except with the Employers prior written consent.
15. SubContracting
15.1
The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Employer in writing of all Sub-Contracts
to be awarded under the Contract if not already specified in the Tender. SubContracting shall in no event relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations, duties,
responsibilities, or liability under the Contract.
15.2
Sub-Contractors shall comply with the provisions of GCC Clause 3.
16.1
The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other Contractors, public
authorities, utilities, the Engineer and the Employer between the dates given in the
Schedule of Other Contractors, as referred to in the PCC. The Contractor shall also
provide facilities and services for them as described in the Schedule. The Employer
may modify the Schedule of Other Contractors, and shall notify the Contractor of any
such modification.
17. Contractors
17.1
Responsibilities
The Contractor shall execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein
in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract Agreement.
18. Employers
Responsibilities
18.1
The Employer shall pay the Contractor, in consideration of the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or
such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the
times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract Agreement.
18.2
The Employer shall make its best effort to assist the Contractor in obtaining, if
required, any permit, licence, and approvals from local public authorities.
19. Scope of Works 19.1
The Works to be executed, completed and maintained shall be as specified in the Bill
of Quantities, the General and Particular Specifications and Drawings.
19.2
Unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract, the Works shall include all such items not
specifically mentioned in the Contract, but that can be reasonably inferred from the
Contract as being required for completion of the Works as if such items were expressly
mentioned in the Contract.
20.1
The Contract Price shall be as specified in the Contract Agreement, subject to any
additions and adjustments thereto, or deductions therefrom, as may be made pursuant
16. Other
Contractors
20. Contract Price
to the Contract.
20.2
Unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract, the Works shall include all such items not
specifically mentioned in the Contract but that can be reasonably inferred from the
Contract as being required for completion of the Works as if such items were expressly
mentioned in the Contract.
21. Engineers
Decisions
21.1
Except where otherwise specifically stated in the PCC, the Engineer will decide
Contractual matters between the Employer and the Contractor in its role as
representative of the Employer.
22. Queries about

the Contract
conditions
22.1
The Engineer will clarify queries on the Conditions of Contract.
23. Delegation
23.1
The Engineer may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to his
representative except to the Adjudicator, after notifying the Contractor, and may
cancel any delegation, without retroactivity, after notifying the Contractor.
23.2
Any communications to the Contractor in accordance with such delegation shall

have the same effect as if it was given by the Engineer.
24.1
The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key
Personnel, as referred to in the PCC, to carry out the functions stated in the
Schedule or other personnel approved by the Engineer.
24.2
The Engineer will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if their
relevant qualifications and abilities are substantially equal to or better than those of
the personnel listed in the Schedule.
24.3
If the Engineer asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the
Contractors staff or work force from the Site, he shall state the reasons, and the
Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within three (3) days and has
no further connection with the work in the Contract.
25.1
The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings showing the proposed
Temporary Works to the Engineer, who is to approve them, if they comply with
the Specifications and Drawings.
25.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works.
25.3
All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or
permanent Works, are subject to prior approval by the Engineer before their use.
25.4
The Engineers approval shall not alter the Contractors responsibility for design
of the Temporary Works.
25.5
The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the
Temporary Works, where required
26. Instructions
26.1
The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Engineer that comply with
the applicable laws where the Site is located.
27. Site
Investigation
Reports
27.1
The Contractor, in preparing the Tender, shall rely on any Site Investigation
Reports referred to in the PCC, supplemented by any information available to the
Tenderer.
24. Contractors
Personnel
25. Approval of
the
Contractors
Temporary
Works
28. Possession of
the Site
28.1
The Employer shall give possession of the Site, or parts of the Site, to the
Contractor on the date(s) stated in the PCC. If possession of a part is not given
by the date stated in the PCC, the Employer will be deemed to have delayed the
start of the relevant activities, and this will be a Compensation Event.
29. Access to the

Site
29.1
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and any person authorised by the
Engineer access to the Site and to any place where work in connection with the
Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out.
30. Safety,
Security and
Protection of
the
Environment
30.1
The Contractor shall throughout the execution and completion of the Works and
the remedying of any defects therein:
(a)
have full regard for the safety of all persons entitled to be upon the
Site and keep the Site and the Works in an orderly state;
(b)
provide and maintain at the Contractors own cost all lights, guards,
fencing, warning signs and watching for the protection of the Works
or for the safety on-site, and
(c)
take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the
Site and to avoid damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the
public or others resulting from pollution, noise or other causes arising
as a consequence of the Contractors methods of operation.
31. Discoveries
31.1
Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly

discovered on the Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of such discoveries and carry out the Engineers
instructions for dealing with them.
32. Welfare of
Labour
32.1
The Contractor shall provide proper accommodation to his labourers and arrange
proper water supply, conservancy and sanitation arrangements at the site in
accordance with relevant regulations, rules and orders of the government.
32.2
The Contractor shall pay reasonable wages to his labourers, and pay them in
time. In the event of delay in payment the Employer may effect payments to the
labourers and recover the cost from the Contractor.
33. Child Labour
33.1
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable minimum age labour laws and
requirements of (including applicable treaties which have been ratified by) the
Government of Bangladesh regarding hazardous forms of child labour.
34. No Night and

Friday Work
34.1
The Contractor shall not perform any work on the Site on the weekly rest day
(Friday), or during the night, or on any religious or public holiday, without the
prior written approval of the Engineer.
35. Employers
and
Contractors
Risks
35.1
The Employer carries the risks that the Contract states are Employers risks and
the Contractor carries the risks that the Contract states are Contractors risks.
36. Employers
Risks
36.1
36.2
From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the
following are Employers risks:
(a)
the risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to property

(excluding the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment), which are
due to
(i)
use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the
Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works or
(ii)
negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference with any legal

right by the Employer or by any person employed by or Contracted to
him except the Contractor.
(b)
the risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to

the extent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in the
Employers design, or due to war or radioactive contamination
directly affecting the country where the Works are to be executed.
From the Completion Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been
issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is an
Employers risk, except loss or damage due to:
(a)
a Defect which existed on the Completion Date;
(b)
an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself
an Employers risk; or
(c)
the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date.
37. Contractors
Risks
37.1
From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the
risks of personal injury, death, and loss of or damage to property (including,
without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not
Employers risks are Contractors risks.
38. Insurance
38.1
The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the
Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects
Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles stated in the PCC for the
following events which are due to the Contractors risks:
(a)
loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials;
(b)
loss of or damage to Equipment;
(c)
loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials,

and Equipment) in connection with the Contract; and
(d)
personal injury or death.
38.2
The Contractor shall deliver policies and certificates of insurance to the

Engineer, for the Engineers approval, before the Start Date. All such
insurances shall provide for compensation to be payable in the types and
proportions of currencies required to rectify the loss or damage incurred.
38.3
If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required,
the Employer may effect the insurance which the Contractor should have
provided and recover the premiums the Employer has paid from payments
otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the
premiums shall be a debt due.
38.4
Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of
the Engineer.
38.5
Both parties shall comply with conditions of the insurance policies.
39. Taxes and

Duties
39.1
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, duties, license fees, and
other such levies imposed outside and inside Bangladesh.
40. Limitation of
Liability
40.1
Except in cases of criminal negligence or wilful misconduct:
41. Force
Majeure
(a)
the Contractor shall not be liable to the Employer, whether in

Contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or consequential loss or
damage, loss of use, loss of production, or loss of profits or interest
costs, provided that this exclusion shall not apply to any obligation of
the Contractor to pay liquidated damages to the Employer and
(b)
the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Employer, whether under

the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not exceed the total Contract
Price, provided that this limitation shall not apply to the cost of repairing
or replacing defective Works, or to any obligation of the Contractor to
indemnify the Employer with respect to patent infringement
41.1
The Contractor shall not be liable for forfeiture of its Performance Security,
liquidated damages, or termination for default if and to the extent that its delay in
performance or other failure to perform its obligations under the Contract is the
result of an event of Force Majeure.
41.2
For purposes of this Clause, Force Majeure means an event or situation beyond
the control of the Contractor that is not foreseeable, is unavoidable, and its origin is
not due to negligence or lack of care on the part of the Contractor. Such events may
include, but not be limited to, acts of the Employer in its sovereign capacity, wars or
revolutions, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, and freight embargoes.
41.3
If a Force Majeure situation arises, the Contractor shall promptly notify the
Employer in writing of such condition and the cause thereof. Unless otherwise
directed by the Employer in writing, the Contractor shall continue to perform its
obligations under the Contract as far as is reasonably practical, and shall seek all
reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by the Force Majeure
event.
B.
Time Control
42.
The Works to
Be Completed
by the
Intended
Completion
Date
42.1
The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and
shall carry out the Works in accordance with the Programme submitted by the
Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Engineer, and complete them by
the Intended Completion Date.
43.
Programme of
Works
43.1
Within the time stated in the PCC, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval a Programme showing the general methods, arrangements, order,
and timing for all the activities in the Works. The programme may be in the
form of an Implementation Schedule prepared in Microsoft Project or in any
other software programme acceptable by the Employer.
43.2
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval an updated Programme
at intervals no longer than the period stated in the PCC. An update of the
Programme shall be a Programme showing the actual progress achieved on each
activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining
work, including any changes to the sequence of the activities.
43.3
If the Contractor does not submit an updated Programme at the intervals stated
in the PCC, the Engineer may withhold an amount as stated in the PCC from the
next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next due
payment after the date on which the overdue Programme has been submitted.
43.4
The Engineers approval of the Programme shall not alter the Contractors
obligations. The Contractor may revise the Programme and submit it to the
Engineer again at any time. A revised Programme shall show the effect of
Variations and Compensation Events.
44.
Pro Rata
Progress
44.1
The Contractor shall maintain Pro Rata progress of the works. Progress to be
achieved shall be pursuant to GCC Sub- Clause 43.1 and shall be determined in
terms of the value of the works done
45.
Early
Warning
45.1
If at any time during performance of the Contract, the Contractor or its

Subcontractors should encounter events, circumstances conditions that may
adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract Price or delay the
execution of the Works, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in
writing of the delay, its likely duration, and its cause. As soon as practicable
after receipt of the Contractors notice, the Engineer shall evaluate the situation,
and the Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in making and considering
proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or
reduced. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the
expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and
Completion Date. The Contractor shall provide the estimate as soon as
reasonably possible.
46.
Extension of
the Intended
Completion
Date
46.1
The Engineer shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation

Event occurs or a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion
to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking
steps to accelerate the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor to
incur additional cost. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with
a copy of the Employer.
46.2
The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended
Completion Date within twenty-one (21) days of the Contractor asking the
Engineer for a decision upon the effect of a Compensation Event or Variation
and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give
early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the
delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended
Completion Date.
46.3
Except in case of Force Majeure, as provided under GCC Clause 41, a delay by
the Contractor in the performance of its Completion obligations shall render the
Contractor liable to the imposition of liquidated damages pursuant to GCC
Clause 68, unless an extension of time is agreed upon, pursuant to GCC SubClause 46.2.
46.4
If the Contractor fails to complete the Works by the Intended Completion Date,
as extended by the Engineer as the case may be, the Contractor shall be liable to
pay liquidated damages to the Employer, in accordance with GCC, Sub-Clause
68.1.
47.1
When the Employer wants the Contractor to finish before the Intended
Completion Date, the Engineer will obtain priced proposals for achieving the
necessary acceleration from the Contractor. If the Employer accepts these
proposals, the Intended Completion Date will be adjusted accordingly and
confirmed by both the Employer and the Contractor.
47.2
If the Employer accepts the Contractors priced proposals for acceleration, they
are incorporated in the Contract Price and treated as a Variation.
48.
Delays
48.1
Ordered by the
Engineer
The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any
activity within the Works.
49.
Management
Meetings
49.1
Either the Engineer or the Contractor may require the other to attend a
management meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to
review the plans for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in
accordance with the early warning procedure.
49.2
The Engineer shall record the business of management meetings and provide
copies of the record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The
responsibility of the parties for actions to be taken shall be decided by the
Engineer either at the management meeting or after the management meeting
and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.
47.
Acceleration
C.
Quality Control
50.
Contractor to
Construct the
Works
50.1
The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the
Specifications and Drawings as scheduled in GCC Sub-Clause 5.1.
51.
Works open to 51.1

Inspection
All works under the Contract shall at all times be open to inspection and
supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall ensure presence of its
representatives at such inspections provided proper advance notice is given by
the Engineer.
52.
Identifying
Defects
52.1
The Engineer shall check the Contractors work and notify the Contractor of
any Defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractors
responsibilities. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to search for a
Defect and to uncover and test any work that the Engineer considers may have a
Defect.
53.
Tests
53.1
If the Engineer instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the
Specification to check whether any work has a Defect and the test shows that it
does, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples. If there is no
Defect, the test shall be a Compensation Event.
54.
Examination of 54.1
Work before
covering up
No part of the Works shall be covered up or put out of view without the
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the
Engineer whenever any such part of the Works is ready for examination and the
Engineer shall attend to such examination without unreasonable delay.
55.
Correction of
Defects
55.1
The Engineer shall give notice to the Contractor, with a copy to the Employer,
of any Defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at
Completion, and is defined in the PCC. The Defects Liability Period shall be
extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected.
55.2
Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified
Defect within the length of time specified by the Engineers notice.
56.1
If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the
56.
Uncorrected
Engineers notice, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the Defect
corrected, and the Contractor will pay this amount.
Defects
D.
Cost Control
57.
Bill of
Quantities
58.
Changes in
the Quantities
57.1
The Bill of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation,
testing, and commissioning work to be done by the Contractor.
57.2
The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor is
paid for the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for
each item.
58.1
If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of
Quantities for the particular item by more than twenty-five percent (25%),
provided the change exceeds one percent (1%) of the Initial Contract Price, the
Engineer shall adjust the rate to allow for the change.
58.2
The Engineer shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the
Initial Contract Price is exceeded by more than fifteen percent (15%), except
with the prior approval of the Employer.
58.3
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a
detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.
59.
Variations
59.1
All Variations shall be included in updated Programmes produced by the

Contractor.
60.
Payments for
Variations
60.1
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a quotation for carrying out the
Variation when requested to do so by the Engineer. The Engineer shall assess
the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the request or within
any longer period stated by the Engineer and before the Variation is ordered.
60.2
If the work in the Variation corresponds with an item description in the Bill of
Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quantity of work above the
limit stated in GCC Sub-Clause 58.1 or the timing of its execution do not cause
the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bill of Quantities shall be
used to calculate the value of the Variation. If the cost per unit of quantity
changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the Variation does not
correspond with items in the Bill of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor
shall be in the form of new rates for the relevant items of work.
60.3
If the Contractors quotation is found to be unreasonable, the Engineer may

order the Variation and make a change to the Contract Price, which shall be
based on the Engineers own forecast of the effects of the Variation on the
Contractors costs.
60.4
If the Engineer decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a
quotation being given and considered without delaying the work, no quotation
shall be given and the Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event.
60.5
The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could
have been avoided by giving early warning.
61.
Cash Flow
Forecasts
61.1
When the Programme is updated, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
an updated cash flow forecast.
62.
Payment
Certificates
62.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer monthly statements of the

estimated value of the work executed less the cumulative amount certified
previously.
62.2
The Engineer shall check the Contractors monthly statement and certify the
amount to be paid to the Contractor.
62.3
The value of work executed shall be determined by the Engineer.
62.4
The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the
items in the Bill of Quantities completed.
62.5
63.
Payments
The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations, Certified
Dayworks and Compensation Events.
62.6
The Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce
the proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of
later information.
63.1
Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments and retention.
The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Engineer
within twenty-eight (28) days of the date of each certificate. If the Employer
makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid interest on the late payment
in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the
payment should have been made up to the date when the late payment is made
at the prevailing rate of interest for commercial borrowing established in
Bangladesh.
63.2
If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award

by the Adjudicator, or an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon
the delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from
the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the
absence of dispute.
63.3
Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be
paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices
in the Contract.
64.
Compensation
Events
64.1
The following shall be Compensation Events:
(a)
The Employer does not give access to the Site or part of the Site by the
Site Possession Date stated in the PCC.
(b)
The Employer modifies the Schedule of Other Contractors in a way

that affects the work of the Contractor under the Contract.
(c)
The Engineer orders a delay or does not issue Drawings,

Specifications, or instructions required for execution of the Works on
time.
(d)
The Engineer instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out

additional tests upon work, which is then found to have no Defects.
(e)
The Engineer unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to be let.
(f)
Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could

reasonably have been assumed before issuance of the Letter of
Acceptance from the information issued to Tenderers (including the
Site Investigation Reports), from information available publicly and
from a visual inspection of the Site.
(g)
The Engineer gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen

condition, caused by the Employer, or additional work required for
safety or other reasons.
(h)
Other Contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer do not

work within the dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and
they cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor.
(i)
The advance payment is delayed.
(j)
The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employers Risks.
(k)
The Engineer unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion.
(l)
A situation of Force Majeure has occurred, as defined in GCC Clause

41;
(m)
Other Compensation Events described in the Contract or determined

by the Engineer shall apply.
64.2
If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work
being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall
be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The
Engineer shall decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be
increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date shall be
extended.
64.3
As soon as the Contractor has provided information demonstrating the effect of

each Compensation Event upon the Contractors forecast cost, the Engineer
shall assess it, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the
Contractors forecast is deemed unreasonable, the Engineer shall adjust the
Contract Price based on the Engineers own forecast. The Engineer will assume
that the Contractor will react competently and promptly to the event.
64.4
The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the
Employers interests are adversely affected by the Contractor not having given
early warning or not having cooperated with the Engineer.
65.
66.
Change in
Laws and
Regulations
Price
Adjustment
65.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, if between the date twenty-eight

(28) days before the submission of Tenders for the Contract and the date of the
last Completion certificate, any law, regulation, ordinance, order or bylaw
having the force of law is enacted, promulgated, abrogated, or changed in
Bangladesh (which shall be deemed to include any change in interpretation or
application by the competent authorities) that subsequently affects the
Completion Date and/or the Contract Price, then such Completion Date and/or
Contract Price shall be correspondingly increased or decreased, to the extent
that the Contractor has thereby been affected in the performance of any of its
obligations under the Contract.
65.2
The Engineer shall adjust the Contract Price on the basis of the change in the
amount of taxes, duties, and other levies payable by the Contractor, provided
such changes have not already been accounted for in the price adjustment as
defined in GCC Clause 66 and/or reflected in the Contract Price.
66.1
Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if provided for
in the PCC. If so provided, the amounts as certified in each payment certificate,
before deducting for Advance Payment, shall be adjusted by applying the
respective price adjustment factor to the payment amount. The formula
indicated below applies:
P= A + B (Im/Io)
where:
P is the adjustment factor
A and B are coefficients specified in the PCC, representing the nonadjustable
and adjustable portions, respectively, of the Contract; and
Im is the index prevailing at the end of the month being invoiced and Io is the
index prevailing twenty-eight (28) days before Tender opening.
The index to be used is as published by the Bangladesh Bureau of Standards on
a month basis.
67.
68.
Retention
Liquidated
Damages
66.2
If the value of the index is changed after it has been used in a calculation, the
calculation shall be corrected and an adjustment made in the next payment
certificate. The index value shall be deemed to take account of all changes in
cost due to fluctuations in costs.
67.1
The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the
proportion stated in the PCC until completion of the whole of the Works.
67.2
On completion of the whole of the Works, half the total amount retained shall
be repaid to the Contractor, the remaining half when the Defects Liability
Period has passed and the Engineer has certified that all Defects notified by the
Engineer to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected.
67.3
On completion of the whole of the Works, the Contractor may substitute

retention money with an unconditional Bank Guarantee.
68.1
The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate per day
stated in the PCC for each day that the Completion Date is later than the
Intended Completion Date for the works or for any part thereof. In respect of
the value of the delayed works the total amount of liquidated damages shall not
exceed the amount defined in the PCC. The Employer may deduct liquidated
damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages
shall not affect the Contractors liabilities.
68.2
If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been
paid, the Engineer shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the
Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be
paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the date of payment to the
date of repayment, at the rates specified in GCC Sub-Clause 63.1.
69.
Bonus
69.1
The Contractor shall be paid a Bonus calculated at the rate per calendar day if
stated in the PCC for each day (less any days for which the Contractor is paid
for acceleration) that the Completion is earlier than the Intended Completion
Date. The Engineer shall certify that the Works are complete, although they
may not be due to be complete.
70.
Advance
Payment
70.1
If so specified in the PCC, the Employer shall make advance payment to the
Contractor in the amounts and by the dates stated in the PCC against provision
by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank Guarantee in a form and by a bank
acceptable to the Employer in an amount equal to the advance payment. The
Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has been repaid, but
the amount of the Guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amounts
repaid by the Contractor. Interest will not be charged on the advance payment.
70.2
The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for Equipment, Plant,
Materials, and mobilization expenses required specifically for execution of the
Contract. The Contractor shall demonstrate that advance payment has been
used in this way by supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the
Engineer.
70.3
The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from

payments otherwise due to the Contractor, following the schedule of completed
percentages of the Works on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the
advance payment or its repayment in assessing valuations of work done,
Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or Liquidated
Damages.
71.1
The Employer shall notify the Contractor of any claim made against the Bank
issuing the Performance Security.
71.2
The Employer may claim against the security if any of the following events
occurs for fourteen (14) days or more.
71.
72.
Performance
Security
Day works
(a)
The Contractor is in breach of the Contract and the Employer has

notified him that he is; and
(b)
The Contractor has not paid an amount due to the Employer.
71.3
In the event the Contractor is liable to pay compensation under the Contract
amounting to the full value of the Performance Security or more, the Employer
may forfeit the full amount of the Performance Security.
71.4
If there is no reason to call the Performance Security, the Performance Security

shall be discharged by the Employer and returned to the Contractor not later
than twenty-eight (28) days following the date of issuance of certificate of
Completion of Works by the Engineer
72.1
If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractors Tender shall be used for
small additional amounts of work only when the Engineer has given written
instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way.
72.2
All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor on

forms approved by the Engineer. Each completed form shall be verified and
signed by the Engineer within two (2) days of the work being done.
72.3
The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed

Dayworks forms
73.
Cost of Repairs 73.1
Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works

between the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be
remedied by the Contractor at the Contractors cost if the loss or damage arises
from the Contractors acts or omissions.
E.
Completion of the Contract
74.
Completion
74.1
The Contractor shall request the Engineer to issue a certificate of Completion of

the Works, and the Engineer will do so upon deciding that the work is
completed.
75.
Taking Over
75.1
The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven (7) days of
the Engineer issuing a Certificate of Completion.
76.
Final Account
76.1
The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a detailed account of the total
amount that the Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end
of the Defects Liability Period. The Engineer shall issue a Defects Correction
Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within
fifty-six (56) days of receiving the Contractors account if it is correct and
complete. If it is not, the Engineer shall issue within fifty-six (56) days a
schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary.
If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the
Engineer shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a
payment certificate.
77.
As-built
Drawings and
Manuals
77.1
If As Built Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required,

the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated in the PCC.
77.2
If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates
stated in the PCC, or they do not receive the Engineers approval, the Engineer
shall withhold the amount stated in the PCC from payments due to the
Contractor.
F.
Termination and Settlement of Disputes
78.
Termination
78.1
Termination for Default
(a)
The Employer or the Contractor, without prejudice to any other

remedy for breach of Contract, by giving twenty eight (28) days
written notice of default to the other party, may terminate the Contract
in whole or in part if the other party causes a fundamental breach of
Contract
(b)
Fundamental breaches of the Contract shall include, but shall not be

limited to, the following:
(i)
the Contractor stops work for twenty-eight (28) days when no stoppage
of work is shown on the current Programme and the stoppage has not
been authorized by the Engineer;
(ii)
the Engineer instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the

Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within twenty-eight (28)
days;
(iii)
the Engineer gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a

fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it
within a reasonable period of time determined by the Engineer;
(iv)
the Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required;
(v)
the Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the number
of days for which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be
paid, as defined in the PCC;
(vi)
the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has engaged in

corrupt or fraudulent practices, as defined in GCC Clause 3, in
competing for or in executing the Contract.
78.2
A payment certified by the Engineer is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor
within eighty-four (84) days of the date of the Engineers certificate;
78.3
Termination for Insolvency.

(a)
78.4
Termination for Convenience.

(a)
78.5
The Employer and the Contractor may at any time terminate the
Contract by giving notice to the other party if either of the party
becomes bankrupt or otherwise insolvent. In such event, termination
will be without compensation to any party, provided that such
termination will not prejudice or affect any right of action or remedy
that has accrued or will accrue thereafter to the other party.
The Employer, by notice sent to the Contractor, may terminate the

Contract, in whole or in part, at any time for its convenience. The
notice of termination shall specify that termination is for the
Employers convenience, the extent to which performance of the
Contractor under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which
such termination becomes effective.
In the event the Employer terminates the Contract in whole or in part, the Employer
shall accept the portion of the Works that are complete and ready for handing over
after the Contractors receipt of notice of termination at the Contract. For the
remaining portion of the Works, the Employer may elect:
(a)
to have any portion completed by the Contractor at the Contract terms

and prices; and /or
(b)
to cancel the remainder and pay to the Contractor an agreed amount for
partially completed Works and for materials and parts previously
procured by the Contractor, or
(c)
except in the case of termination for convenience as defined in GCC

Sub-Clause 78.4, engage another Contractor to complete the Works,
and in that case the Contractor shall be liable to the Employer for any
cost that may be incurred in excess of the sum that would have been
paid to the Contractor, if the work would have been executed and
completed by him.
If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the
Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as is reasonably possible.
79.
Payment upon
Termination
79.1
If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the

Contractor, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done
and Plant and Materials ordered less advance payments received up to the date
of the issue of the certificate and less the percentage to apply to the value of the
work not completed, as indicated in the PCC. Additional Liquidated Damages
shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment
due to the Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer.
79.2
If the Contract is terminated for the Employers convenience or because of a

fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the Engineer shall issue a
certificate for the value of the work done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost
of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractors foreign personnel
employed solely on the Works and recruited specifically for the Works, and the
Contractors costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less advance
payments received up to the date of the certificate.
80.
Property
80.1
All Materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works, and Works shall
be deemed to be the property of the Employer if the Contract is terminated
because of the Contractors default.
81.
Frustration
81.1
If the Contract is frustrated by the occurrence of a situation of Force Majeure as

defined in GCC Clause 41, the Engineer shall certify that the Contract has been
frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as
possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out
before receiving it and for any work carried out afterwards to which a
commitment was made
82.
Settlement of
Disputes
82.1
Amicable Settlement
(a)
82.2
The Employer and the Contractor shall use their best efforts to settle
amicably all disputes arising out of or in connection with this Contract
or its interpretation.
Adjudication
(a)
If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was

either outside the authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or
that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be refereed to
the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of notification of the
Engineers decision in writing.
(b)
The Adjudicator named in the PCC is jointly appointed by the parties.

In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority
designated in the PCC shall appoint the Adjudicator within fourteen
(14) days of receipt of a request from either party.
(c)
The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both parties within
twenty-eight (28) days of a dispute being referred to it.
(d)
The Contractor shall make all payments (fees and reimbursable

expenses) to the Adjudicator, and the Employer shall reimburse half of
these fees through the regular progress payments.
(e)
Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the
Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract; a new Adjudicator will be jointly
appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement
between the Employer and the Contractor the Adjudicator shall be
designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC at the
request of either party, within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request
from either party.
82.3
82.4
Adjudication
(a)
If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was

either outside the authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or
that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be refereed to
the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of notification of the
Engineers decision in writing.
(b)
The Adjudicator named in the PCC is jointly appointed by the parties.

In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority
designated in the PCC shall appoint the Adjudicator within fourteen
(14) days of receipt of a request from either party.
(c)
The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both parties within
twenty-eight (28) days of a dispute being referred to it.
(d)
The Contractor shall make all payments (fees and reimbursable

expenses) to the Adjudicator, and the Employer shall reimburse half of
these fees through the regular progress payments.
(e)
Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the
Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract; a new Adjudicator will be jointly
appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement
between the Employer and the Contractor the Adjudicator shall be
designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC at the
request of either party, within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request
from either party.
Arbitration
(a)
If the Parties are unable to reach a settlement as per GCC Clause

82.1(a) within twenty-eight (28) days of the first written
correspondence on the matter of disagreement, then either Party may
give notice to the other party of its intention to commence arbitration
in accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 82.3(b).
(b)
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Arbitration

Act (Act No 1 of 2001) of Bangladesh as at present in force and in the
place shown in the PCC.
Section 5.
Particular Conditions of Contract
Instructions for completing the Particular Conditions of Contract are provided, as needed, in the notes in italic
mentioned for the relevant GCC Clauses.
GCC Clause
GCC 1.1 (h)
Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in the General Conditions of Contract
The Contractor is [Name, address and name of authorized representative]

(to be filled up by the Tenderer)
Name
Address .
.
Authorized representative
GCC 1.1 (q)
The Employer is Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Head Office represented
by General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation A uthority
GCC 1.1 (r)
The Engineer is Executive Engineer (civil), Construction & Maintenance Management Unit
(CMMU), Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB)
GCC 1.1 (w)
The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be 720 (seven hundred twenty)
days reckoned from the date of the commencement of the work.
GCC 1.1 (ab)
The Site is located at Coxs Bazar as noted in the Tender Notice
GCC 1.1 (ae)
The Start Date shall be on or before the 7 th day of giving the site possession to the
contractor.
GCC 1.1 (ai)
The Works consist of Construction of Coxs Bazar International Airport , Internal

Electrical and Plumbing work, Land Development, Furniture work and Other related works if
any: As per order of Employer.
GCC 4.5 (a)
The Sectional Completion Dates are : Not Applicable
GCC 5.1 (i)
The following documents also form part of the Contract:

a) GCC 24.1 :
The Schedule of Key Personnel
b) GCC 27.1 :
Site Investigation Reports
c)
ITT 15.1
List of Equipment
d) ITT 27.1
The Approach and Methodology of the Works
e)
GCC 43.1 :
Work Programme
GCC 6.1
Contractors that are a national of, or registered in, the following countries are not eligible: Israel
GCC 6.2
Materials/equipment/plant shall not be supplied from the following country of origin: Israel
GCC 12.1
The Employers address for the purpose of communications under this Contract is : Office of the
Chief Engineer, Construction & Maintenance Management Unit (CMMU), Civil Aviation
Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Kurmitola, Dhaka
GCC 16.1
Schedule for Other Contractors : Not Applicable
GCC 21.1
The Engineer shall obtain specific approval of the Employer before taking any of the following
actions:
(a)
Consenting to the subcontracting of any part of the Works under the GCC Clause 15;
(b) Certifying additional cost determined under GCC Clause 66;

(c)
Determining an extension of time under GCC Clause 46;
(d) Issuing a variation under GCC Clause 60, except in an emergency situation, as
reasonably determined by the Engineer;
(e)
GCC 24.1
Fixing rates or prices under GCC Clause 63.
The Schedule of Key Personnel

a)
Graduate of Civil Engineer
b)
Diploma in Civil Engineering
c)
Diploma in Electrical Engineering

(Qualifications of the Personnel are specified in ITT 14.1 Section 2)
GCC 27.1
Site Investigation Reports

1)
GCC 28.1
Report on Geotechnical Investigations on Sub-Soils fo construction of Coxs Bazar

International Airport
The Site Possession Date shall be within 30 (thirty) days after signing of Contract. There may be
delay for some valid reason in giving Possession of the site to the Contractor.
GCC 38.1
The minimum insurance cover for relevant item shall be

a)
b)
c)
d)
The cover for insurance of the Works, Plant and Materials is the Initial Contract
Amount plus 10 (ten percent).
The cover for Contractors Equipment is the full replacement cost
The cover for insurance of Third Party injury to persons or death, and damage to
property is Tk. 10.00 (ten) lakh.
The cover for personal injury or death for the Contractors Employers and Engineers
personnel is Tk. Tk. 2.00 (two) lakh.
GCC 43.1
The Contractor shall submit a Programme for the works within 7 (seven) days of signing the
Contract. The Programme shall be drawn in such a way that the progress of work of all the sites
under the Package, at any stage, shall be almost equal.
GCC 43.2
The period between Programme update is 60 (sixty) days.
GCC 43.3
The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Programme is Tk. 1.00 (one) lakh.
GCC 55.1
The Defects Liability Period is 365 (three hundred fifty five) days from the date of completion of
works certified by the Engineer.
GCC 63.1
These sub-clauses have been modified as follows :
&
GCC 63.2
V.
Under these sub-clauses no interest will be paid to the contractor for late payment.
Payment will be made if fund is available.
GCC 64.1 (a)
This sub-clause is not subject to compensation event.
GCC 64.1 (m)
The following events shall also be compensation Events : None
GCC 66.1
The Contract is not subject to price adjustment in accordance with GCC Clause 66.
GCC 67.1
The proportion of payments retained is 5 (five) percent.
GCC 68.1
The liquidated damages for the whole of the woks are 0.05 (zero point zero five) percent of the
final Contract Price per day.
The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the whole of the woks is 10 (ten) percent of the
final Contract Price.
GCC 69.1
The Bonus for the whole of the works is [percent of final Contract Price amount] per day.
No Bonus will be paid
GCC 70.1
10 (ten) percent of Contract Price will be Paid to the Contractor as advance payment against the
submission of equal amount of un-conditional Bank Guarantee within 30 (thirty) days from the
date of signing of the Contract.
GCC 70.3
The advance payment will be re-covered by the Client from the Interim Bills at 20 (twenty)
percent of Billed Amount until the advance payment has been fully setoff.
GCC 71
The Performance Security is 10 (ten) percent to 15 (fifteen) percent of the Contract Amount to be
deposited in the form of Bank Guarantee.
GCC 77.1
The date by which as-built drawings are required is 30 (thirty) days after the date of
completion of works.
The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required to
Not Applicable
GCC 77.2
The amount to be withheld for failing to produce as-built drawings and/or operating and
maintenance manuals by the date required is Tk. 1.00 (one) lakh.
GCC 79.1
The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, representing the Employers
additional cost for completing the Works, is 10 (ten) percent.
GCC 82.2 (b)
The Adjudicator jointly appointed by the parties later on if necessary. But fees must be born by
the Contractor.
GCC 82.2 (e)
In case of disagreements between the parties, the Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator is the
President of the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh.
GCC 82.3 (b)
The venue of Arbitration shall be at Dhaka, Bangladesh.
Section 6.
Bill of Quantities
Sl. No.
01.
Description of Items
Site preparation:
Preparation work of site, mobilization of plant,
machinery equipment, materials & labour,
cutting of trees, cleaning of bushes and
undesirable materials, if any, providing bench
marks, giving layout for building for
construction work including making approach
road, constructing temporary C.G.I. sheet
boundary fence to ensure the security of the site
as per specification and direction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
02.
Earth work :
Earth work in excavation of foundation pit, still
column, brick wall, water tank etc. of all kinds
of soils, rocks etc. unto required depth
including cutting and uprooting of roots of
trees it any, shoring, dewatering, leveling,
dressing, ramming hard and preparing the bed
etc. strictly as per design drawing, specification
and direction of the Engineer. The excavated
earth, which will be excess after necessary
backfilling, if any at the description of the
Engineer, shall be removed away from the site
to contractor's arranged land. (The contractor
should quote the rate considering the gain of
excess excavated earth).
Quantity
Unit
Unit Rate
L.S.
10000.00
b) Extra for each additional 1m depth

beyond 1.5m
cum.
34.00
c) Extra for each 30m. additional lead beyond

60m.
cum.
7.50
cum.
2.50
cum.
37.00
cum.
148.00
a) Up to 1.5m depth and 60m lead.
03.
04.
05.
Earth filling:
Earth filling in sides of foundation trenches and
elsewhere and also for site development with
carried earth in 150mm layers, leveling,
dressing, compacting etc. complete in all
respect as per direction of the Engineer-inCharge.
(Measurement will be on compacted
volume)
Vitti Sand Filling:
Vitti Sand filling in sides of foundation
trenches and elsewhere and also for site
development with carried Vitti sand in 150
mm, leveling, dressing, compacting etc.
complete in all respect as per direction of the
Engineer in charge.
Sand Filling:
Sand (F.M. shall not be less than 1.2) filling in
all types of foundation and plinth etc. upto
Amount in Tk.
required level as per drawings, proper

mechanical compaction of sand fill with plate,
vibro or impact compactor in 150mm layers
maximum to obtained standard AASHO
density of 95% at optimum moisture contents
in each layers, compaction shall be confirmed
by field and laboratory test. Removing of
debris, slush from the pit/ Trench etc. all works
complete.
a) Foundation
cum.
195.00
cum.
195.00
sqm.
116.00
sqm.
116.00
sqm.
116.00
sqm.
311.00
sqm.
15.00
b) Boundary Wall
06.
Brick work:
Single layer brick ( 1st class picked jhama) flat
soling in foundation, plinth & whenever shown,
including sand ( FM 1.5 ) blinding the
interstices by maintaining proper grades as per
drawing etc. all work complete.
a) Pile cap
b) Ground Floor
c) Boundary wall
07.
Damp proof course on Wall :

75mm thick damp proof course with Portland
cement, coarse Sylhet sand 12 mm down
graded 'stone chips including (1:1.5:3) breaking
chips into required sizes, screening washing of
aggregates, mixing laying centering, shuttering,
casting and curing applying two coats of hot
bitumen etc. complete in all respect as per
drawing and direction of the Engineer-incharge.
08.
Damp proof course in Floor (Polythene

sheet):
Damp proof course work in floor and wherever
necessary in single layers of polythene paper
using 0.16 mm thick polythene sheet (each
layers) in between cement concrete and brick
flat 'soling providing a lap of at least 150mm
width in joints and edges and using plastic glue
and supplying of all materials, etc. complete in
all respect as per drawing, specification and
direction of the Engineer-in-charge.
09.
Shore Protection:
Supplying and driving of wooden Ballah of Av.
dia 150mrn (timber piles) for shore protection
with Bitumen drum sheet on the outer
periphery of the shoring piles with necessary
fittings, fixing the planks with shoring piles as
per approved drawing and design which
(drawing and design) will be given by the
contractor according to site condition. This
item also includes bailing out of water for the
whole construction period and maintenance of
the shore protection till the end of construction

work.
sqm.
10.
Cement Concrete Work:

75mm Cement Concrete (1:3:6) over soiling in
Mat foundation and other foundation works and
wherever specified concrete mix and specified
thickness providing Portland gray Cement, best
quality coarse sand, 20mm down graded picked
jhama chips in/c. breaking chips, screening,
mechanical mixing of concrete, curing at least
7 days, protecting the green work from rain and
sun, necessary formwork etc. all work
complete:
a) With concrete mix of proportion 1:2:4 in
Foundation
cum.
2825.00
cum.
2350.00
sqm.
340.00
cum.
1974.00
ii) 1st. floor
sqm.
301.00
iii) 2nd. floor
sqm.
305.00
sqm.
309.00
b) With concrete mix of proportion 1:3:6 in

Ground Floor
c) With concrete mix of proportion 1:2:4 in
Boundary wall
11.
Brick Work In Foundation:

lst class kiln Burnt Brick work with grey
Portland Cement and & sand (F.M. 1.5)mortar
of specified proportion, necessary scaffolding,
sorting and cleaning & wetting of good bricks,
curing, racking out joints, protecting the green
work from rain & sun in foundation,
superstructure, etc. all work complete in all
floors. In Foundation, plinths, steps etc. at
plinth level and where specified as per drawing
with 1:6 mortar proportion.
254mm. thick brickwork above plinth level
with 1:6 mortar proportion in all floors
a) ground floor
b) 127mm. thick brick work above plinth level
with 1:4 mortar proportion in all floors
i) Ground floor
12.
Klinker paving bricks work:

Klinker paving bricks work in pavement with
machine made ceramic pressed bricks of
approved quality in cement mortar (4:1) on
minimum 12 mm thick cement mortar (4:1)
in/c raking out joints, cutting the bricks to
required size whenever necessary in/c high
class flush pointing (2:1), cleaning, curing at
least for 7 days etc. complete as per direction of
Engineer in Charge and standard practice.
(F.M. of sand= 1.2)
a) 100 mm thick brick on edge pavement with

200 mm x 100 mm x 50 mm
sqm.
800.00
sqm.
475.00
cum.
1974.00
sqm.
1974.00
sqm.
1974.00
sqm.
301.00
sqm.
305.00
sqm.
305.00
M.T.
23000.00
M.T.
23000.00
M.T.
23000.00
M.T.
23000.00
M.T.
26000.00
M.T.
26000.00
M.T.
26000.00
M.T.
26000.00
b) 50 mm flat brick pavement with 200 mm x

100 mm x 50 mm klinker paving bricks ( 1:4)
13.
C.C Work Above Plinth Level:

254 mm thick brick work above plinth level
with 1:6 mortar proportion in an floors.
a) Ground floor
b) 1st. Floor
c) 2nd. Floor
127mm thick brickwork above plinth level with
1:4 mortar proportion in all floors.
a) Ground Floor
b) 1st. Floor
c) 2nd. Floor
14.
Reinforcement in R.C.C:
Steel Reinforcement works in R.C.C works
providing deformed or plain bars of any size
manufactured from billets having min. yield
strength as specified below unless otherwise
specified, cleaning the steel surface, cutting the
bars in required length, making the bars as per
shape and size, placing the bar in position
providing necessary blocks, chairs hangers
spacers etc.(no payment shall be made for
hooks laps chairs hangers spacers overweight,
wastage, etc.) all work complete by using 24
BWG G.I. binding wire in all floors. Deformed
bars of 276 MPa (40,000 psi)
a) Foundation i) Pile
ii) Pile cap
b) Ground Floor
c) 1st. Floor
Deformed bars 415 Mpa (60,000psi)
a) Foundation
b) Ground floor
c) 1st. floor
d) 2nd. floor
15.
Cast-in-situ Piles:
Providing and erecting all necessary plants,
equipments and labour for boring holes and

casting at site 500 mm dia bored Cast-in-situ
RCC piles to the required depth. (The actual
depth of piles shall be determined after the load
test of pile is done) from 1.5 m (approx.) below
the E.G.I. or as per drawing and design for all
piles except test piles which will be cast from
E.G.I. (payment will be made for length
between tip level and cut off level) with 20mm
down well graded broken Bholaganj stone
chips, well graded Sythet coarse sand
(F.M.=2.5) and Portland cement of proportion
which actually is to be determined by trial
mixes but in any case not less than (1:1.5:3)
from approved materials at site to attain a
minimum
ultimate
strength
of
245kg/cm.sq.(3500) psi at 28 days cylinder.
The rate shall include supply and cost of all
materials such as stone chips, Sylhet sand,
cement (Excluding cost of reinforcement and
its fabrication) necessary quantity of Bentonite
as per drawing, specification and direction of
the Engineer-in-charge. The rate will also
include the providing layout and bringing
plants, mud-pump Trimie pipe, guide pipe etc.
in position and casting of concrete for service
piles and test piles. The cost includes
installation of plants with all accessories and
their operations, concrete casting, supplying
necessary rail line and H.P. pipe line, making
water reservoirs, slurry tanks, water and power
supply arrangements, disposal of slurry and
spoils at contractor's risk and responsibility,
false concreting above for the cut-off level,
supply all other necessary machineries, fuels,
lubricants, tools, tackles, provisions for
successful performance of the job etc. complete
as per design, drawing, specification and
direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Rate is
inclusive of false casting. Measurement will be
given from cut-off level).
a) 400 mm dia
b) 500 mm dia
16.
Breaking of pile head & repairing:

Dismantling of excess concrete of piles upto
required level as per drawing including
straightening the top rods of the piles and
bending the same for anchorage in the piles
head or raft as per direction of the Engineer-incharge including removing the debris to a safe
distance from the site to contractor's own
arranged land. Pile head extension repair with
cement, sand (F.M.=2.5)and20 mm down
graded broken stone chips (1:1.5:3) having
minimum f'c=245Kg/cm.sq. (3,500 psi) of 28
rm.
960.00
rm.
1296.00
days cured cylinder including cost of shuttering

centering curing etc. complete as per direction
of the Engineer-in-charge.
a) 400 mm dia
cum.
1030.00
cum.
1030.00
kg
90.00
cum.
4500.00
cum.
4500.00
cum.
4500.00
cum.
4500.00
b) 500 mm dia
17.
I section columns & Grade Beams:

Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as
per design I section columns & beams
reinforcement in concrete with straightening
and cleaning rust, if any, bending and binding
in position with supply of G. I. wires etc.
complete in all respects as per drawing, design
and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (50
grade with new still plate with one coat red
oxide painting)
18.
R.C.C. in columns, footings, pile cap&

Grade Beams:
R.C.C work providing Portland grey cement
sand(F.M 2.5) and 20mn down graded Picked
jhama chips of proportion which actually is to
be determined by trial mix from the approved
materials at site, mechanical mixing and
consolidation of concrete to attain the specified
minimum cylinder crushing strength at 28 days
but the mixer shall not be less than specified
proportion, casting the concrete in water tight
formwork, centering, shuttering, propping,
scaffolding, proper placement
of steel
reinforcement, embedded built in items and
blackouts and C~15 etc. Monolithically casting
of an built in items, mailing gangway not to
disturb the green work from rain and sun all
work complete in/c. curing in all floors
(excluding the cost of reinforcement and its
fabrication works)
In columns, footings, pile cap and all types Of
grade beams, with a concrete mix of 1.2:4
proportion to attain the minimum cylinder
crushing strength of 18 MPa (2500 Psi)
a) Foundation
b) Ground Floor
c) 1st. Floor
d) 2nd.Floor
19.
Still corrugated sheet in floor slab:

per design corrugated sheet under concrete base
with straightening and cleaning rust, if any,
bending and binding in position with supply of
G. I. wires etc. complete in all respects as per
drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-
in-charge.
a) 1st. Floor
sqm.
656.48
sqm.
656.48
a) Ground Floor
cum.
4550.00
b) 1st. Floor
cum.
4575.00
c) 2nd.Floor
R.C.C in Horizontal slab, Stairs:
concrete mix of 1:2:4 proportion to attain the
minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18 MPa
(2500 Psi) at 28 days.
cum.
4600.00
a) Ground Floor
cum.
4550.00
b) 1st. Floor
cum.
4575.00
c) 2nd.Floor
R.C.C in Stair core & Lift core:
A concrete mix of 1:2:4 proportion to attain the
minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18 MPa
(2500 Psi) at 28 days.
cum.
4600.00
a) Ground Floor
cum.
4550.00
b) 1st. Floor
cum.
4575.00
c) 2nd.Floor
Still lattice roof truss:
per design as roof with straightening and
cleaning rust, provided from still industry. All
respects as per drawing, design and direction of
the Engineer-in-charge. (50 grade with new
still plate with one coat red oxide painting)
cum.
4600.00
kg
90.00
4000.00
b) 2nd.Floor
20.
21.
22.
23.
R.C.C in Floor Beams:

All types of floor beams with a concrete mix of
1:2:4 proportions to attain the minimum
cylinder crushing strength of 18Mpa (2500 Psi)
at 28 days.
24.
I section purlin on roof truss:

per design on roof with straightening and
cleaning rust, provided from still industry. All
the Engineer-in-charge(50 grade with new still
plate with one coat red oxide painting)
25.
M.S. ROD (DEFORMED BAR, 60 Grade):

per design deformed bar reinforcement in
concrete with straightening and cleaning rust, if
any, bending and binding in position with
supply of G. I. wires etc. complete in all
the Engineer-in-charge.(60 grade deformed bar
with minimum fy=415 Mpa).

26.
Welding work:
Welding the laps of Deformed bar with 50mm
long alternately placed both side @50mm c/c.
welding spot of the lap by highly oxidual
electrode rods of fy=4200 Kg/cm.sq. and
fitting the gaps between the laps including cost
of machinery tools etc. all complete as per
direction of the Engineer-in-charge, (The
measurement will be given 50mm length both
side welding=1 point. Welding is required for
20mm and above dia rod).
27.
12mm thick Plaster with Dado/Skirting:

12 mm thick cement plaster (1:4) to dado inside
the walls and plinth wall upto 150 mm below
ground level with neat cement finishing and
finishing the edges and corners including
curing etc. all complete as per drawing and
28.
12 mm thick cement Plaster on Wall:

12 mm thick cement plaster having proportion
(1:6) cement and sand (F.M.=1.5 min.) mortar
'to all superstructure walls both inner and outer
surfaces including finished smooth surface,
leveling, scaffolding, cleaning, scrapping,
washing, finishing corners & edges, supplying
of all materials and curing etc. complete in all
respect as per drawings, specification and
29.
Patent Stone:
38mm thick patent stone flooring (1:1.5:3) with
one part of Portland cement one and half part
of 'coarse sand (F.M.=2.5min) and three part of
12mm down graded stone chips of coarse
aggregate, mixing and laying concrete true to
level and shape in alternate panels, including
finishing the top with neat cement finishing and
curing by ponding fresh water including
supplying all materials, screening & washing
the aggregates etc. compete in all respect in all
floors as per drawing, specification and
30.
12mm thick finished situ Terrazzo work:

12mm thick finished situ Terrazzo work on
floor with one part of l0mm machine crushed
well graded dust free and properly washed
marble chips and one part of mixture
containing
white
cement
(made
in
Malaysia/Thailand/India) and grey cement in
proportion (9:1) including preparation of mix
laying the same over mm. 25mm thick artificial
paten stone flooring in proportion (1:2:4)
(cement, sand, brick chips) in/c making suitable
panel, compacting, curing at least for 7 days,
Qtl.
3129.00
Pt.
4.00
sqm.
87.00
sqm.
72.00
sqm.
59.00
cutting with pumic stone (Nos. 40, 80,120) and

finishing with Minar stone in/c breaking brick
chips, screening, washing mosaic chips and
supply of all necessary materials.
a) With Pakistani Origin Marble chips and
suitable panel by 5mm thick and 20mm deep
glass dividers
b) With Pakistani Origin Marble chips and
without glass dividers (in window sill, stair or
wherever directed.
31.
Enamel Paint :
Minimum 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint
(brand and color to approved) over an approved
coat of red lead primer for metal faces or with a
base coat on wooden surface (toilet & Kitchen
door) with high class finishing including
cleaning, iron papering and preparing the
surface, supplying of all materials etc. complete
in all respect in all floors as per drawing,
specification and direction of the Engineer- incharge.
33.
Plastic Paint :
Plastic painting of best quality and approved
color to wall and ceiling three coats with putty
work cleaning, sand papering the surface and
necessary scaffolding etc. all complete in all
floors.
White Wash:
White washing three coats with slacked stone
lime, supply of gums, blue pigment in/c
scaffolding and necessary cleaning, before and
after the wash for all floors.
Snowcem Work:
Snowcem work of approved quality and color
(Foreign made) two coats over a coat of
priming including cleaning and sand papering
the surface and necessary scaffolding etc. all
complete as per direction of the Engineer-incharge.
Distemper Work:
Oil bound distempering to wall & ceiling 2
coats over a coat of priming of chalk wash with
glue including cleaning and sand papering the
surface and necessary scaffolding etc. all
complete in all floors.
Insulation:
Insulation with 50 mm thick glass wool blanket
(12kg/m3) with tac 810 single sided aluminium
foil facing on one side including galvanized
roof mesh (3 x 3) square spacing).
35.
36.
37.
730.00
sqm.
670.00
sqm.
46.00
sqm.
64.00
sqm.
69.00
sqm.
5.50
sqm.
35.00
sqm.
37.00
French Polishing:
French polishing to door and window frames
and shutters three coats over a coat of priming
including cleaning, finishing and polishing with
sand paper etc. all complete in all floor.
32.
34.
sqm.
38.
sqm.
422.92
sqm.
1128.00
sqm.
3200.00
sqm.
6500.00
Fixed glazed window:

Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing of
fixed glazed frame with outer member of
19mm x 19mm x 19mm x 3mm 'Z' section and
verticle and horizontal dividers of 19mm x
19mm x 3mm 'T' section including all cost of
fabrication and welding, supplying and fixing
of 19mm x 19mm x 3mm angle clamps of
150mm length of required nos. with the frame,
fixing the frame in wall with 1:2:4 cement
concrete after making necessary grooves,
supplying and fixing of 3mm glass panes with
pucca putty, mending good all damages,
painting iron faces two coats of synthetic
enamel paint over a coat of anti-corrosive
priming of approved colour and quality etc. all
complete as per plan and direction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
39.
Still Railing with vertical still pipe post:

Providing railing with 38mm dia still pipe hand
rail welded with 12mm dia still pipe post fixed
vertically @ 125mm c/c. 75mm of the bottom
of the pipes to be embedded in floor with
50mm x 50mm x 3mm still base plate welded
at bottom, all complete including making
necessary grooves in floor, packing the post
with 1:2:4 cement concrete, manding good all
damages, finishing etc. as per plan and
40.
Marble on floor (300mm x 300mm x 20mm)

:
Supplying and placing best quality marble on
floor 30Omm x 300mrn x 2mm thick in size of
approved quality texture and colour (Italian
marble) in the designated places as per drawing
on 25mm thick cement mortar (1:3) including
placing cement slurry below the stone, cutting
the marble stone to desired size, grinding and
finishing the edges, setting in position with
while cement and colouring pigments including
supplying all necessary equipments/materials
and finishing the top by pumice stone and
necessary auxiliary materials complete in all
respect as per direction of the Engineer-inCharge. (For all floor) Measurement for
payment shall make in area of finished visible
floor surface.
41.
Stair Railing:
900mm high stainless steel pipe railing in stair
in/c. manufacturing and fixing in position as
per drawings providing wooden hand rest of
9675 Sq.mm. area, hand rest and all other
verticals of 25mm dia stainless steel pipe shall
be manufactured by proper welding, providing
the verticals @ 250mm C/C necessary
scaffolding and hardware, all vertical and end
of horizontal shall be embedded 75mm in to the

concrete having end anchor of 20mm X 5mm
Fl bar of 50mm long etc. all works complete.
43.
Stair Nosing:
Supplying, fitting and fixing of stair nosing
having corrugation of non skid surface on
50mm flat surface fixed at stair steps including
90mm long hold fast fish tail type anchors
embedded in concrete @ 400 centers in all
floors, rawel plug & brass screw shall be
provided @ 800mm centers, cutting the
necessary holes in concrete and mending good
the damages, concrete packing in steps hole,
curing, fixing in position, etc. all
work
complete in all floors.
44.
Aluminium swing door:

Supplying, fitting and fixing in position of
manually operated heavy swing door with
concealed door closer in dark bronze anodized
aluminium frame with 6mm thick Foreign
made tinted glass of approved quality including
necessary arrangement to keep the door fixed
when open including necessary rubber of
synthetic materials lining, sealers along the
joints in between frame necessary filling, fixing
etc. complete as per design, drawing and
direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. (Including
all electrical/mechanical devices). (Minimum
thickness of aluminium section should be
2mm).
sqm.
1000.00
rm.
700.00
sqm.
3000.00
sqm.
1800.00
sqm.
1448.00
a) In swing door shutter Door.

b) In sliding door/windows and Partition wall
45.
False ceiling:
Supplying fitting & fixing false ceiling under
floor slab or wherever necessary with 12mm
thick plain veneered board/fire proof gypsum
board having a panel size of 600mm X 600mm
or any other approved size with 30mm X
25mm aluminium main 'T' section and 25mm X
25mm cross 'T' section. The false ceiling frame
is to be hung from concrete slab by means of
galvanized ceiling hanger and expanded steel
rowel plug keeping provision for fitting/fixing
electrical light fittings as per drawing
specification all works complete.
46.
Ceramic Tiles Work:

Supplying and laying glazed tiles of
Srilanka/Pakistan/Spain/Brazil/Malysia
or
approved origin and of approved quality and
colour on 20mm thick cement and sand (FM
1.50) mortar with a proportion mix of 1:3 base
and raking out of joints with white cement and
colour pigment including cutting and laying

tiles in proper way and finishing with care,
curing, at least 7 days etc. all complete.
i) 150mm x 150mm. Or specified size in toilet
walls
sqm.
650.00
sqm.
650.00
cum.
35300.00
cum.
1610.00
sqm.
4842.00
a) column raping
sqm.
344300.00
b) roof
Site cleaning :
Site cleaning work after completion of all
works under the contract including removing
all temporary structures built in connection
sqm.
430400.00
ii) 100mm x 200mm. Or specified size in

toilet/kitchen walls
47.
Door Frame Work:

Wood work in door chowkat with well
seasoned, crack and worm hole free sound
timber of approved quality and sizes as per
drawing, coal tarring the faces in contact with
masonry walls, fixing in position with 200mm
long 25mm X 25mm X 6mm M.S. angle
clamps 6 nos. per door frame including
embedded in concrete or walls, cutting holes
for clamps and refilling the holes with concrete
(1:2:4), mending good the damages, putty and
sand papering, two coats of paint/ polishing as
specified below, etc. all work complete in all
floors.
Chittagong teak wood with two coats Epoxy
clear Lacquar (Berger).
48.
Door Shuttering Works :

Woodwork in 38 mm thick finished size solid
panel door shutter as per drawing of well
seasoned, crack and worm hole free sound
specified timber including fixing with approved
quality door fixtures, Hardware, tower bolts
and cylindrical Mortice door locks(EPO),
heavy type brass handle 4 nos. , 3 nos. 100mm
butt steel hinges(China), sand papering, putty
works, 3 coats of paints of approved colour,
etc. complete.
Chittagong teak wood and 3 coats of Epoxy
clear 1acquer (Berger).
49.
50.
51.
Tempered glass:
Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing of
fixed glazed frame with outer member
tempered glass used in exterior.
Alpolic cladding columns & roof:
Finished Alpolic used in interior & exterior as
cladding material. Alpolic rapes on columns &
used in drop ceiling& raping the roof with
aluminium frame Supplying, fitting and fixing
as per design.
with the executing the work, carrying all kinds

of debris to a distance as directed by and
stacking these in a neat measurable stack in
places as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
10000.00
Total
Section 7. General Specification

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
A. SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS
1.
CEMENT
Cement shall be of ordinary gray Portland cement conforming to "Specification for Portland Cement (ASTMC-150 - 695 Type-I)". Some of the important requirements shall be as follows :
(a)
(b)
Chemical Requirements
Magnesium oxide (MgO) maximum Sulphur Trioxide (SO3)
5%
(i)
When Tricalcium Aluminate (3 CaO A12O3) is 8% or less, maximum
2.5%
(ii)
When Tricalcium Aluminate (3 CaO A12O3) is more than 8%, maximum
3.0%
(iii)
Loss on Ignition, maximum
3.0%
(iv)
Insoluble Residue, maximum
0.75%
Physical Requirements
(i)
(ii)
Fineness, specific surface (sq.cm per gram)

Turbidimeter Test (C-115 ASTM)
1600
Average value, minimum
1600
Minimum value, any one sample
1500
Soundness
Autoclave expansion (C-151 ASTM), maximum
(iii)
0.8%
Time of Setting
Gilmore Test (C-266 ASTM)
(iv)
Initial Set, not less than
45 Minutes
Final set, not more than

Compressive strength
8 hours
The compressive strength of mortar cubes, composed of 1 part of cement and 2.75 parts
graded standard (ottowa) sand, by weight, prepared and tested in accordance with Method C109 (ASTM) shall be equal to or higher than the values specified for the ages indicated
below :
1 day in moist air, 2 days in water 127 Kg/cm2

1 day in moist air, 6 days in water 197 Kg/cm2
1 day in moist air, 27 days in water 282 Kg/cm
(v)
Tensile strength
The tensile strength of mortar cubes, composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts graded standard
(ottowa) sand, by weight, prepared and tested in accordance with method C-190 (ASTM)
shall be equal to or higher than the values specified for the ages indicated below:
1 day in moist air, 2 days in water 10.6 Kg/cm2

(c)
Test
Number of test to be performed shall be determined by the Employer/University Engineer and the cost of testing
including all incidental charges shall be borne by the Contractor. The test shall be performed in Engineering University
Laboratory.
2.
SAND
For both Coarse and Medium

(i)
General Characteristics
Sand shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand or a combination thereof.

(ii)
Deleterious substances
(a)
The amount of deleterious substances in sand shall not exceed the limit prescribed below:
LIMITS FOR DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN SAND FOR CONCRETE
ITEM
MAXIMUM PERCENT BY
WEIGHT OF TOTAL SAMPLE
METHOD OF TEST
Clay lumps
1.00
ASTM C-142
Materials finer than No.200 sieve
3.00
ASTM C-117
Coal and Lignite
0.50
ASTM C-125
Light weight particles floating on

liquid of density 2000 kg/cum.
0.50
ASTM C-123
(iii)
Organic Impurities
1.
Sand shall be free from injurious amounts, organic impurities, except herein provided, Sand
subjected to the ASTM C-40 for organic impurities and producing a colour darker than the
standard shall be rejected.
(iv)
2.
Sand failing in the test may be used provided that the discoloration is due principally to the
presence of small quantities of coal, lignite, or similar discrete particles.
3.
Sand failing, in the test may be used, provided that when tested for the effect of organic
impurities on strength of mortar, the relative strength at 7 and 28 days calculated in
accordance with section 10 of the Method of Test for Effect on Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregate on strength of Mortar (ASTM - Designation: (86 - 63T), is not less than 95%.
Soundness
Sand subject to five cycles of the soundness test (ASTM C-88) shall show a loss, weighted in accordance with
the grading of a sample complying with the limitations set forth herein before, not greater than 10
percent when sodium sulphate is used or 15 percent when magnesium sulphate is used.
(v)
Grading for Coarse Sand
(a)
Sieve analysis
Sand shall be graded within the following limits when tested by method ASTM- C-135 and C-125.
SIEVE
PERCENTAGE OF WEIGHT PASSING
6mm
100
No.4 (4.76mm)
95 to 100
No.8 (2.38mm)
80 to 100
No.16 (1.19mm)
50 to 85
No.30 (0.595mm)
25 to 60
No.50 (0.297mm)
10 to 30
No.100 (0.139mm)
2 to 0
(b)
The sand shall have not more than 45 percent by weight retained between any two consecutive sieves of these
shown in paragraph (a), and its Fineness Modulus shall be not less than 2.50 or more than
3.10.
(vi)
Grading for Medium Sand
(a)
Sieve Analysis : Sand shall be graded within the following limits when tested by Method ASTM C-135 and C125.
SIEVE
PERCENTAGE OF WEIGHT
PASSING
3mm
No.4 (4.76mm)
100
No.8 (2.38mm)
95 to 100
No.16 (1.19mm)
85 to 100
No.30 (0.595mm)
70 to 85
No.50 (0.297mm)
10 to 40
No.100 (0.139mm)
2 to 15
(b)
(vii)
The sand shall have not more than 50 percent by weight retained between any two
consecutive sieve of these shown in paragraph (a) and its Fineness Modulus shall be not less
then 1.50. The sand should not be retained by more than 25% between sieve No.50 and sieve
No.100.
Sampling, Testing and Approval
Sample of sand selected by the Employer/University Engineer shall be deposited by the Contractor to the Head Office of
the Consultant for testing in laboratory. The arrangement to testing in laboratory shall be done by the
Consultant but the cost of testing and all incidental charge in this connection shall be borne by the
Contractor.
The quantity of sand to be tested shall be at the discretion of the Employer/University Engineer. If any sample of sand
are found deficient in test, more tests shall be done.
If the test results are satisfactory, the Consultant/University Engineer will approve the sand for acceptance.
If the test results are not satisfactory, the entire lot from which the samples had been taken may be rejected or at the
request of the Contractor, he may be allowed to restack the sand leaving the relative inferior sand out.
After the re-stacking is done a second set of test will be run on them and if the test results are unsatisfactory, the lot will
be rejected. All rejected sands shall be stored in an exclusive area as indicated by the
Employer/University Engineer and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost.
3.
Coarse Aggregate
3.1
General Characteristics
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone of Boulders (Min. 5) of Bholaganj Standard conforming to
the requirements of this specification.
3.2
Grading
Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table-2 for the size number specified.
Note : The ranges shown in Table-2 are by necessity very wide in order to accommodate nationwide
conditions. For quality control of any specific operation, a producer should develop an average
gradation of the particular source and production facilities, and control the gradation within
reasonable tolerances from this average.
3.3.
Deleterious Substances
3.4
Except for the provisions of 10.3, the limits given in Table-3 shall apply for the class of coarse aggregate
designated in the purchase order or other document (Note-9). If the class is not specified, the requirements for Class3S, 3M, or 1N shall apply in the severe, moderate, and negligible weathering regions, respectively (See Table-3).
Note : The specified of the aggregate should designate the class of coarse aggregate to be used in the work, based on
weathering severity, abrasion, and other factors of exposure. (See Table-3). The limits for coarse aggregate
corresponding to each class designation are expected to ensure satisfactory performance in concrete for the respective
type and location of construction. Selecting a class with unduly restrictive limits may result in unnecessary cost if
materials meeting those requirements are not locally available. Selecting a class with lenient limits may result in
unsatisfactory performance and premature deterioration of the concrete. While concrete in different parts of a single
structure may be adequately made with different classes of coarse aggregate, the specifier may wish to require the
coarse aggregate for all concrete to conform to the same more restrictive class to reduce the chance of furnishing
concrete will the wrong class of aggregate, especially on smaller projects.
4.
3.5
Coarse aggregate for use in concrete that will be subject to wetting, extended exposure to humid
atmosphere, or contact with moist ground shall not contain any materials that are deleteriously
reactive with the alkalis in the cement in an amount sufficient to cause excessive expansion of
mortar or concrete except that if such materials are present in injurious amounts, the coarse
aggregate may be used with a cement containing less than 0.60% alkalis calculated as sodium oxide
equivalent (Na2 + 0.658K2O) or with the addition of a material that has been shown to prevent
harmful expansion due to the alkali aggregate reaction.
3.6
Coarse aggregate having test results exceeding the limits specified in Table-3 may be accepted
provided that concrete made with similar aggregate from the same source has given satisfactory
service when exposed in a similar manner to that to be encountered; or, in the absence of a
demonstrable service record, provided that aggregate produces concrete having satisfactory relevant
properties.
3.7
Hardness : Coarse aggregate shall conform to Abrasion Test.
Methods of Sampling and Testing

4.1
Sample and test the aggregates in accordance with the following methods, except as otherwise
provided in this specification. Make the required tests on test samples that comply with
requirements of the designated test methods. The same test sample may be used for sieve analysis
and for determination of materials finer than the 75-m (No. 200) sieve. Separated sizes from the
sieve analysis may be used in preparation of samples for soundness or abrasion tests. For
determination of all other tests and for evaluation of potential alkali reactivity where requried, use
independent test samples.
4.1.1
Sampling Practice D 75 and Practice D 3665.
4.1.2
Grading and Fineness Modulus - Method C 136
4.1.3
Amount of Material Finer than 75-m (No. 200) Sieve Test Method-C 117.
4.1.4
Organic Impurities Test Method C 40.
4.1.5
Effect of Organic Impurities on Strength Test Method C 87.
4.1.6
Soundness Test Method C 88.
4.1.7
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles Test Method C 142.
4.1.8
Coal and Lignite Test Method C 123, using a liquid of 2.0 specific gravity to remove the particles of coal
and lignite. Only material that is brownish-black, shall be considered coal or lignite. Coke shall not be classed as coal
or lignite.
4.1.9
Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Test Method C 131 or Test Method C 535.
4.1.10 Freezing and Thawing Procedures for making freezing and thawing tests of concrete are described in Test
Method C 666.
4.1.11 Chart Test Method C 123 is used to identify Particles in a samples of coarse aggregate light Er than 2.40
specific gravity, and Practice C 295 to identify which of the particles in the light fraction are chart.
TABLE -1 Limits for Deleterious Substances in Fine

Aggregate for Concrete
Item
Weight Percent for

Total Sample, Max
Clay lumps and friable particles
3.0
Material finer than 75-m (No. 200) sieve:

Concrete subject to abrasion
3.0A (In roads and pavements)
All other concrete
5.0 A
Coal and lignite :

Where surface appearance of concrete is
of importance
0.5 (for fair face concrete)
All other concrete
1.0
In the case of manufactured sand, if the material finer than the 75-m (No. 200) sieve consists of the dust
of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7%, respectively.
TABLE 2 Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates
Si
ze
N
o.
Nominal size
(Sieves with
square
Opening)
56
25.0
to
9.5mm
(1 to 3/8 in.)
25.00
to
4^N75mm
(1 in. to
No.4)
19.0
to
4.75mm
(3/4 in to 3/8
No.)
19.0
to
4.75mm
(3/4 in. to
No.4)
12.5
to
4.75mm
( in. to
No.4)
9.5
to
2.36mm
(3/8 in to
No.8)
57
67
100
mm
(4 in)
..
..
Amount Finer than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Opening), Weight Percent
90
75
63m
50
37.5
25
19m
12.5
9.5m 4.75
2.36
mm mm m
mm mm
mm m
mm
m
mm
mm
(3 (3
(2
(2
(1
(1
(3/4
(
(3/8
(No. (No.
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
in)
4)
8)
..
..
..
..
100
90
40 to 10 to
0 to
0 to
..
to
85
40
15
5
100
..
..
..
..
100
95
..
25 to
..
0 to
0 to
to
60
10
5
100
1.18
mm
(No.
16)
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
90 to
100
20 to
55
0 to
15
0 to
5
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
90 to
100
..
20 to
55
0 to
10
0 to
5
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
90 to
100
40 to
70
0 to
15
0 to
5
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
85 to
100
10 to
30
0 to
10
0 to
5
TABLE 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property
Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
Class
Designation
1M
2M
3M
4M
5M
Type of Location
of Concrete
Construction
Footings,
foundations,
columns,
and
beams not exposed
to the weather,
interior floor slabs
to
be
given
coverings.
Interior
floors
without coverings
Foundation walls
above
grade,
retaining
walls,
abutments, piers,
girders, and beams
exposed to the
weather
Pavements, bridge
decks, driveways
and curbs, walks,
patios,
garage
floors,
exposed
floors and porches,
or
waterfront
structures subject
to frequent wetting.
Exposed
architectural
concrete
Maximum Allowable, %
Sum of Clay Material
Coal
Lumps,
Finer
and
Friable
Than 75- Lignite
Particles,
m (No.
and Chart
200)
(Less Than
sieve
2.40 sp gr
SSD)
Moderate Weathering Regions
Clay
Lumps
and
Friable
Particles
Chart
(Less
Than 2.40
sp gr
SSD)
Abrasion
Magnesium
Sulfate
Soundness
(5 cycles)B
10.0
...
...
1.0D
1.0
50
5.0
...
...
1.0D
0.5
50
...
5.0
8.0
10.0
1.0D
0.5
50
18
5.0
5.0
7.0
1.0D
0.5
50
18
3.0
3.0
5.0
1.0D
0.5
50
18
...
B The allowable limits for soundness shall be 12% if sodium sulphate is used.
D This percentage may be increased under either of the following conditions : (1) if the material finer than the 75-m
sieve is essentially free of clay or shale the percentage may be increased to 1.5: or (2) if the source of the fine
aggregate to be used in the concrete is known to contain less than the specified maximum amount passing the 75-m
sieve (Table-1). The percentage limit (L) on the amount in the coarse aggregate may be increased to L = 1 +
[(P)/(100-P)] (T-A), where P=percentage of sand in the concrete as a percent of total aggregate, T = the Table-1 limit
for the amount permitted in the fine aggregate, and A = the actual amount in the fine aggregate. (This provides a
weighted calculation designed to limit the maximum mass of material passing the 75-m sieve in the concrete to that
which would be obtained if both the fine and coarse aggregates were supplied at the maximum tabulated percentage
for each of these ingredients).
4.
Boulders
4.1
Colour
The Boulders shall be very dense and white in colour, Black or coloured boulders shall not be accepted.
4.2
Size
The size of Boulder shall very from 63.5 mm (2.5) to 127 mm (5).
4.3
Specific Gravity should be 2.70 to 2.80.
4.4
Compressive Strength or Crushing Strength
The compressive / crushing strength of boulder not less than 850 kg / cm2 (12,000 psi).
4.5
Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances in boulders shall not exceed the limits given below :
Sl. No.
Item
1.
2.
3.
Clay Lumps
Soft Particle
Chart as an impurity that will
disintegrate in five cycles of the
soundness test
Materials finer than No. 200
Sieve
Coal and lignite
4.
5.
4.6
Max. percent by
weight of total
0.25
5.00
5.00
Method of Test
ASTM C - 142
ASTM C 235
ASTM C 88
1.00
ASTM C 117
0.50
ASTM C 123
Soundness
Boulders subjected to five cycles of the soundness test (ASTM C-88) shall show a loss, not greater than 12 percent when
sodium sulphate is used and 18 percent when magnesium sulphate is used.
4.7
Boulders tested for abrasion (ASTM C 131) shall have a loss not more than 35 percent.
4.8
Crushing value should not exceed 30%.of Crushing Strength.
4.9
Porosity Test : Maximum 1%.
5.
BRICKS
A.
Ordinary First Class Machine made Bricks
Brick shall be machine made ordinary First Class brick. Bricks unless otherwise specified shall be first class of size
241mm x 114mm x 70mm. Those shall be uniform in size and colour thoroughly and evenly burnt.
These shall not break when thrown on the ground against one another from a height of 1.5M and shall
give a metallic sound when struck against one another. The bricks shall be free from cracks or flaws.
The brick shall have a minimum compression strength of 141 kg/cm2 on flat for any individual brick
and 176 kg/cm2 on flat for average of any five bricks. The bricks shall not absorb more than one sixth
of their weight of water when immersed for one day.
The bricks shall be M.B.CO. or Conforce standard or approved best quality.
The bricks shall be kiln and gas/coal burnt.

B.
Ordinary First Class bricks
The specification of Ordinary First Class Bricks shall be as that of Ordinary First Class Machine made Bricks and it may
be of any brick field excepting Mirpur Zone.
C.
Picked Jhama Bricks

The specification of picked jhama bricks shall be as that of ordinary first class machine made bricks except and
provided that the bricks shall have a minimum compression strength of 253 kg/ cm2 on flat for any
individual bricks and 316 kg/cm2 on flat for average of any five bricks.
The bricks shall be kiln and gas/coal burnt.

D.
Test
The number of bricks to be tested shall be at the discretion of the University Engineer/Site Engineer.
Only, after the bricks are approved by Consultant/University Engineer, it shall be used in the work.
The test shall be performed in the Engineering University Laboratory.
6.
REINFORCING STEEL
A.
General
The Mild Steel Rod shall conform ASTM A 15-64 (Structural Grade) and High Strength Rod shall conform ASTM A
432-64.
The ends of the bar shall be machine sheared perpendicular to the axis of the bar.
The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman like finish.
B.
Chemical Properties
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition :

Phosphorus, maximum percent
Open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace
Basic
....
0.05
Acid
....
0.08
Acid bessemer and open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace.

Rephosphorized ....
C.
0.12
Process
The bars shall be rolled from new and clean billet directly reduced from ingots of properly identified heats of open
hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace steel or its of acid bessemer steel.
D.
Tensile properties and bending properties
PROPERTIES
i)
Yield Strength
In Mpa
MILD STEEL
(PLAIN)
235
HIGH STRENGTH
DEFORMED
415
PROPERTIES
MILD STEEL
(PLAIN)
Ultimate Tensile Strength

In Mpa
iii) Minimum Elongation
a) dia upto 18 mm
b) dia 20 & 22 mm
c) dia 25 mm
d) dia 30 mm
iv) Bend Test
The specimen shall stand being bent at
(all sizes) room temperature around a pin
without cracking on the outside of the
bent portion. The relation between the
diameter of the pin(t) and the diameter
of the specimen (d) shall be
HIGH STRENGTH
DEFORMED
ii)
E.
394
In 200mm length
24%
23%
22%
20%
180o Bend
t=4d
590
In 200mm length
11%
10%
9%
7%
90o Bend
upto 16mm t=4d
18mm to 22mm t=5d
25mm t=5d
30mm t=6d
Dimensional requirement for both mild steel and high strength
The nominal diameter, perimeter and cross -sectional area of a deformed bar (is equivalent to that of a plain bar having
the same standard weight).
F.
Bar size
Standard weight in
Kg/M
Diameter in mm
Cross sectional
Area in cm2
Perimeter in mm
6mm
0.222
0.283
18.85
8mm
0.395
0.503
25.13
10mm
0.616
10
0.785
31.42
12mm
0.887
12
1.13
37.70
16mm
1.58
16
2.01
50.27
18mm
1.99
18
2.54
56.55
20mm
2.47
20
3.14
62.83
22mm
2.98
22
3.80
69.12
25mm
3.85
25
4.91
78.54
30mm
5.55
30
7.07
94.25
Permissible variation from standard weight

Mild Steel Rods
Bar size
G.
High Strength
deformed Rod
Plain
Deformed or Twisted Deformed
For lot 6mm
5%
3.5% for all sizes
3.5% for all sizes
Above 6mm
3.50%
For individual 6mm
10%
6% for all sizes
6% for all sizes
Above 6mm
6%
Requirement of Deformation (both for Mild steel and High strength steel)
(a)
Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The
deformation on opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape.
(b)
The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that the included angle is not less than 45
deg. Where the line of deformation forms an included angle with the axis of the bar of from
45 to 70o deg. inclusive, the deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each side, or
those on one side shall be reversed in direction from these on the opposite side. Where the
line of deformations is over 70 deg. a reversal in direction is not required.
(c)
The average centre to centre or distance between deformation on each side of the bar shall not exceed seven
tenths of the nominal diameter of the bar.
(d)
The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the extreme ends of the deformations on
Where the extreme ends terminate in a longitudinal rib, the width of the longitudinal rib shall
be considered the gap. Where more than two longitudinal ribs are involved, the total width of
all longitudinal ribs shall not exceed 25 percent of the nominal perimeter of the bar further
more, the summation of gaps shall not exceed 25 percent of the nominal perimeter of the bar.
The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be 3.14 times the nominal diameter.
(e)
The minimum height of deformations shall be not less than the following percentages of the nominal diameter of
the bar.
Diameter of the M.S. Rod
(f)
Minimum height of deformation in

percent of nominal diameter of bar
10mm dia
12mm dia
16mm dia
20mm dia to 38mm dia
The spacing, height, and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements prescribed below :
Bar size
Maximum
average spacing in
mm
Minimum
average height
in mm
Max. Gap in mm
10mm dia
6.7
0.38
3.5
12mm dia
8.9
0.51
4.9
16mm dia
11.1
0.71
6.1
18mm and 20mm dia
13.3
0.96
7.3
22mm dia
15.5
1.11
8.5
25mm dia
17.8
1.27
9.7
28mm dia
20.1
1.42
10.9
30mm and 32mm dia
22.5
1.63
12.37
nominal perimeter)
(g)
Measurements
(i)
The average spacing of deformations shall be determined by dividing a measured length of the bar specimen by
the number of individual deformations on any one side of the bar specimens. A
measured length of the bar specimen shall be considered the distance from a point on
a deformation to a corresponding point on any other deformation on the same side of
the bar.
(ii)
The average height of deformations shall be determined from measurements made on not less than two typical
deformations. Determinations shall be based on three measurements per
deformations, one at the centre of the over-all length and the other two at the quarter
points of the over-all length.
7.
TIMBER
The timber to be used shall be of first class quality of the specimen as noted in the schedule of items.
It shall be from the heart of a matured and sound tree and shall be uniform in substance. The timber shall be free from
large or dead knots, cracks, flaws, shakes, blemishes or any other defects. The timber shall not contain any sapwood and shall not have surface cracks or chipping in edges and corners.
The timber shall be well seasoned and shall not contain more than 12% moisture by weight.
B. MATERIAL FOR PLUMBING WORK
1.
PIPES
(i)
G.I. pipes
The Galvanised Iron pipes to be used in the work shall conform to ASTM A 120-57T, welded or seamless. The dia of
pipes mentioned in the Schedule of Item are nominal diameters. The pipes shall be coated with Zinc
inside and outside by hot dip process and the Zinc used for the coating shall be any grade of Zinc
conforming to the specifications for slab Zinc. The weight of coating shall be less than 2.0 oz. per
square foot. Each length of the pipe shall be tested at the mill to the Hydrostatic Test pressure and Test
pressure shall be 84 kg / cm2.
The pipes shall also conform to the following tables.
The exterior surface of the pipes shall be painted in 2 coats of "Thick cote" Epoxy special 2 pack product
(Catalyst/Curing Agent) made by BERGER/approved best quality.
(v)
Nominal size in mm
(diameter)
Outside diameter
mm
Wall thickness in mm
Weight in kg/M
12mm
21.34mm
2.77mm
126
18mm
26.67mm
2.87mm
1.68
25mm
33.40mm
3.38mm
2.50
38mm
48.26mm
3.68mm
4.06
50mm
60.33mm
3.91mm
5.48
62mm
73.03mm
5.16mm
8.66
P.V.C. Pipe
The PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM Designation D 1785 - 64T, 80 schedule.
The wall thickness with tolerance is noted below :
Nominal size
Wall thickness
Tolerance
(in mm)
50mm
5.54
+ 0.026
75mm
7.62
+ 0.036
100mm
8.56
+ 0.040
125mm
9.53
+ 0.045
150mm
10.97
+ 0.052
2.
PIPE FIXTURE
(i)
Gate Valve
Gate Valves of sizes 62mm to 150mm dia shall be made of Cast Iron, Bronze trim, conforming to specification B.S.
3464, 1962, "Double Dise" type with non-rising stem. Gate valves of size 50mm dia shall be made of
Copper Alloy, bronze trim, conforming to specifications B.S. 1952, 1964, "Double Disc" type with
non-rising stem.
(ii)
Screw Down Valve
Screw Down Valves shall be of plain brass and of best quality available in Bangladesh.
(iii)
Float and Ball Valve :
Float and Ball valve shall be brass and of best quality available in Bangladesh.
(iv)
Bib cock, Pillar cock
These shall be chromium plated and shall be of best quality available in Bangladesh. The item shall conform the sample
kept in the Office of the Consultant having marked "Best Quality" The tenderer shall see sample before
quoting their rate.
(v)
H.C.I. Fitting : e.g. P/S trap, Nahani trap, Floor trap, etc. The H.C.I. fittings shall be of MAANCO brand or
approved best quality.
(vi)
Siphon
The siphon used in low cistern shall be of SHANKS or approved best quality.
C.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS (MATERIALS AND WORKS)
A.
GENERAL
1.0.
SCOPE OF WORK
This chapter covers all equipment/ materials and operations in connection with internal and external electrification and
similar other installation works covering buildings and related other establishments as indicated on the
drawings. All works shall be completely in conformity with the Rules and Regulations as stated below.
2.0.
STANDARD CODE AND REGULATIONS FOR INSTALLATION
The installation in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity Rules of the Govt. of Bangladesh
(Indian Electricity Act and Rules as adopted in Bangladesh) and the 14th edition of the Regulation for Electrical
Equipment of Buildings of the Institute of Electrical Engineers (London), hereinafter referred as 'I.E.E. Wiring
Regulations' and the British Standard Code of practice for the relevant works. But where the under noted
specifications differs from these rules and standards, the specifications written hereunder shall be followed. Any
special requirement of the Electrical Inspector, Govt. of Bangladesh or the Power Development Board/Dhaka
Electric Supply Authority or the Telegraph and Telephone Board or any other Legally constituted Authority
shall also be complied with, at Contractor's cost within the Contract Price.
3.0.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
The drawings related to the works indicate only the general arrangement of the electrical installation. Details of
proposed departures due to actual field condition or other pause shall be submitted to the Engineer. for
approval. The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper
installation of materials, fixtures and equipment in each unit as indicated without substantial alteration.
3.2
Climatic and Atmospheric Conditions :
The installations, equipment and materials shall be installed both externally and internally and shall
therefore, be designed and built to give efficient and reliable service continuously at the normal voltage
and current rating in the prevalent climatic and atmospheric conditions at the relevant site.
3.3
Specifications :
Materials required which are not covered by the detailed specifications shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer or in consistent with good practice and approved by the Engineer.
3.4
Drawings :
The drawings show the general arrangement of all circuitry, wiring, feeders, cables and race ways etc. however, where
local conditions necessitate a re-arrangement shall prepare and submit for approval drawings of the proposed rearrangement. Because of the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting and accessories
which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all of his
works and shall arrange such works accordingly, furnishing such fittings, access traps, inspection boxes and accessories
as may be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor , if necessary shall prepare a shop drawing indicating the
exact location of conduits and wiring for approval of the Engineer.
3.5
Cutting and Repairing :
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and any cutting of construction shall be done only with the written
permission of the Engineer. Cutting shall be carefully done and mending good the damages to the
building as a result of cutting for installation, piping, wiring for equipment etc. shall be done by skilled
mistries of the trade involved, at no additional expense to the Employer.
3.6
Protection of Fixture:
Conduit and pipe opening shall be closed with caps of plugs during installation. Fixture fittings and equipment shall be
adequately protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the
work, fixture, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a condition
satisfactory to the Engineer.
3.7
Notice :
The Contractor shall give all required notices to and maintain liaison with Electrical Inspector, Government of
Bangladesh and to the Electric Supply Department of Power Development Board of the area of the
work concerned or similar other organisations and any other legal Authority Regulating the electrical
works or installation.
3.8
Execution and Superintendence :
The works shall be carried out only by licensed workman authorized by the Government or any other legal Authority set
up for the purpose to undertake such works under the provision of the Indian Electricity Act. 1939 and
Rules as adopted in Bangladesh and under the direct supervision of a whole time electrical supervisor
having certificate of competency for the type of work under execution. Particulars along with a
Photostat copy of the competency certificate of the electrical supervisor shall be submitted to the
Engineer. before commencing the work.
4.0.
APPROVAL AND LIST OF MATERIALS, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT
As soon as practicable and within 30 days after date of receipt of executed contract and before any materials fixtures
or equipment are purchased, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list, in
triplicate, of materials, fixtures and equipment to be incorporated in the work, together with the names and
addresses of the manufactures and their catalogues numbers and trade names. The contractor shall also furnish
other detailed information where so directed, under the various items. No consideration will be given to partial
lists submitted from time to time. Approval of materials will be based on manufactures, published ratings. Any
materials fixtures and equipment listed which are not in accordance with the specification requirements may be
rejected, the product of any reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the commercial production of
equipment shall not be excluded no the basis of minor differences, provided all essential requirements of this
specification relative to materials capacity and performance are met. The Contractor shall furnish a statement
giving a complete description of all points wherein the equipment proposed does not comply with the
specifications. Failure to furnish such a statement will be in turreted to mean that the equipment meets all
requirement of the specifications. Tear sheet of catalogues shall be furnished if such catalogues are not readily
available to the Engineer.
5.0 AS-BUILT/RECORD DRAWINGS
5.1
As-Built/Record Drawings and Charts for Internal Electrification.
Before the installation is finally handed over to the Employer the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for
approval As-Built/Record drawings showing layout of all electrical fixtures and Boards and positions
and layout of conduits and exposed wiring if any and cable runs with dimensions and full circuit
details.
If the Engineer finds that the As-Built Drawings are not complete in all respects and/or they contain errors, the Contractor
shall do the corrections and resubmit to the Engineer, more than once if necessary, till the Engineer can
approve the As-Built Drawings.
A detailed circuit Chart shall be prepared, fitted in a durable frame and fixed in an approved position adjacent to the main
distribution control gear.
The installation shall not be considered complete till the As-Built Drawings free from incompleteness and errors are
submitted to and approved by the Engineer and the Charts mentioned above are fixed in a satisfactory
manner.
5.2
As-Built/Record Drawings for External Electrical Works
Before the installation is finally handed over to the Employer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for
approval As-Built/Record drawings showing all routes and depths below ground of all electrical cables,
telephone cables.
If the Engineer finds that the As-Built Drawings are not complete in all respects and/or they contain errors, the Contractor
shall do the correction and resubmit to the Engineer for approval of the As-Built Drawings, more than
once if necessary, till the Engineer can approve the As-Built Drawings.
The installation shall not be considered complete till the As-Built Drawings free from incompleteness and errors are
prepared and submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer and the Charts mentioned above are fixed in
a satisfactory manner.
Submission of As-Built/Record Drawings for all work is a pre-requisite for Contractor's claim for final payment for any
work including Electrical Work.
6.0
PAINTING
Manufacturer
All paints and primers shall be made by BERGER/approved best quality)
Mending G.I. members
Galvanization spoilt by welding shall first be mended by Epilux-4 zinc-rich primer, 2 Pack, (J65).
Painting on G.I. members
Galvanized iron members (after mending galvanization spoilt by welding, if any by Epilux-4 zinc rich primer (J65))
shall be coated with Wash primer 2 Pack, (J31) and yellow zinc chromate (J41) before the specified final paint
is applied.
G.I. Pipe Poles
The final paint shall be 2 coats of Single Pack Aluminium (J04)
G.I. Pipes and accessories Below Ground

The final paint shall be 2 coats of Epilux-5 Coal Tar Epoxy, 2 Pack, Black.
Galvanised steel boxes
If no paint is indicated, any damage to galvanization shall be repaired by Epilux-6 zinc-rich primer, 2 Pack, (J65).
DB/SDB in 16 SWG sheet steel
The final paint shall be 2 coats of Epilux-4, Enamel, 2 Pack, grey, (J33) over Epilux red oxide primer, 2 Pack, (J42).
H.T. Panel, L.T. Panel, Power Factor Improvement Plant, Auto-Manual Change Over Panel and Auto-Mains Failure
Panel in 14 SWG galvanised sheet steel
Any damage to galvanisation in the Panel surface by welding or otherwise shall first be primer mended by Epilux-4
zinc rich primer (J65) followed by Wash Primer, 2 Pack, (J31) and Yellow Zinc Chromate Primer (J41).
There after the final paint shall be applied in 2 coats of Epilux-4 Enamel, 2 Pack, Grey colour.
Paint on non-galvanized mild steel members
There shall be final paint of 2 coats of Epilux Enamel paint, 2 Pack (J33) over a coat of Epilux Red Oxide primer, 2
Pack, (J42).
No Aluminium to be embedded in or to come in contact with concrete/plaster
Since the metal aluminium is affected by alkalies present in cement, no aluminium conduits or accessories or any other
aluminium body shall be embedded in concrete or used in positions where it may come in contact with cement
products such as concrete and plaster.
Standard Brick mentioned herein shall be 241x114x70mm in size and shall be first class with 150Kg/cm2
compressive strength on flat.
All sand mentioned in different items, sand to be used in mortar for brick work and plaster and sand to be used
as fine aggregate for plain concrete shall be clean and of F.M. 1.30 min.
Sand to be used as fine aggregate in R.C. shall be clean and of F.M.2.30 min.
Coarse aggregate for C.C and R.C shall be clean and be made from jhama bricks of 250 kg/sq.cm. compressive strength
and graded 19mm down.
Cement shall conform ASTM C150 Type 1.
7.0
EXCAVATING, TRENCH MAKING AND BACK FILLING

7.1 Excavating, trench making and back filling is as specified elsewhere later on.
8.0
WOODEN MEMBERS
8.1 Wood battens, angles, boards and boxes for surface wiring shall be best quality teak/garland wood.
9.0.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
9.1
Concealed Installations
9.1.1
Where condition is shown on the drawings or is otherwise specified as being concealed, such conduit may be
embedded in structural slabs or in concrete fill laid on top of structure slabs or concealed
within hollow spaces. Where embedded in structural slabs conduits shall not exceed 30mm
trade size, unless there are specific identification to the contrary. In areas where the slab is
less than 125mm thick, the overall diameter of the largest conduit shall not exceed one third
of slab thickness.
9.1.2
All the conduit running through the boxes and columns shall be laid with the innermost reinforcement case with
suitable effect in conduit so to make the outer surface of junction box cover for switch box
edges flush with the finished surface level or beam of columns as approved.
9.1.3
Care shall be taken when making concealed installation to see that adequate clearance is
provided over the thickness elements such as coupling etc. so that fill or architectural finishes
may be applied which will be smooth, flat and not subject to spalling or cracking.
9.1.4
Raceways runs embedded in slab shall be spaced not less than three outside diameter centre to centre unless they
are so coordinated with structures as not cause weakens.
9.2
Exposed Installation
9.2.1
Raceways or there wiring methods shall be exposed only :
a.
In specially assigned electric riser closets, shafts or switch board room.
b.
In mechanical equipment spaces.
c.
Where specially indicated on the drawing or otherwise with the expressed permission of the Engineer.
9.2.2
Exposed raceways of there wiring method shall be run parallel to building, walls, columns lines etc. throughout.
9.2.3
All exposed heavy conduits are to be fastened to masonry walls, floor or partitions, use of wooden plugs will not
be permitted instead rowel plugs should be used. Metal saddles of approved type not more
than 0.61M apart shall be used for fixing exposed conduit.
9.3
Routing
9.3.1
Every effort shall be made to route raceways or wiring therein so as prevent wiring from being subject to high
ambient temperature condition. minimum clearance from heated pipes, ducts or surface such
as breathings, flush etc. shall be maintained as follows :
a.
Crossing un-insulated pipes or ducts
75mm
b.
Crossing insulated pipes or ducts
25mm
c.
Running parallel to un-insulated pipes, ducts or surface
900mm
d.
Running parallel to un-insulated pipes, ducts or surface
150mm
9.3.2Regarding of any routing shown on the places, raceways or other wiring method shall not run exposed over a boiler
or embedded in construction under a boiler unless special provisions for wiring through these specific high ambient
temperature areas have been indicated.
9.3.3.
Regarding or other wiring methods run in suspended ceiling may be installed as the draw, files, except that,
where such raceways etc. and being installed prior information regarding the final layout of
Square manner so as to minimize future conflicts.
9.3.4.
Under no condition raceways or other wiring methods be installed in elevator shafts and hoistways. Where
outlets are being provided for such items as tri cables, pit lights, run by lift etc. only the outlet
boxes themselves shall be located within the confines of the shaft.
9.4.
Miscellaneous Requirements
9.4.1
The installation of raceways or other wiring methods requiring the notching, cutting or drilling of structural
elements shall coordinated with the other trades to ensure that no weakening of the structure is
caused.
9.4.2.
When finishing or snaking raceways to set up for pulling in wires and cables, fish taps with
ball types means shall be used.
9.5
Wires and cables shall not be pulled into raceways until :
9.5.1
a.
b.
The project has been progressed to a point where raceways are dry and moisture is no longer likely to get into
them.
c.
Wires or cables shall be pulled into raceways utilizing a suitable brush, followed by an 85% diameter ball
mended ahead of the wires or cables in the pulling assembly.
9.5.2.
The only permissible pulling lubricants is powdered soap-stones.
9.5.3
Sufficient slack shall e left on all rooms or wires and cables to permit the proper connection of devices,
equipment etc.
9.6.
Mounting Height
9.6.1.
Mounting height of outlet and fixtures shall be accordance with the following list of bottom line dimension
above finished floors unless otherwise shown on drawings.
The project has been progressed to such a stage as to not likely to injure electrical wires or cables.
a.
Light and fan s switch broads
1.37M
from finish floor level on wall
b.
Wall bracket light
2.44M
c.
Socket outlet on wall
2.29M
d.
Socket outlet above the lab table
1.07M
e.
Telephone and Intercom
225mm
f.
Calling Bell outlets
0.76M
g.
Calling Bell Indicator
2.44M
h.
Electric Clock outlet
2.44M
i.
Fire Alarm outlet
2.44M
j.
Fire Alarm Bell
2.13M
k.
Ceiling Fan
2.60M
l.
Lamp for Operation Theaters
m.
Television Antenna outlet
225mm
from finish level
n.
Ceiling suspended Fluorescent

Light Fitting
2.60M
from finish level
To ceiling with adjustable chord to

increase the height of lamp.
9.7
Stage Equipment
9.7.1.
Flood and spot light shall be with heat proof glass and mounting device shall have tilt up and tilt down slamping
device.
9.7.2.
Curtain control motor, if incorporated, will be single phase 250V, 50 cycle with micro switch arrangements to
start and stop at extreme ends.
9.7.3.
Dimmer shall be of single, if incorporated, will be single phase 250V, 10KVA, Electronic type.
9.7.4.
Stage control panel board shall be as per drawing.
9.7.5
The public address system shall include :
a.
Amplifier of 100Watts with 4 Nos. microphone Jack 6 Nos. outlet for speaker.
b.
Microphone shall be highly sensitive with switching device.
c.
Microphone stand shall be adjustable type and electroplated.
d.
Connecting lead for Microphone and speaker shall be flexible shielded wire (coaxial type)
B.
MATERIALS AND THEIR INSTALLATION :
1.
1.1.
PIPE (CONDUIT) / BATTEN WORKS

PVC Pipe (Conduit) and Accessories
The work under this item comprises supply and installation of rigid, water grade PVC Pipe and accessories concealed or
exposed in/on floors, roof slabs, walls and column where necessary in accordance with the drawings.
PVC Pipes shall be of standard manufacture to meet the requirement of BS 3505 : 1968 but with
thickness and weight per metre relaxed as per Table - 1. Pull boxes, circular boxes, bends, sockets,
elbows etc., shall be of PVC or other similar inert synthetic materials, press fitted and then sealed with
PVC solvent cement or by any other standard glue as prescribed by the manufacturer. Switch Boxes,
and Junction Boxes shall be made of Steel 18 SWG and galvanised. Each junction box shall have an
earth block where earth continuity conductor can be connected. The circular boxes shall be of PVC
material with 19mm long hub and machine screwed cover. Pull wires, to draw the copper conductors
through conduits shall be 16 SWG and galvanized. The conduits to be concealed in slabs shall be
installed along with G.I. Pull Wire in between top and bottom bar immediately after placement of
reinforcement bar as per applicable routing shown on the drawings. Conduits shall be tied with bars by
2 x 20 SWG G.I. Wire at 610mm c/c. Conduits over false ceiling will remain exposed. All these nonconcealed conduits are to be secured with concrete surface or timber frame by galvanized saddle or
cleats at 381mm c/c. Concealed conduits in concrete wall or column surface shall be placed along with
shuttering or form work before the concrete is poured in.
Any change in routing necessitated because of job condition shall have prior approval of the Engineer. All such changes
shall be marked on the plans as field records. Conduits in brick wall shall be installed during
construction of wall. No chiselling in masonry wall shall be allowed without prior approval.
PVC Pipes shall be bent either by using a hot box bending or by using flame. In any event bending radii shall be 6 times
pipe size but 152mm minimum. The pipe bore in the bent portion shall remain truly circular and
without reduction in diameter.
The conduit run shall be continuous throughout its length and kept straight as far as possible. It shall have either
horizontal or vertical run but shall never run at an angle. Routing of conduits in between walls at right
angle shall not be allowed.
All conduit run shall be kept at least 152mm clear of all service pipes. Where necessary it shall be rerouted or set out to
maintain the specified separation. If there arise any difficulty in fulfilling the above condition, it shall
be brought to the notice of the Engineer for solution/decision.
In installing the conduits particular care shall be taken in cutting them to the proper lengths so that the ends will fit
exactly in to the outlet boxes. After installation the open end shall be carefully plugged to prevent
intrusion of plaster, dust, moisture etc.
No inspection bends shall be used. At points where inspection is normally required steel boxes shall be used, in 18 SWG
sheet fabricated by welding and galvanised.
All conduits along with accessories required for complete installation shall be furnished and installed in a best
workmanship manner.
Measurement for payment shall be in linear metre of conduits installed in place for vertical or horizontal run as measured
from the as-built drawings.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided shall be paid for at the contract price, per running
metre which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials equipment, tools
and labour including storage, transportation, cutting, painting and supply of conduits and all
accessories, preparing as built drawings and providing all incidentals and consumable necessary to
complete this item of work.
TABLE - 1
Recommended specifications for
P.V.C Conduits for Electrical Cables
Outside dia
Nominal
size, mm
Wall Thickness
Approx.
inside dia,
mm
Basic
dimension, mm
Tolerance, mm
Tolerance, mm
Minimum wall
thickness, mm
13
17
0.2
1.5
0.2
14.0
16
21.5
0.2
1.5
0.2
18.5
20
26.7
0.2
1.5
0.2
23.8
25
33.5
0.2
0.2
29.5
30
42.3
0.2
0.2
38.2
40
48.3
0.2
0.1
44.2
50
60.3
0.2
2.5
0.1
55.3
60
75.3
0.2
2.5
0.1
70.3
75
89.0
0.2
3.0
0.1
82.8
100
114.3
0.2
3.0
0.1
108.3
152
152.4
0.2
3.5
0.1
110.00
1.2
Metal Conduits :
1.2.1
Metal conduits shall conform to B.S. 4568 Part-1 & Part-2, or B.S. 31:1940, and shall be in 18 SWG (minimum)
thick, either solid drawn or formed round and then welded. In the latter case, the bore shall be
free from any burs. The conduits shall be black enamelled or galvanized. The steel shall be
such that when bends are formed, the conduit should not break, crack or be deformed.
Appropriate sample shall be submitted prior to installation of conduit.
1.2.2
G.I. pipes
The Galvanised Iron pipes to be used in the work shall conform to ASTM A 120-83 Standard, welded or seamless. The
diameter of pipes mentioned in the Schedule of Item are nominal diameters. The pipes shall
be coated with Zinc inside and outside by hot dip process and the Zinc used for the coating
shall be any grade of Zinc conforming to the ASTM B-6. The weight of coating shall not be
less than 550gm per square metre. Each length of the pipe shall be tested at the mill to the
Hydrostatic Test pressure and Test pressure shall be 84 kg/cm2.
The pipes shall also conform to the following tables.
The pipe and accessories shall receive paint as specified in General Notes, General,
Nominal Size
Outside diameter in
- Painting.
Wall thickness
Weight in kg/M
diameter in mm
mm
in mm
12.7
21.3
2.77
1.26
19.1
26.7
2.87
1.68
25.4
33.4
3.38
2.50
38.1
48.3
3.68
4.05
50.8
60.3
3.91
5.43
63.5
73.0
5.16
8.62
76.2
88.9
5.49
11.28
101.6
114.3
6.02
16.06
152.4
168.3
7.11
28.23
Conduits Network of each circuit shall be completely erected before the cables are drawn-in. The conduits run shall be
continuous throughout its length, and kept straight as far as possible. It shall run either
horizontally or vertically, and never at an angle. The conduits are to be properly tied with the
re-bar at 914mm spacing using 20 SWG G.I. wire and spacers. [If the conduits are installed
exposed on wall or over false ceiling those shall be secured and clamped with saddle mild
steel flat bar 25 x 3mm at 914mm spacing using rawl plug as per direction of the Engineer.
All conduit runs shall be kept clear of gas, air and steam conduits, and conduits of other services and for this purpose the
conduits shall be either re-routed or set out with at least 75mm separation from other conduits
and electrical conduits. If there arise any difficulty in ful-filling the above condition, it shall
be brought to the notice of the Engineer for solution/decision.
Conduits installed in wall shall be placed at the time of construction of the wall. No cutting in brick work shall be allowed
without prior approval of the Engineer.
1.2.3
G.I. Bends
No inspection bends shall be used. At points where inspection is normally required steel boxes shall be used, in minimum
18 SWG sheet fabricated by welding and galvanised.
Long radius preformed bends of same material and of required angle (22.5o, 45o, 60o and 90o) shall be used.
G.I. conduit may be bent to required angle other than above only after obtaining express approval of the Engineer.
The inside edges of all openings though which cables are intended to pass shall be smoothly rounded to prevent damage
to the cables
1.2.4
Junction box, Pull box, Circular box and Switch box
Junction Box and Switch Box shall be shall be of minimum 18 SWG sheet steel and galvanised. Circular boxes, Pull
Boxes and fittings shall be manufactured from unplasticized PVC copolymer material or
other suitable non-metallic material. The fittings shall be homogenous and non-porous and
shall be so designed and constructed as to have adequate mechanical strength and be able to
withstand such rough uses as may be expected during and after installations. The inside and
outside surfaces of the fittings shall be smooth, clean and uniform and free from projections
and other defects.
The interior of the fittings shall be free from obstruction which might cause abrasion of cables or which might interfere
with the ready introduction or withdrawal of cables of the maximum size and number
permitted to be enclosed by the conduit.
The inside edges of all openings, through which cables are intended to pass, shall be smoothly rounded in order to
prevent damage to the cable.
The minimum thickness of the Pull Boxes and Circular Boxes shall be 1.5 mm.
All Switch Boxes shall have copper earth block 10 x 10 x 10mm in size with 5 drilled hole and 3 machine screws
tapped for 1 thread per mm.
1.2.5
Conduit termination and fittings
At the end of a run, the conduit/G.I. pipe must terminate in a metal box, galvanised. When a conduit is terminated in a
metal box (circular boxes excepted), a smooth bore brass/PVC bush or ring bush shall be used
along with 2 brass locknuts of the following specifications :
Conduit size
in mm
Locknut
Thickness in
mm
Outside
diameter in mm
No. of threads
19.1
4.36
28.58
25.4
4.76
31.75
Bush
Conduit
size in mm
Outside
Length in
mm
No. of
Threads
diameter in
mm
Length of
smooth bore
at end in mm
1.2.6
19.1
22.22
8.73
1.98
25.4
28.58
10.72
2.78
G.I. pipe in floor
All G.I. Pipes (conduit) shall be installed having a slope of 1:100 towards the floor mounted pull box or cable duct so that
condensate or leakage water drains out easily to the pull box or cable duct. For runs of more
than one conduit in the same floor the direction of slopes of different conduits should be
decided in such a systematic manner as to ensure a uniform drain out of the leakage. All
socket joints shall be made watertight. No U-bend in floor shall be installed. All G.I. pipe and
accessories shall be painted as specified in General Notes, General - Painting for G.I. pipe
below ground.
1.3
Conduit Installation
1.3.1
Cutting of conduits shall be done with a hacksaw in a neat manner without damage to the conduits.
1.3.2
The ends of all conduits of shall be carefully reamed out free from burrs before installation and after threading.
1.3.3
The ends of all conduit entering box, outlet box, cabinet etc. shall be provided with two brass lock nuts and
male/female brass bushing of required size for 31mm dia conduits and larger ones, installed
bushing shall be used.
1.3.4
if bushing are of fully insulated type, an additional lock nut shall be used inside the junction box and cabinet
before installing the bushing.
1.3.5
Conduits entering main distribution feeder pull boxes shall be provided with insulated bushing regardless of
sizes.
1.3.6
Care shall be taken to see that all conduits run from a permanent and continuous ground return back to the
service ground connection point. Conduits used on system which are entirely isolated from
the light and other distribution system shall be electrically continuous and grounded in an
approved manner.
1.3.7
Where conduits terminate at equipment or location where a ground bus is provided, such as main switch boards
(or pull boxes), sub-station transformer vaults etc. grounding bushings shall be provided for
each conduits. such bushing shall be bounded to the ground bus by a 8 SWG dia (Min.) wire.
1.3.8
Conduits exposed or embedded crossing building expansion or construction joints shall be furnished with
approved brass expansion fittings and shall be provided flexible grounding bonds by passing
the fittings.
1.3.9
Wherever exterior underground conduits enter the building through sleeves or openings in walls they shall be
securely and permanently plugged by means of approved sealing compound.
1.3.10
During installation of conduits all unfinished runs and also termination in pull boxes, cabinets etc. shall be
capped in an approved manner. Caps in cabinets etc. shall be left in place until building is
ready for installation of conductor. Paper of wood plugs shall be used for this purposes.
1.3.11
The conduits system shall be self-ventilating type and drainage outlet shall be provided at points in the
installation where condensed moisture might cool, as per standard practice of the electrical
trade.
1.4
Joints
1.4.1
Conduits shall be coupled by means of running threads. Threadless coupling shall not be permitted. All joints
shall be made up tight.
1.4.2
Where it is impossible to turn the conduit in coupling section together a Brick stone type coupling shall be used.
1.4.3
Where conduit is to be embedded in concrete, threads shall be coated prior to coupling or making up with red
leads.
1.5
Wooden Batten Pins, Screws etc.
The batten shall be well seasoned polished teak wood and its thickness shall not be less than 12mm. The width of a batten
shall be sufficient to accommodate all the cables and shall not be less than added diameters of the
cables plus 10mm.
All screws shall be counter-sunk brass wood screw and link clips shall be tinned brass or other non-corrosive metal with
counter-sink holes.
The wood pins shall be of well seasoned teak wood of approved best quality and shall have uniform flat heads and regular
tapered sides.
2.
CABLE WORKS
2.1(a)
Single core cable and conductors
Single core low voltage cables and conductors shall be as per B.S. 6004, or B.S. 6346, or equivalent VDE specifications
of copper conductor and PVC insulated conductors shall have 600/1000 volt grade of PVC insulation
cables. All sizes over 2.5 mm2 shall be stranded. The cable lugs shall be of copper. Flexible cables shall
be as per B.S. 600A unless otherwise specified.
(b)
Multicore cables
Multicore low voltage cables of copper conductor shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed non-armoured direct burial type,
termite proof, made and tested according to VDE 0472/6.65 and VDE 0472/3.69 for this type of
installation, rated voltage being 600/1000V. Cable glands shall be made of brass having screwed
locking system and sizes shall suit the cable glands.
(c)
Subscriber cables (Telephone)
The subscriber cables shall be suitable for laying underground and shall be made according to VDE 0816 of 0.6
sq.mm/0.8 sq.mm (as applicable) copper conductors, with PE (Polythene) insulated and core wrapping.
The cables shall be tested (20oC) at voltage not less than 500V (rms) wire to wire and 2000V (rms)
wire to shield with operating voltage of 150 volts (rms), shall have minimum insulationearch
resistance (tested with min. 100V d.c.) of 5000M. ohm-km, and mutual capacitance of not more than
50mF/km (for 0.6 sq.mm)/50mF/km (for 0.8 sq.mm).
(d)
Installation Cables (Telephone)
The installation cables shall be suitable for exposed or concealed installation, of 0.6 sq.mm copper conductors, with PVC
insulation and PVC sheath star quad formation, basic unit standing and core wrapping. The cables shall
be tested (at 20oC) for voltage not less than 500V (rms) with operating voltage of 200 volts (rms) shall
have minimum insulation resistance (tested with min. 100V d.c.) of 100m ohm-km and mutual
capacitance of not more than 130V mF/km (at 800 Hz).
2.2
Cable in Conduits (G.I/PVC Conduit)
Generally, single core cable (non-sheathed) are to be installed in conduits. The conduit sizes shall be as specified in the
drawings. It shall be ensured that cables are not scratched/damaged during pulling. For long lengths
over 10m, pull boxes shall be used even if not indicated in the drawings. Cable shall not be drawn
round more than two 90o bends (or their equivalent) between drawing-in-boxes, and no single bend
shall be less than 90o. No cable pulling lubricant other than powdered soap stones shall be used and
that after obtaining approval of the Engineer.
2.2.1
Cable bending radii
The internal radius of every bend in a cable shall not be less than the appropriate value stated below:
Insulation
Finish
Overall Diameter
Rubber or PVC
(Circular copper or
circular stranded
conductors)
Non-armoured
Not exceeding 10mm
Exceeding 10mm but

not exceeding 25mm
Exceeding 25mm
Armoured
Any
Armoured or
non-armoured
Any
PVC (solid aluminium

or shaped copper
conductors)
2.2.2
Factor to be applied to
overall diameter of cable
to determining minimum
internal radius of bend
Cable termination and joints
No termination or joints of cables shall be allowed except at switch boxes. Termination of cables upto 2.5mm2 shall be
done by making a hook at the end, and for higher sizes, brass cable terminals shall be used.
Tee-off joints in the cable to lighting point, switches etc. shall not be made. Looping in
system of wiring shall be followed and the joints shall be made in the switch boards only. All
PVC cables shall be terminated using brass cable glands of proper size.
2.2.3
Cables for Batten Wiring
These shall be flat twin core cable as per B.S. 6004 : 1969 of copper conductors, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed of
600/1000V rated voltage and where applicable, with earth continuity conductor.
2.2.3.1 Installation of wires and cables

a)
The maximum number of conductors in any conduit shall be as per drawing conforming with the regulations of
I.E.E. No joints in the conductor will be made throughout the installation and
looping system shall be followed.
b)
The conductor shall be tested for continuity and insulation before energizing and conform to the standard laid
down by the local Engineering Authority and Institution of Electrical Engineer
(England).
c)
Generally, single core cable (non-sheathed) are to be installed in metal conduits. The conduits sizes shall be as
specified in the drawings. It must be ensured that the cables are not damaged during
pulling. For long lengths, pull boxes must be used even if not indicated in the
drawing Cables shall not be drawn round more than two 900 bend between drawingin-boxes and any single bend must not be less than 900
d)
The cable up to 0.0258cm2 shall be solid conductor and therefore, jointing are to be done through porcelain
connector and the connection shall be wound with PIB tape before placing in the
boxes. Termination of cable termination must be used. Tee-off joints in the cable to
light point, switches etc. should not be made Looping in system of wiring is to be
followed for recessed and surface wiring and the joints are to be made in the switch
boards only. Ass 3 to 4 core PVC cable shall be terminated using brass cable glands
of proper size.
2.3
Connection to switches
The phase wire shall be connected to the switches and the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all switch connections.
2.4
Cable colour
Cables used shall have colour as stated below :

Two wire single phase a.c. system
Red, white or blue for phase line or switch wire, black for neutral and green for earth when flexible cords are used.
Three wire two phase a.c. system
Red for one phase.
Black for common return.
White for other phase.
Three or four wire three phase a.c. system
Red for first phase
White for second phase
Blue for third phase
Black for neutral
Two wire d.c. system
Red for positive or switch wire
Black for negative.
For two wire final sub-circuits, whether a.c. or d.c. supplying lighting or power circuits, the neutral or "middle" wire shall
always be black, and the phase or outer wire (no matter which phase it is connected to) shall always be
red. For lighting, the red wire shall always feed the switch, and a red wire shall always be used from
the switch to the light.
2.5
Filled-in Trenches for laying cables
The size of cable trench shall be minimum 915mm in depth and 457mm in width for each cable to be laid. Where more
than one cable is to be laid, the width is to be increased by 152mm for each extra cable. Trench
digging shall not commence until all cables are procured and brought to site store.
Excavation of trench bed may require shuttering and shoring of trench sides, bailing out water, and the trench bed shall be
dressed, cleaned and levelled. This shall be followed by 152mm thick cushioning by sand of min. F.M.
1.0 in the bed over which the cables will be laid. After laying of cables first class bricks shall be placed
as separators between the cables. Thereafter sand filling shall be done with sand of F.M. 1.0 upto
152mm over the top of the largest cable in the trench after which two layers of flat brick is to be placed
along the length and breadth of the trench as a mechanical protection against injury and as a signal that
a power cable is laid under the bricks.
No covering of cable trenches shall however be done before inspection and approval by the Engineer. If the Engineer
notices any damage to the cable or any other fault which requires remedy or replacement of the cable
the Contractor shall do the needful promptly at his own cost.
The rest of the trench shall be filled with earth, watered and rammed in 152mm layers. After installation of the cables,
original ground conditions are to be restored, be it brick pavement, drains, concrete road or any other
construction. All costs involved in mending good of the damages shall be fully borne by the
Contractor.
The Cables are to be placed in trenches with slight curve so that it can give way when the earth settles later on.
Cables shall be laid into or out of the ground through PVC/RCC/G.I. Pipe of appropriate size decided by the Engineer.
The length of the pipe over the ground shall be 1.2m.
The cable route should be as direct as possible and must receive Engineer's approval before excavation.
All cable runs shall be kept at least 610mm clear of gas, sewer, water and other services pipes in horizontal plane. Where
necessary the cable run shall be re-routed to maintain the specified gap.
Trenches for H.T. Cables shall be maintained at a minimum 610mm clear distance from an adjacent L.T. cable trench.
All cable bends shall have a radius of not less than 24 times the overall diameter of the cable for armoured cables, and 20
times the diameter for non-armoured cables. But the radius shall not be less than twice the diameter of
the cable drum in any case.
Great care shall be exercised to avoid damage during handling of the cables and to prevent formation of "Kinks". The
cable drums shall preferably be conveyed on wheeled cable-drum carriers and unrolled and laid
directly from the drum carrier along the trench over rollers of approved construction. Carriage by
trailers or trucks can be allowed if proper care is taken during unloading the drums and unrolling is
done after placing the drum on jacks and spindles. Dragging the cables over the surface of earth along
the trench shall not be allowed. The cables should be carried and unrolled in the direction indicated on
the drums by the manufacturers.
The cables shall be terminated at required locations and as directed by the Engineer.
152mm dia G.I. pipe (or other size approved by the Engineer for L.T. cables) shall be provided for all road and drain
crossings. These pipes shall be laid direct in the ground without any sand bed, sand layer, brick, or
cable covers.
When trenches are left open overnight and where road is to be cut, the Contractor shall exhibit suitable danger signals
such as banners, red flags and red lamps at his own cost. Temporary arrangement by placing wooden
sleepers/sheet steel etc. across the road cutting for vehicular traffic are also to be made by the
Contractor at his own cost. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any accident which may
occur due to his negligence.
G.I. pipes of appropriate size and length shall be used to protect the cable from all sorts of mechanical injury, every time
it climbs up/down the pole/steel structure. Cable terminals of appropriate type, size and capacity shall
be used every time outdoor termination of cable is followed/preceded by bare overhead lines/Busbars/Terminals etc.
All surplus earth shall be removed to the indicated places by the Contractor at his own cost.
Any damage done by the Contractor to any other agencies during or as a result of cable laying operations shall be made
good by the Contractor.
2.6.
Cable in G.I. or R.C pipes in Road and Drain crossing
G.I. pipes/R.C. pipes whatever is applicable and as directed by the Engineer shall be provided for all road and drain
crossing. These pipes shall be laid direct in the ground without any sand bed, sand layer, brick or cable
covers.
Cables shall laid out of or laid into the ground through G.I. pipe of suitable size as decided by the Engineer. The length of
the pipes over the ground shall not be less than 1.2m and no extra cost shall be paid for such pipes. The
exposed end of the pipes shall be sealed using PVC or wooden plugs.
2.7.
Cable works
2.7.1
Cable Boxes
2.7.1.1 All types of cable and boxes shall be of cast iron and shall comply with latest Bangladesh Government
Specification and as per drawing. All other accessories shall be approved type and
design and shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.7.1.2 The excavation shall be 1.06M deep and 0.46M wide. The bed surface shall be free from any point sharp
materials, Breadth of the trench shall be increased by 0.61M on a joint point.
2.8
Crossing road, pavement, culvert etc.
In crossing road or pavement, a hume pipe of suitable size shall be provided in the trench shall be covered with pre-cast
slabs or blocks of sufficient strength to withstand the load over them.
2.9
Joint Cable
2.9.1
While laying the cable it shall be so arranged that cables to be jointed overlap each other by about 0.46M to
provide ample length for jointing. Metal serving and armouring shall be removed from both
cable to conform to the dimension of the box. The lead sheath (if there by any) is than to be
cut off from both cables to box dimension. The belt paper shall be removed to within 25mm
of the lead sheathing at each and exposing the insulated core. The insulation shall be removed
to the required length. All points shall be sweathed, wiped clean and properly insulated.
2.9.2
At least 25mm clearance shall be allowed between the center of each pair or joints. A wad of impregnated tape
shall be provided between each core and in tee joints, the armouring shall be properly bound
and the box shall be replaced in the filling holes. Necessary tapping up shall be carried out
after the compound has cooled.
2.9.3
Cables are to be terminated with the cable glands or end box as the case may be with the cable lugs of
appropriate size and ratings.
3.
2.9.4
Markers shall be provided along the cable routes at each turning point of the trench.
2.9.5
Markers shall be made of 3.125mm thick M.S. sheet welded to M.S. angle as shown in the
drawing or shall be made of cast iron.
FEEDERS, LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE CIRCUITRY

3.1.
Sizing and other pertinent data regarding main feeders, sub-feeders, branch feeders, operation at 600
Volts or less and any branch circuitry protected by different ratings, circuit breakers are fully
delineated on the plans. All such feeders and circuitry shall be provided in accordance with the
indication on the plan and shall be connected for correct phase sequence and proper operation of the
equipment served.
3.2. Each individual lap off a feeders which is called with multiple cables per phase shall be arranged so that all of the
feeders are connected to the corresponding phase leg of the individual tap.
3.3.
General circuitry operating at less than 600 Volts. and called for or indicated without specific details as to sizing
etc., shall be understood to be lighting or less.
3.4.
Where lighting and appliance outlets are shown on the drawings without fully delineated circuitry such shall be
3.5.
All lighting and appliance branch circuitry protected as 20 amp. or less shall be performed in accordance with
the following ground rules unless there are specific indications to the contrary.
3.6.
Unless otherwise noted minimum conductor size shall be No. 16 SWG dia copper.
3.7.
Conductors for circuitry operating in the range of 230 to 250 Volts. to neutral and extending in excess of 61M
from the point of supply to the last outlet or fixture tap, shall be No. 10 SWG dia copper throughout.
3.8.
Raceway sizes shall be adequate for the number of conductors contained as required by code.
3.9.
Unless otherwise noted, circuitry shall be multi-wise utilizing common neutrals arranged so that no neutral
conductor acts as common wire more than one circuit conductor connected to the same phase leg of the
supply system.
3.10.
Circuit shall be balanced on phases at supply point as evenly as possible.
3.11.
Except as hereinafter differently specified standard type of metallic outlet box shall be provided for each and
every wiring device, lighting fixtures etc.
3.12.
Where more than one switch is shown on the plans or a single location their switches shall be gang-mounted to a
single suitable outlet box.
3.13.
A switch and receptacle shall not be gang-mounted in a single outlet box unless the plans specifically indicate
such a communication.
3.14
Where buried-in-outlet boxes are required by code authorities to separate wiring devices wired off different
phase legs of the supply system, to separate wiring of different voltage system or for other reasons,
such barriers shall be provided at no additional cost.
3.15.
Under no condition shall any switch break any neutral conductor.
3.16.
Outlet boxes for switches shall be located at the strike side of doors, door swing indicated on plans are subject to
field change. Outlet boxes for switches shall be located on the basis of the final door swing
arrangement.
3.17.
Unless made accessibly by other means, boxes for recessed ceiling fixture be mounted near to the ceiling fixture.
3.18.
Final connection from outlet boxes to recessed ceiling fixtures shall be means of suitable flexible fixtures
pigtails not less than 1.22M and not more than 1.83M long. In all cases enough slack shall be left in
pig-tails to permit removal of fixtures from ceiling for inspection with disconnection.
3.19.
Where the specifications for drawing indicates no specific requirements as to the loading or connections of
outlets in lighting and appliance branch circuit, the following maximum limitations shall be follows :
No more that 12 outlets of 1650 watts shall be applied to any single 10 amps circuit and no more than 24 outlets of 400
total watts to any single 20 amps circuit in the range of 230 to 250 volt to neutral.
3.20.
At any location where lighting and appliance branch circuitry is provided extending from a flush mounted panel
board to a suspended ceiling immediately above, at least 4 (four) 25mm empty conduit shall be
provided (in addition those required for active circuitry) to permit future wiring
3.21.
4.
Emergency wiring shall be run in a completely separate raceway conduit system containing no wires of "
Normal" lighting and appliance.
EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR WORKS
The Conductor shall be electrolytic copper of 100% conductivity at 20oC (68o F) (International Annealed Copper
standard) with weight resistivity of 0.15328 ohm-gram per sq.m. at 20oC (68o F) and density of 8,890 kg/m3 for
meeting the requirements of B.S. 636 : 1969 or its metric adoption.
The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall run in accordance with the drawings and direction, and all metal
fittings shall be earthed with earth continuity conductors. All the earth continuity conductors from the various
circuits, sockets, etc. shall be connected to the earthing block located near the DB/SDB. The earth continuity
conductors shall be of sizes as stated in the drawings. All DB/SDB/SB shall be interconnected with earth
continuity conductors. The earth continuity conductors shall be drawn along with the cables and no joint shall be
allowed from earthing block to the respective earth point. Light and fan points, excepts where indicated otherwise, shall not be earthed.
5.
LIGHT FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
The light fittings shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with the relevant requirements of applicable B.S.
including B.S. 4533.
The chokes, if applicable, shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 2818, and shall be Thorn, or of equivalent
quality and shall have appropriate power factor correction capacitor (250V 3.5MF for 20W and 40W tubes,
5MF for 65W tubes, and 7MF for 80W tubes if used with Thorn chokes : for other chokes of approved best
quality, the improved p.f. shall not be less than 0.90).
The starters for fluorescent lights shall be 91W lamp type and shall have built in radio interference suppressor capacitor.
All incandescent light fittings, except where specifically stated other wise, shall have un-switched brass holders for BS
22/25/26 lamp caps complying with B.S. 52 : 1963.
Fixtures near combustible materials shall be so constructed or installed, or equipped with shades or guards that
combustible materials shall not be subjected to temperature in excess of 90oc.
Appropriate samples of light fittings with chokes and starters shall be submitted prior to installation.
The light fittings shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fittings layout drawings.
All pendant fittings shall be supported from brass ceiling base plate with at least 9.52mm screw-hub.
The location of outlets shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent
upon the Contractor, before installation of outlet boxes, to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise
information from the architectural schedule, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms
and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that any outlets may be relocated at a
distance not exceeding 4.57m from the location shown in the drawings. In centering outlets, due allowance shall
be made for overhead piping ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furring, plastering etc. as
erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale drawings. Outlets incorrectly located shall be properly
relocated at the Contractor's own cost.
6.
FANS
Materials, assembly and performance shall conform to BSTI standard. Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to
installation of the fans and fan clamps.
6.1
Fan Hook
The U-type fan hook shall be made of 15.87mm dia mild steel rod as per drawings.
6.2
Ceiling Fan
Ceiling fans shall be of capacitor type, A.C. 240V, single phase 50 Hz, complete with suspension rod of required length,
canopy and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable B.S.
The ceiling fan shall be of "Brand and Make" shown in schedule of Items.
6.3
Wall Mounted/Pedestal/Exhaust Fan
The Wall Mounted/Pedestal/Exhaust Fan shall be as per schedule and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable
B.S.
The fan hook shall be provided during slab casting as per schedule. The fan hook shall be secured in place during the
casting.
The fan shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fan layout drawings. Circular box with ceiling rose for fan
outlet shall be at the centre of the clamps, as detailed in the drawings.
Fans shall have the following installation height except where indicated otherwise :
Ceiling fan bottom
2.58m from the floor
Exhaust fans
(top edge of fan i/c cover)
Wall fan blade end
7.
7.1
:
:
As close to ceiling as possible

2.58m from the floor.
DISTRIBUTION BOARD/SUB-DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DB/SDB Boxes
The DB/SDB boxes shall be as per schedule and shall be safety dead front fixed type having circuit breakers and shall be
designed for operation on a 240/415V, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire system. The panels shall have the phases
clearly marked and where required shall have solid neutral buses. The panels shall be constructed with
16 SWG mild steel sheets as per schedule and shall comply with relevant requirements of applicable
B.S. including: B.S. 4649, where applicable with standard concentric knockout of required size all
around. The Boards shall be painted as per General Notes, General, Painting. The colour of paint shall
be as decided by the Engineer. The panels shall be mounted directly on frames. The door is to be
provided with flush lock and handle. All doors are to be keyed alike. All hinges shall be concealed.
7.2
Bus-Bar
Bus-Bar shall be of the laminated type, constructed of hard rolled copper each part being finished fitted and bolted
together using electroplated steel bolts for assembling. Bus-Bars shall be constructed on the basis of
1.24 Amp per sq.m. cross section metal bars which shall have same width as outside lugs.
O
Spacing
The minimum distance bars, metal parts, bus-bar, etc. shall not be less than what is specified below :
7.3
Opposite polarity where mounted
Opposite polarity where
in the same surface
held free in air
Not over 250V 31.75mm
19.05mm
Not over 600V 50.80mm
25.40mm
Live parts to ground
12.7mm
Conductors and bus-bars shall be located as to be free from physical damage and shall be held firmly in place.
The arrangement of bus-bars and conductors shall be such as to avoid overheating due to inductive
effects.
The Board shall be installed in accordance with applicable layout drawings. Minimum height to bottom of the Boards
from the floor level shall be 610mm maximum height of any circuit breaker/switch shall be 1.83m
from the floor level.
The location of DB/SDB shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be
incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of DB/SDB to study all pertinent drawings and
obtain precise information from the architectural schedule, scale drawings large scale and full size
details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that
DB/SDB may be located at a distance not exceeding 40cm from the location shown on the drawings. In
centering DB/SDB due allowance shall be made for piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in
thickness of furring, plastering etc. as erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale
drawings, DB/SDB located incorrectly shall be properly relocated at Contractor's own cost.
7.4
Meter Board
All meters and cut outs are of ratings given in schedule fixed in 16 SWG sheet steel box with locking arrangement The
box must be hammer painted. The materials shall be submitted to the Authority/Engineer..
8.
CEILING ROSE
The ceiling rose shall be moulded plastic of approved best quality.

Wherever the ceiling rose shall be used it shall be installed as near as possible to the fittings. For ceiling fans, these
shall be installed at the centre of the hook.
9.
MCB/MCCB
The MCB/MCCB shall be quick-make, quick-break type, and shall have inverse time limit characteristics with
instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on overloads over the normal operating range. All circuit
breakers shall be 'trip-free'. Ratings and frame sizes of breakers shall be in accordance with schedule. All lugs
must be of the solderless mechanical type. The MCB must comply with B.S. 3871 : Part-1 (1965) category M4
(5A-60A). Rated voltage 240/415V A.C. 50 Hz, interrupting capacity 4000 amp, capable of providing overload
and short circuit protection, through thermal magnetic trip actions respectively : temperature rating, 40oC
tropicalized (moisture-fungus corrosion treated), with contacts of silver alloy : terminal capability upto 70 mm2
wire.
The breakers shall be designed manufactured and tested in accordance with B.S. 3871 part-2 or equivalent having the
following short circuit rating with overload and short circuit protection with thermal and magnetic tripping
action and temperature rating 40o C, tropicalized (moisture fungus corrosion treated) termination capability upto
the requirement :
5A
to
60A
5A
4KA
SYM at 230V A.C.
5KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
TP
10KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
TP
10A
80A
SP
to
to
70A
100A
TP
14KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
200A
to
300A
TP
30KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
400A
to
500A
TP
42KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
600A
to
1200A TP
85KA
SYM at 480V A.C.
10. SWITCH WORKS

The flushed snap plate/grid switches shall be vertical single pole (1-way/2-way) 5A A.C. architrave rocker operated
switches white in colour, to B.S. 3676: 1963, complying with the test requirements for inductive, fluorescent or
resistive loads specified, and satisfy the best requirements for three types in fluorescent lamp circuit, upto the
ratings of these switches as set out in B.S. 3676 amendment 3, 1969. The switches shall have minimum
clearance of 3mm between the contacts, and a similar minimum creepage distance. Flush dimmer switch/Fan
speed controller white in colour to BS5518: 1977 & BS800 : 1977 or relevant IEC standard complying with test
requirement for induction or resistive load specified. All contacts shall be faced with pure silver/silver-cadmium
oxide alloy. The switch operating member shall pivot independently of the rocker, making the speed of `make
and break' independent of the speed at which the rocker is operated. Terminal capability : minimum 2 x 2.5 mm2
conductors for each. Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to installation of switches.
Switches shall be installed on switch board or otherwise as per drawings.
11. SWITCH BOARD/DIMMER/FAN SPEED CONTROLLER BOARD WORKS
Switch boards and/or fan dimmer boards shall be as per schedule and shall have plate switches and/or fan dimmer.
Switch boards shall have copper earthing block of appropriate size.
The switch boards and fan dimmer boards shall be installed on wall at a height of 1372mm from the floor if not specified
otherwise, and at locations shown in applicable layout drawings.
The phase wire shall be connected to the switches and the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all switch connections. The
earth continuity conductor (ECC) shall be connected to the earth point inside the switch board. The approved
size galvanised steel boxes shall be installed at the time of construction of the wall to avoid chasing in wall.
The location of board shown in diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be
incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of switch board/regulator board boxes,to study all pertinent
drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedules, scale drawings, large scale and full
size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that any outlet
may be relocated at a distance not exceeding 4.5M from the location shown in the drawings. In earthing outlets,
due allowance shall be made for piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furing,
plastering, etc. as erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale drawings. Switch boards, and other
boards located incorrectly shall be properly relocated at Contractor's own cost.
12.
EBONITE/ACRYLIC/FORMICA SHEET
(i)
Ebonite Sheet
Paper impregnated and press fitted soacked with insulating oil from the Ebonite sheet to be used for switch board,
DB/SDB cover. It is a Electrical insulating material and have heat insistent quality. Available in market
in Down, Deep brown and bitter chokolate colour leaving different thickness. For switch board 3mm
thick sheet will serve the purpose.
(ii)
Acrylic Sheet
Polyvinyl base plastic sheet is available in market in trade name of Acrylic sheet. It can also be used for switch board
cover. It is got no insulating on heat resisting quality but available in different thickness and different
colour. For switch board 3mm thick sheet with same the purpose and beauty.
(iii)
Formica Sheet
The Formica sheet shall be 3mm thick of approved colour shall be installed on switch board on otherwise mentioned. It
has got heat resisting quality.
13.
SWITCH SOCKET - OUTLETS (ROUND PIN)
All switch socket outlets, except the shaver sockets, shall be round pin type, white in colour, conforming to B.S.
5733:1979 or relevant IEC Standard. All mouldings shall be made from aminoplastic urea moulding powers to
B.S. 1322: 1950 and shall possess high scratch resisting qualities. These shall be supplied with counter sunk
cadmium plate fixing screws and mounted in 18 SWG galvanised sheet steel shall be painted as per General
Notes, General, -Painting, having brass earth point as per drawings and direction.
The socket/MCB/MCCB shall be installed on wall with lower end of the face plates at height and locations shown in
applicable layout drawings.
The fixing of the units on the outlets boxes shall be by means of flat head cadmium plated screws. The flat head of the
screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the cover. The mounting heights of the
outlets shall be as shown in the drawings. The earth wire shall be connected to earth point of the boxes of the 3rd
pole of the 3-pin sockets, 2-pin socket outlets are for television, shavers, calculator etc.
14.
CALLING BELL
Electrical calling bell should be of Bugger on Ding Dong sound type. The working voltage of the bell coil will be
240V A.C. The body of the Bell should be of plastic on Acrylic. Separate Board of plastic sheet with brass holder
and 40W Electric bell would be used in service with the Bell. Separate calling Bell push are to be used on board
as per drawing.
15. EARTHING DEVICE

(i)
Earth electrode
The pipe earthing electrode shall be buried below ground level, as per schedule by tube-well sinking method. The
earthing lead from the DB to the main earthing electrode shall be installed in G.I. pipe of specified
diameter. The terminal connected to the earthing electrode shall use a copper clamp of
203x38x6.35mm size for making the connection.
a)
Pipe Electrode (where applicable)
The earthing inspection pit shall be constructed as per schedule and direction. The pit shall have well formed regular
sides. Curing for the R.C, shall be for 4 weeks, and for C.C., brick work and plaster shall be 2
weeks.
(ii)
Earthing Lead
Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor as per schedule. All terminal lugs shall be of solderless mechanical type
of tinned copper and nut-bolts of brass.
The earthing leads from the earth electrode shall be connected to the brass bar of test point. A double run of specified
tinned copper conductor shall be brought out as earth lead for the earth electrode through G.I. pipe
from the electrode and connected to the brass bar. There shall no joint in the copper earth lead. All
earthing lead shall follow the shortest and most direct route to earth electrodes and sharp bends and
joints shall be avoided. The earthing leads shall be connected to the earth electrode as per drawings.
The joints shall be made mechanically strong and electrically continuous with minimum of resistance.
Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor as per specification given in Art 2.03a. All terminal lugs shall be of
copper and nut-bolts of brass.
(iii)
Earthing Block
The earthing block shall be of solid electrolytic copper, cast and machined, of size as per schedule having at least 10mm
dia drilled, holes for accommodating the terminals of the earth continuity conductor. Requisite number
of brass nuts and bolts shall also be provided.
(iv)
Earth Inspection Pit
Bricks used shall be 1st class. Only approved best quality cement shall be used. Jhama brick khoa for R.C.C. cover shall
be 25mm down graded (upto 6mm) and shall be washed clean before casting, 8mm dia M.S. rod @
25mm c/c, with two 9.5mm dia, M.S. hook (of 50mm diameter) shall be provided in the cover slab.
(v)
Earth Loop Resistance
The maximum earth loop resistance from any point in the installation including earthing lead to the earthing electrode
shall not exceed the resistance specified in the schedule, or that indicated by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall ensure that the leads are efficiently bonded to all metal works other than the current
carrying parts, so that the above resistance level is not exceeded. It will be the duty of the Contractor to
provide earth tester for test of installation in presence of the authorised representative of the Engineer,
and submit earth test report to the Engineer for approval.
16. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
16.1
Air-Terminals
Air-terminals shall be of copper of grade required for commercial electrical work, generally designated as being of 98
percent conductivity when annealed. The size and shape of the air-terminal shall be as per drawings
and schedule.
Air-terminals shall be clamped with the building as per drawings and in manner that there is no possibility of overturning.
Where necessary, additional braces, permanently and rigidly attached with the building, shall be used.
On mortar and brick work, all holes shall be made with proper tools, such as a Rawl bits, and shall be
made in brick rather than in the mortar joint.
All air-terminals shall be installed in a manner to bring the tip not less than 300mm above the object to be protected.
16.2
Roof Conductor
Roof conductors shall be made of copper of grade as specified in Art. 12.

Roof conductors shall be continuous and without any joint between terminations. All terminations shall be permanent,
both electrically and mechanically. Where jointing in a conductor is absolutely unavoidable it shall be
made after express consent of the Engineer. The joint shall be mechanically strong and well made and
provide adequate electrical conductivity, which shall be secured by a contact area not less than double
the conducting cross-sectional area of the conductor.
conductor runs shall preserve a downward or horizontal course.

The conductor shall be securely attached to the building by means of fasteners at intervals not exceeding 1.2m, and shall
be embedded under roof finish or concealed in plaster. Fasteners shall have cross section not less than
14 SWG and shall be made of copper.
16.3
Down Conductor
The down conductor shall be continuous and shall be installed as indicated in the schedule.
16.4
Test Point
The test point shall be made as per schedule and drawings. The brass bar assembly shall be well-formed and shall be
without filling. The conductor terminals shall be provided with tinned copper lugs of size as detailed in
the drawings.
The test point shall be installed during construction of the building wall and made flush with the outside walls finish.
Copper lugs shall be press-fitted with the conductor terminals with crimping tools, or shall use cast brass lug-block with
brass nuts. The lug shall be bolted with the brass-bar by means of brass nuts and bolts.
17.
Danger Plate
17.1.
The danger plate shall be displayed in each pole with red pattering on white back ground. The lettering shall be
in English and Bengali stating " DANGER", "CAUTION" and " PRESSURE".
17.2.
The size of the plate will be 250mm x 150mm x 3.175mm of M.S. plate and the size of letter will be 38mm in
height.
17.3.
Non - Climbing Device
17.4
Non - climbing device of flat iron bar welded with ring from spike as per drawing shall be in each pole.
17.5.
Barbed wire device may also be used covering 50mm space of the pole as per direction of the EMPLOYER/
CONSULTANT.
18.
Guard Wires
18.1
Safety device, cradle guards or other approved method shall be provided in crossing of the aerial line
against the possibility of coming into contract with each other and so that no broken wire can fall dead.
The guard wires or the cradle shall be of the size so that it can carry the weight of the broken line and
withstand the mechanical pressure of the fallen wires.
______________________________
SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER
Technical Specification
Works, Page No. 1
SPECIFICATION OF WORKS
A. CIVIL WORKS
1.
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCH INCLUDING REFILL

The item shall include earthwork in all kinds of soil including slushy soil; stabilising the sides of excavation by
shuttering, shoring, waling, bracing etc. and all dewatering works necessary to keep the excavation dry, the
stabilising and dewatering work being continued till the concrete and/or masonry work within the excavation is
completed.
The item shall also include removal of Temporary Works from out of the excavation and refilling the
excavation (Payable under separate item) after the concrete and/or masonry work within the excavation is
completed, the materials for refilling being such portion of spoils of excavation as are suitable and approved by
the Architect supplemented if necessary, by local sand of minimum F.M. 0.70 or by imported earth. If local
sand or imported earth is used for refill it will be payable under a separate item.
The item shall also include the work of conveyance of surplus spoils of excavation upto a distance of 153M.
measured from the outline of the building and depositing them in uniform layers in the low-lying areas
surrounding the building.
Earthwork in excavation shall not be commenced before the pillars marking the centre lines and Bench Marks
bearing known levels are checked by the Consultant.
Extreme care shall be taken that the bottom level of the excavation never lower than that required by the
Drawings. 5mm depth shall be saved during the mass work; this 50mm material shall be removed and final
beds shall be exposed not more than 12 hours before being topped by masonry/concrete work.
If the Contractor over-excavates in depth beyond the required level, the excess depth shall be refilled by 1:5:7
concrete at Contractor's own cost.
All loose materials and residue of foreign materials shall be removed before masonry work or concrete casting
is commenced.
In any precious material or any object of archaeological interest is discovered during the excavation, attention
of the Employer shall be drawn to it.
Works, Page No. 2
In case any utility line is found to lie in or traverse the soil included in the excavation, the lines shall be
protected from injuries or damages due to strikes from excavation tools or due to loss of continuous support.
Attention of the Employer shall be drawn to the presence of utility lines and measures shall be taken by the
Contractor, without additional cost to the Employer, to support them till all works below ground are completed.
2.
PILE WORK
2.1
Description
This work shall consist of construction of reinforced concrete cast-in-situ bored vertical or inclined
piles for abtitments/pier(s) of structures at different locations in accordance with the details shows on
the drawings and to the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall undertake at the
actual location of such piles foundations, sub-soil investigations in accordance with these
specifications prior to start of the work of pile foundation.
The prevailing soil conditions indicate that no permanent steel easing is required. However, if the
method of pilling chosen by the Contractor requires permanent steel casing, this shall be executed as
described below at Contractor's own cost. No additional payment shall be made for this.
The pile boring shall be, carried out using a temporary steel casing bored to the pile toe or to a level
approved by the Engineer. The temporary easing shall be withdrawn.
Under certain circumstances the Contractor may be permitted to bore all or part of tile pile without
easing under water or using drilling fluid to stabilise the borehole as referred to in this section below.
The piles shall be concreted and reinforced to resist pile loads and Horizontal forces on the pile caps
according to the Drawings and these Specifications.
2.2.
Materials
2.2.1
Steel Casing
This part of the Specification deals with the permanent steel casing. For steel easing used
during the boring of the pile see section below.
The steel of the easing shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications M 183-79
(ASTM A36) or equivalent.
Works, Page No. 3
The minimum wall thickness of the permanent steel easing shall be 10mm. The minimum
length shall be from 10 cm above the bottom of the pile cap to 5 metre under the river bed or
into firm strata. If the permanent easing is used in the boring operation or if the handling and
transport require a greater thickness to avoid deformation or buckling, the increased wall
thickness shall he provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The steel easing shall be furnished in appropriate lengths and the joints shall be approved by
the Engineer.
The easing shall be handled and stored in a in a manner that shall prevent buckling and other
deformation as well as accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When placed in the work it shall
be free front dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill scale and loose or thick rust.
The outside surface of the permanent easing of piles of piers shall receive two coats of anticorrosion bitumen type paint for a maximum depth of 125mm from the underside of the pile
cap. The paint shall be approved by the Engineer and its application shall follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
2.2.2
Concrete
The concrete shall conform to Section of these Specifications. Cement type 1 shall be used
and the characteristic cylinder strength shall not be less than 25 N/mm2. Concrete placed
under water or drilling mud by tremie shall have a cement of not less than 350 kg/ m3.
The density and consistency of the concrete shall be conform to the tremie casting method
and the maintenance of sufficient workability (slump) of the concrete during the casting,
including reasonably calculated delays, shall be secured by a approved design mix.
(including the necessary retarders and plasticisers), which is tested by trial mixes prior to the
pile construction.
All relevant concrete properties such as slump, time of setting, temperature and strength shall
be measured and defined during the trail mixes.
2.2.3
Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be complied with if bentonite mud is sued to stabilize the
boreholes:
(a)
Supply
Works, Page No. 4
A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer of the

bentonite powder, showing the properties of the consignment delivered to the site.
This certificate shall be made available to the Engineer at least 4 weeks prior to its'
use. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range
(in centipoise) and the gel strength range for solids in water.
Any other material for the drilling fluid shall be approved by the Engineer.
(b)
Mixing
Bentonite and any other materials shall be mixed thoroughly with clean water to
make a suspension which shall maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the
period necessary to place concrete and complete the construction thereof.
Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions

shall be taken to modify the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitable in all
respects for the construction of piles.
(c)
Tests
The frequency of testing the drilling fluid and the method and procedure of
sampling shall be determined by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the
work. The frequency may subsequently vary depending on the consistency of the
results obtained. the control tests shall cover the determination of density, viscosity,
gel strength and pH values.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and experienced operators required to
carry out tests on the drilling mud. No additional payment shall be made for these
tests which shall be considered as an essential part of the drilling operations.
2.2.4
Length of piles
The basic length of pile and its diameter is shown on drawings. The final length shall be
decided by the Engineer on the basis of the results of initial load test on piles and on the basis
of actually boring data observed oil site. Test piles shall be installed as directed by the
Engineer at selected locations at each bridge site.
Works, Page No. 5
2.2.5
Method
2.2.6.
General
Pile type and construction methods shall ascertain that the pile shaft shall not be weakened
by contamination of the concrete by sectional reduction, by washing out of cement, by
breaking, pulling of temporary casings or in any other way, including the construction of
neighboring piles.
a)
Assumed Procedure
The following construction procedure has been assumed in the tender design. Final
construction procedure shall be as approved by the Engineer prior to the start of the
piling operations.
i)
Place permanent steel casing, if required, in position and embed casing toe
into river bed or firm strata. If no permanent steel casing is specified a
sufficient length of temporary steel casing shall be used to stabilise the
upper part of the borehole.
ii)
Bore and excavate inside the steel casing down to casing to level, or an
approved level, continue excavation to final pile tip level using either
temporary casing under - water or approved drilling mud. Water level
inside casings shall at all times be at least 50mm higher than outside the
casings.
iii)
All mud and/or sedimentation shall be carefully cleaned from the bottom
of borehole.
iv)
Place reinforcement cage, inspection pipes etc.
v)
Place under water concrete or drilling fluid continuously by use of the

tremie method.
vi)
Withdraw the temporary boring casing concurrently with concreting to the

instructed level.
vii)
After hardening, the top section of the concrete pile shall be removed to
reach sound concrete.
Works, Page No. 6
b)
Approval of Construction Method
In the tender, the Contractor shall describe the construction method he proposes,
including information on boring equipment, materials, methods of work, control of
quality and bearing capacity and, if any, the name of the Sub-contractor. The
Contractor shall submit references from similar jobs carried out by him or by his
Sub-contractor.
During contract negotiations tile Contractor shall submit all requested

supplementary detailed information in writing.
After the Contract has been awarded to the Contractor, he shall prepare a detailed
programme and a establish a procedure for the pile construction in accordance with
the above information for the Engineer approval.
The detailed programme shall contain all information on materials, equipment,

methods of work etc.
The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
pile construction.
No boring equipment or materials shall be imported before the Contractor has

received the Engineer's approval in writing.
2.2.7
Setting Out Piles
The Contractor shall verify the easing position for each pile during and immediately after
placing tile casing and submit the final location for the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.8
Diameter of Piles
The diameter of a pile shall be not less than the specified diameter.
2.2.9
Tolerances
Works, Page No. 7
The centre of the completed pile at the cut off level shall not deviate more than 10 cm from
the theoretically correct position shown on the drawings. The inclination of the vertical pile
shall not deviate more than 1% from vertical. The Contractor shall provide suitable
equipment such as an inverted pendulum, to cheek the verticality of the boreholes during
drilling and prior to the concreting.
2.2.10. Boring
a)
Method of excavation shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the

Engineer. Water or air jetting for boring of the piles shall not be allowed.
b)
Boring Near Recently Cast Piles
Piles shall not be bored close to recently casted piles which contain non-hardened
concrete. Boring and excavation for a pile shall not be commenced until 24 hours
after completion of any pile within a radius of 6.0M.
c)
Temporary Casing
Temporary casing of approved best quality or an approved alternative method shall

be used to maintain the stability of pile excavations which might otherwise
collapse.
Temporary casing shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform
cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be
free from internal projections aid encrusted concrete which might prevent the
proper formation of piles.
d)
Stability of Pile Excavation Using Drilling Fluid.
Where a borehole is formed without casing under water or using drilling fluid for
maintaining the stability of a boring, the level of the water or fluid in the excavation
shall be maintained so that water fluid pressure always exceeds the pressure exerted
by the soils and external ground water. The water or fluid level shall be maintained
at a level not less than 2M. above the level of the river water level or any artisan
pressure level.
Works, Page No. 8
In the event of a rapid loss of water or bentonite suspension from the pile
excavation, the excavation shall be backfield without delay aid the instructions of
the Engineer shall be obtained before excavation at that location is resumed.
e)
Disposal of Excavated Material
No excavated material shall be dumped into the river or any connecting. Excavated
material shall be removed from site and dumped at an approved location. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for costs involved in removing the excavated
material to spoil.
f)
Pumping from borehols
Pumping from a borehole shall not be permitted unless a easing has been placed
into a stable stratum which prevents the flow of water from other strata in
significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping will
not have a detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property.
g)
Obstructions
Where boulders or other obstructions render it impossible to bore the pile,

excavation operations inside pile easing to remove obstructions shall be carried out
as directed by the Engineer. The removal of these obstructions is deemed to be
covered in the contract price.
h)
Unexpected Ground Conditions
The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer, any circumstances which
indicates that, in the Contractor's opinion, the ground conditions differ from those
expected by him from his interpretation of the site investigation reports and his
subsoil investigations.
i)
Boring Records
During the boring of the pile the Contractor shall compile a boring log indicating
depths and types of the various soil layers encountered. Disturbed samples sisal be
submitted to the Engineer if requested.
Works, Page No. 9
The Contractor shall take provisions for carrying out sampling and tests to check
soil strengths. The cost of the sampling and testing shall be included in the contract
rates.
j)
Final Pile Toe Level
The final pile toe level shall be as indicated on the Drawing or as instructed by the
Engineer after due consideration of the Contractor's proposals, boring logs and test
results.
k)
Inspection and Cleaning Bottom of Excavation
The time between final excavation and bottom cleaning and the start of concreting
shall he reduced as much as possible and shall not exceed 6 hours. To achieve this,
the final 2M of excavation shall not start until all preparations for cleaning,
reinforcing and concreting are finalized. In case of unexpected delay the Contractor
shall dump sand or gravel in the borehole till 2M above toe level.
Immediately after excavation the bottom of the bore hole shall be carefully cleaned
of mud and sedimentation and other soft material.
The cleaning shall be made by an approved method. Sufficient notice of cleaning

for each individual pile shall be given to the Engineer to enable inspection.
Sedimentation tests (if required) shall be carried out by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer.
In case of boring without casing, the diameter of the boring hole for a each piles
shall be measured by calliper prior to the placing of reinforcement. The verticality
of boreholes will be checked Is directed by the Engineer. These measurements shall
be done by the Contractor using approved best quality and no reimbursement shall
be made.
Works, Page No. 10
2.2.11
Placing Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Reinforcement in the form
of a cage shall be assembled with additional support, such as spreader forks and lacing,
necessary to form a rigid cage. Hoops, links or helical reinforcement shall fit closely around
the main longitudinal bars and be bound by them by approved wire, the ends of which shall
be turned into tile interior of tile pile or pour. Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained
in position.
The cover to all reinforcement shall be not less than 75
Joints in longitudinal steel bars shall not be permitted unless otherwise specified. Joints in
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is effective across the joint and
shall be made in such a way that no relative displacement of the reinforcement occurs during
the construction of tile pile.
Joints in longitudinal bars in piles with tension (for instance for test loading) sisal] be carried
out by welding or method as approved by the Engineer.
2.2.12. Placing Concrete
a)
Approval
No concreting shall take place before the bottom of the excavation has been
cleaned, the borehole inspected and approval obtained from the Engineer.
Methods
The method of placing and the workability of the concrete, shall be such that a
continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross sections is formed.
The concrete shall be placed continuously and without interruptions that allow the
previously placed concrete to set. In this respect the Contractor shall submit details
of his plans, standby paint etc. to be utilised in the event of an equipment failure.
Works, Page No. 11
The Contractor shall take all precautions in the mix design and during the placing of
the concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in a casing.
b)
Workability of Concrete
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile boring shall be minimum
150mm, maximum 200mm or as approved by the Engineer.
c)
Placing of Concrete under Water or under Drilling Fluid

Concrete to be placed under water or under drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie
and shall not be discharged freely into the water or drilling fluid.
Before the placing concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that Heavily contaminated
bentonite suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the Pipe of
the tremie has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole.
As sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring
using an approved sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension
exceeds 1.25 t/m3, the placing of the concrete shall not proceed. In this event the
Contractor shall modify the bentonite mud quality.
The concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete
from pumping and de-watering operations.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall he clean and watertight. The pipe shall be
extended to the base of the boring. A sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the
pipe to prevent direct contact between the fist charge of concrete in the pipe and the
water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has
previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until
completion of concreting. The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be kept at least 1.5m
under the surface of the concrete. At all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall
be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from
the water or drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe shall be not less than
150mm for concrete made with 25mm aggregate and not less than 200mm for
concrete made with 32mm aggregate. The internal face of the pipe of the tremie
shall be free from obstructions.
Works, Page No. 12
The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of the volume of concrete used
related to the level of the concrete in the pile. any deviations from the theoretical, or
expected, volume/level relationship shall be immediately reported to the Engineer.
2.2.13
Extraction of Temporary Casing
a)
Workability of Concrete
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete inside the pile retains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.
b)
Concrete Level
During the extraction of the casing a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be

maintained inside the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or drilling
fluid is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
The toe of the temporary casing shall be kept at least 50mm under the outlet of the
tremie.
c)
Vibrating Extractors
The use of Vibrating easing extractors shall be permitted.
d)
During the concreting and the pulling of the casing the reinforcement cage shall be
secured against uplift and the top shall be kept under close inspection.
e)
Supervision
The execution of tile Pile concreting shall be supervised by a qualified person of the
Contractor's staff, who will keep records on the relation between quantity of
concrete used, level of concrete and withdrawal of casing,
2.2.14
Temporary Support
The Contractor shall ensure that free standing piles are temporarily braced immediately after
casting to prevent loosening of the piles in the ground and to ensure that no damage resulting
from oscillation, vibration or movement of any free-standing pile length can occur.
Works, Page No. 13
2.2.15
Records
The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below for the installation of each pile and
shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer within 24 hrs. The signed
records shall form a record of the work. The following data are requested:
2.2.16
a)
Contract
b)
Pile reference number (Location)
c)
Pile type
d)
Nominal cross-sectional diameter
e)
Date and time of boring
f)
Date and time of concreting
g)
River bed level at commencement of installation of pile
h)
Working level
i)
Pile toe level
j)
River water levels
k)
Pile head level
l)
Length of temporary easing
m)
Length of permanent casing
n)
Soils samples taken and in situ tests carried out
o)
Standing water level
p)
Length and details of reinforcement
q)
Concrete mix
r)
Volume of concrete supplied to pile and corresponding levels of concrete and

casings
s)
All information regarding obstructions delays and other interruptions to the

sequence of work.
Measures in Case of Rejected Piles
If any pile is found unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer for Utilization in the
structure it shall be cut off below the pile cap if so ordered by the Engineer.
Works, Page No. 14
The pile shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. All extra expenses shall be borne by
the Contractor and payment shall be made on the basis that no replacement pile had to be
provided for the unsatisfactory pile.
When the safe bearing value of any pile is found to be less than the additional piles shall be
installed as ordered in writing by the Engineer.
2.3.
Pile Load Test Work
The work shall include the application of test load (as per Schedule of Item) using Ancor piles,
suitable Beamd and Yokes, hydraulic Jacks etc. with suitable apparatus such as Pressure Gauge,
Deflectometer etc. for accurately measuring the test load and the settlement of the pile under each
increment of load. The load shall be kept for 48 hours. The work also include the cost of loading,
carriage of load to position, removal of the loads after completion of test, carrying and stacking those
in neat measurable stack as per direction of the Consultant/Engineer. The load test shall be performed
following the content of 3(c), 5(a), 5(b) of ASTM specification D1143-61 and the report shall be
submitted as per the same specification.
Load testing work of pile may also be done by any other alternate suitable method(s) and in that case
prior permission and approval shall be taken from the Consultant/Engineer but the Consultant/
Engineer is not bound to accept the alternate method of load testing work of pile.
2.4.
Dynamic Pile Load Test
In case any pile, during driving, goes below the required level, the driving may be suspended for 7
(seven) days and then driving will be attempted again and modified Heily's Formula shall be used for
evaluating the safe pile capacity where the factor of safety is 3.
3.
LEAN CEMENT CONCRETE WORK
The specification shall be the same as for R.C. works excepting that :
Works, Page No. 15
(i)
No reinforcement will be used;
(ii)
Proportion shall be as noted in Schedule of Items;
(iii)
12mm down graded chips of Jhama bricks shall be used as coarse aggregate;
(iv)
The curing shall be done for 7 days minimum;
(v)
Compaction of concrete may be done by wooden or steel tempers or rammers in lieu of vibrations;
In order to improve bond with masonry/concrete work coming above it, if required, the surface shall be
roughened before it reaches initial set, by scouring with the help of a pointed tool.
The size of groove shall be of section between 0.45cm2 and 0.90cm2 scouring shall be done in a pair of
orthogonal system of parallel lines spaced 100mm to 200mm and making 45o angle with either axes yielding a
mesh of 100mm to 200mm.
4.
BRICK WORK
General
The Bricks for use shall be regular in size and shape and shall be free from cracks and other structural defects.
The bricks shall be hand picked and stacked separately at least one day before use. Only after the stack is
approved by the Employer, the bricks shall be used in the works.
There will be average 10mm to 18mm thick mortar all around the brick. The proportion of cement-sand mortar
shall be as stated in the Schedule of Items.
All masonry work shall be laid by skilled workmen under adequate supervision and shall be laid true to lines
and levels with joints of uniform thickness and all surfaces true and corners straight and plumb.
Before use, bricks shall be cleaned and scrubbed. Any fungus and or moss grown on the surface, it shall be
cleaned by steel brush. Then those shall be soaked in clean tamarind water for at least 8 hours. Soaking shall be
discontinued 2 hours before use.
Sand shall be screened once and washed once immediately before use. The mortar shall be mixed in a mixer
machine.
Mortar shall be used up within 30 minutes of mixing the mortar. No retempering of mortar will be
allowed.
Works, Page No. 16
Water shall be of same quality as for making R.C.
Before laying bricks for a course, mortar of suitable consistency shall be laid with a large trowel over the
previous course in thickness more than horizontal joints. The bricks to be laid shall have the free and buttered
thickly and then shoved on the mortar bed pressing hard against the previously laid bricks in the same course so
that the horizontal and vertical joints are completely filled by flow of exposed surfaces of bricks shall be
meticulously avoided/cleaned. The proportion of cement and sand in mortar shall be as stated in the schedule of
items.
All horizontal joints shall be parallel and truly level. Vertical joints in alternate course shall come directly one
above other unless otherwise directed.
The top of everyday's work shall be covered with water proof covering to prevent rain water spoiling day's
work.
No deductions will be made for flue, storm drainage, sewerage, electrical conduits and other utility pipe holes
for payment of the work. But those shall be provided by the Contractor true to plans and elevations.
The rate shall include the cost of erection and removing of scaffolding, trowel finishing the brick joints during
work and curing for 14 days complete.
5.
DOUBLE WYTHE BRICK WORK
The specification of this item of work shall be similar to that for `Brick work'.
The two wythes shall be constructed simultaneously. At no stage of progress of the tops of the two wythes
differ in level by more than 4 brick courses, that is the vertical spacing of ties. In this work, one wythe shall be
built up in stages equal in height of vertical spacing of ties. The other wythe shall also be built up in stages but
always lagging behind the former. When the leading wythe completes a height stage above the lagging one, its
inside face shall be plastered in cement-sand mortar. (The thickness of plaster and proportion of cement sand in
mortar shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The specification of plaster work shall be similar to that for
cement sand plaster work). The lagging wythe shall then be built up to reach the level of leading wythe. When
the level is reached the work will be shifted to leading wythe and the cycle shall be repeated until the full height
of the wall is reached.
The two wythes shall be bonded by expanded metal net tie or by "Z" tie made of 6mm dia m.s rod. The ties
shall be provided in every 4th horizontal course.
Works, Page No. 17
The details of ties to be used shall be shown in Drawings.
6.
BRICK BONDED CONCRETE WORK

The prepared sub-grade shall first be moistened with care so that it is not too wet. First class bricks that have
been soaked in water for at least 8 hours shall be placed in rows and columns in a manner so that the distances
between center lines of the interstices are 150mm in one direction and 275mm in the other.
Placing of concrete in the interstices and over the top shall proceed next. If at the time of commencement of
placing concrete the bricks are more than 2 hours out of soaking bath, they shall be remoistened with water in
position, care shall be taken that the remoistening is done in thin jets and that not much water leaves the bricks
to overwet the sub-grade.
Cement concrete shall be 1:2:4 mix. with medium sand as fine aggregate and 12mm down graded chips of
jhama bricks as coarse aggregate including breaking of bricks into chips. The work provided for paying single
ordinary brick flat with about 38mm gap all around to be filled in by concrete and then placing a topping
concrete so that overall thickness is as mentioned in the Scheduled of Items.
Interstices shall be carefully rodded. The top layer over the bricks shall be placed within half an hour of filling
the interstices, hence the progress between filling the interstices and laying of top layer will have a phase
difference of 15-20 minutes. The top of the work before the cover layer of concrete is placed shall not be
allowed to be soiled so that the bond between the concrete in interstices, of bricks and the cover concrete is not
reduced. The top layer of concrete shall be beaten by timber or any other means brought level or profile as
shown in the drawing. Immediately after finishing levelling and before drying up of the concrete, the top
surfaces shall be covered with cement powder strained through fine cloth and it shall be rubbed on the surface
carefully and repeatedly till the finished surface is very smooth, polished, plane and hard.
But in case where the surface will be without neat cement finishing work, the surface will be left rough. In both
the cases the concrete shall be cured for at least 14 days by stagnant water.
7.
R.C WORK
The item shall include cost of form work, provision for joints, dowels, recesses, grooves, holes, fixing of utility
pipes and other embedments curing etc. complete. The item shall include breaking of jhama bricks into coarse
aggregate of required sizes. Cost of reinforcement which is a separately payable item should not be included in
this item.
(a)
Water for Mixing Concrete
Works, Page No. 18
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies,
salts, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Where different materials of proportions are to be used for different proportions of the work, each
combination shall be evaluated separately.
(b)
Materials to be used
(i)
Cement
Portland cement
(ii)
Fine Aggregate
A mixture of 67% medium sand and 33% coarse sand.
(iii)
Coarse Aggregate
18mmn down well graded chips of jhama bricks or

boulders.
Grading requirement for Coarse Aggregate
Size
Nominal size
Num-ber (Sieves with
square
openings)
50mm 38mm 25mm 18mm 12mm
67
..
18mm to No.4
18mm
No.4
No.8
4.76mm 2.40mm
..
100
90 to
100
..
20 to
55
0 to 10
0 to 5
The fine and coarse aggregate shall be screened at least once and washed at least once in clean water
immediately before use in works.
(c)
Concrete proportions and consistency
The leanest permissible mix proportion shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The consistency of
the concrete shall be such as to work readily into the corner and angles of the forms and around
reinforcement but without permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the
surface.
The methods of measuring consistency of the concrete shall be such that the proportions can be
accurately controlled and easily checked at any time during the work.
Works, Page No. 19
The following slumps shall be used for different concrete members.
(i)
Maximum
25mm
62mm
Beams and Lintels, Footings

Grade Beams
(d)
Minimum
(ii)
Roof slab, slabs, walls of water tank 25mm
(iii)
Shelves
62mm
25mm
62mm
Strength Tests of Concrete
The strength of concrete 28 days, 150mm x 300mm cylinder, shall be as stated in the schedule of
items. Strength shall be the basis for acceptance. Each class of concrete shall be represented by at least
five tests (15 specimens). Three specimens shall be made for each test at a given age. The test shall
have to be carried out as per direction of the Employer but in no case more than three tests shall have
to be made for each 150 cubic yards of structural concreting.
Samples from which compression test specimens are moulded shall be secured in accordance with
"Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C-172). Speciment made to check the adequacy of the
proportions for strength of concrete or as a basis for acceptances of concrete shall be made and
laboratory cured in accordance with "Method of Making and curing concrete compression and flexure
test specification in the field" (ASTM C-31) strength Tests shall be made in accordance with "Method
of Test for Compressive strength of Moulded concrete Cylinders (ASTM C-39).
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days. Additional tests shall be made at 7 days to obtain advance
information on the adequacy of strength development. The strength test of concrete cylinders is
payable under a separate item.
To conform to the requirement of this specifications, the average of any three consecutive strength
tests of the Laboratory cured specimen representing each class of concrete shall be at least 25 percent
greater than the specified strength, and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall have values
less than the specified strength.
(e)
Mixing and placing concrete
Works, Page No. 20
Preparation of equipment and place of deposits. Before concrete is placed, all equipment for mixing
and transporting the concrete shall be cleaned, all debris shall be removed from the space to be
occupied by the concrete.
Water shall be removed from the place of deposit before concrete is placed.
(f)
Mixing of Concrete
Concrete shall be machine mixed at job-site.
(g)
Compaction
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction
shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions :
Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Consultant. They shall be capable of
transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4500 impulses per minute.
(h)
Curing
Concrete shall be maintained above 50oF and in a moist condition for at least the first 28 days after
placing.
(i)
Formwork
All form shall be of wood or metal and shall be, built mortar tight and of sufficient rigidity to Prevent
distortion due to the pressure of the concrete and other loads incident to the construction operation.
Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent warping and the opening of joints due to
shirkage of the lumber.
The forms shall be substantial and unyielding and shall be so designed that the finished concrete will
conform to the proper dimensions and contours. The design of the forms shall take into account the
effect of vibration of concrete as it is placed.
Works, Page No. 21
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of dressed lumber of uniform thickness, with or without a
form line of approved type, and shall he mortar tight. Forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and
shall be given a level or draft in the case of all projection.
Metal ties or anchorages within the forms shall be so constructed as to permit their removal to a depth
of at least 50mm from the face without injury to the concrete. In case ordinary wire ties are permitted
all wires, upon removal of the forms, shall be cut back at least 6mm from the faces of the concrete
with chisels or nippers; for green concrete nippers are necessary. All fittings for metal ties shall be of
such design that, upon their removal, the cavities which are lief will be of the smallest possible size.
The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform
in colour.
All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designated until the concrete is sufficiently
hardened. Forms shall remain in place for periods which shall be determined as hereinafter specified.
When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during the placing of concrete,
the Architect shall order the work stopped until the defects have been corrected.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of re-used forms shall be
maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged lumber must be re-sized before being re-used. Forms
which are unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be re-used.
All forms shall be treated with oil or saturated with water immediately before placing the concrete.
For rail members or other members with exposed faces the forms shall be treated with and approved
oil to prevent the adherence of concrete. Any material which will adhere to or discolour the concrete
shall not be used.
Removal of forms and shores :
The supporting forms and shoring shall not be removed until members have acquired sufficient
strength to support their weight and the loads superimposed their safely. In no case may any forms be
removed until the time and sequence has been approved by the Engineer.
All form work shall be removed without damage to the Concrete. The minimum time forms and
shoring to remain in place shall be as follows :
i.
Beams and slabs spaning upto 6.10M
14 days
ii.
Beams and slabs spaning above 6.10M
20 days
iii.
Soffits of openings in wall
14 days
Works, Page No. 22
iv.
8.
Column, wall and beam sides
48 days
REINFORCEMENT WORK
The item includes cutting into sizes, removal of rusts and loose scales, straightening, hooking and bending
according to design and drawing, carrying, placing in position, splicing and binding with 24 SWG Black mild
steel wire. The item also includes supply of binding wire.
Details of Reinforcement
9.
(i)
Hooks and bends shall conform to ACI Code 318-63 section 801.
(ii)
Cleaning reinforcement - Reinforcement shall be free from loose flakes, rust, mud, oil of other
coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond.
(iii)
Placing of reinforcement shall conform to section 803 ibid.
(iv)
Spacing of bars shall conform to section 804 ibid.
(v)
Concrete protection for reinforcement shall conform to section 808 ibid.
M.S STRUCTURAL WORK IN FRAME, SHUTTER AND GRILL WORKS
(a)
Preparatory work
The structural steel elements shall be cleaned of all loose scales and rusts by sand papering all
accessible parts of the body. If the elements get distorted before assembling they shall be straightened
in the shop by methods that will not injure it; it shall be kept straight during fabrication. Finished
members shall be free from twists, bends or open joints. If the elements have to be provided with
holes, the holes shall be drilled in the shop and not at the place of assembly. For large works templates
shall be made in order to control the profile and configuration of the assembly.
(b)
General
Works, Page No. 23
The joints of the elements shall meet without gap unless a gap is intended specifically. The planes of
the elements meeting at a joint which are required to be co-planer shall be accurately so. The weld
metals shall be deposited uniformly along the length of the containing the joint shall be rubbed out and
made smooth by grinding with power - grinders. Cutting of elements shall be done by steel hacksaw,
manual or power, but prior approval of the Consultant/University Engineer shall be obtained for this.
All cut edges exposed to view shall be ground even. If gas cutting is done the out edges shall be freed
from gouges by grinding.
(c)
Rivetted and bolted Construction
Holes for rivets or bolts shall be 1.60mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt. If the
thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt plus 3.17mm, the
holes shall be either drilled from the solid, or sub-punched and reamed. The dia for all sub-punched
holes, and the drill for all sub-drilled holes, shall be at least 1.60mm smaller than the nominal
diameter of the rivet or bolt.
(d)
Welded Construction
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign
material except that mill scales which withstands vigorous wire brushing may remain. Joint surface
shall be free from fins and tears. Preparation of edges by gas cutting shall, wherever practicable, be
done by a mechanical guided torch.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable and in no event shall be
separated by more than 5.76mm. If the separation is 1.60mm or greater, the size of the fillet welds
shall be increased by the amount of the separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap
joints on a backing structure shall not exceed 1.60mm. The fit of joints at contact surfaces which are
not completely sealed by welds, shall be close enough to exclude water after painting.
Abutting parts to be butt welded shall be carefully aligned. Misalignments greater than 3.17mm. shall
be corrected and, in making the correction, the parts shall not be drawn into a sharper slope than 2
degrees (11.10mm in 300mm).
The work shall be positioned for flat welding whenever practicable.
In assembling and jointing parts of a structure or of build-up members, the procedure and sequence of
welding shall be such as will avoid needless distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses. Where it is
impossible to avoid high residual stresses in the closing welds of a rigid assembly, such closing welds
shall be made in compression elements.
Works, Page No. 24
In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop splices in each component
part shall be made before such component part is welded to other parts of the member. Long girders or
girder sections may be made by shop splicing not more than three sub-section, each made in
accordance with this paragraph.
All complete penetration but welds made by manual welding, except when produced with the aid of
backing material or welded in the flat position from both sides in square-edge material not more than
8mm thick with root opening not less than one-half the thickness of the thinner part joint shall have
the root of the initial layer gouged out on the back before welding is started from that side, and shall
be so welded as to secure sound meatal and complete fusion throughout the entire cross section. Butt
welds made with use of a backing of the same material as the base metal shall have the weld metal
thoroughly fused with the backing material. Backing strips may be removed by gouging or gas cutting
after welding in completed, provided no injury is done to the base metal and weld metal and the weld
metal surface is left flush or slightly convex with full throat thickness.
Butt welds shall be terminated at the ends of a joint in a manner that will ensure their soundness.
Where possible, this should be done by use of extension bars or run-off plates. Extension bars or runof plates, if used, shall be removed upon completion of the weld and the ends of the weld made
smooth and flush with the abutting parts.
The items of work shall also include painting the m.s. surfaces in 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint
over a coat of red lead primer.
10.
WOOD WORK
The timber shall be of species as specified in the schedule of items.
The dimensions shown in the design-drawings are finished dimensions prior to application of paint or varnish.
While sawing for sizes, allowance shall therefore be made for losses during sawing, working, painting and
finishing.
All wood work shall be neatly and truly finished maintain right angles and other angles accurately. Wood work
which will be exposed to view shall be accurately planed.
No filling or stopping of knots, cracks or other flaws shall be done by putting or other fillers. The Consultant
may, however, approve filling a neat square-cut hollow circumscribing the knot, crack of flaws by a plug of
exactly fitting size fixed with polyvinyl acetate adhesive but prior approval for this shall be taken.
Works, Page No. 25
Unless otherwise specified all joints shall be simple mortice and tenon joints with the ends of tenon exposed to
view. All mortice or scarfs shall fit truely and fully with full contact bearing and no filling shall be used. Holes
of correct size shall be drilled before insertion of nails or screws. The nails shall be in timber of the same
quality as that of the body unless otherwise permitted. All screws shall be dipped in oil before being inserted in
the body. The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to prior approval of the Employer. Driving in or starting
in of screws with a hammer shall not be allowed. If any undue shrinkage or warpage is noticed after the woodwork has been erected, the work shall be pulled down and replaced.
All portions of timber built into or against or close to masonry or concrete shall be given two coats of hot
solignum, creosote or other wood preservative approved by the Consultant.
The direction of the grain shall be as shown in the design-drawings or as instructed by the University
Engineer/Consultant.
Finishing of the work shall be done by rubbing with sand paper of coarseness in the sequence of No.2, No.0
and 00 followed by hand rubbing with woolen rag.
11.
CEMENT SAND PLASTER WORK
(i)
Sand shall be screened twice and washed at least once. It shall be absolutely free from acids, alkalies
and salts. The quality of water for mixing mortar shall be similar to that of R.C. work.
(ii)
The proportion of cement and sand in mortar shall be as specified in the schedule of items using
medium sand.
(iii)
The bulk of each batch of mortar mixed, shall be such as can be exhausted in half an hour. The
mixture shall be turned over and over till the ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
(iv)
The surface shall be moistened with fresh water and shall be kept damp for 2 hours before the plaster
is applied.
(v)
The plaster work shall be so carried out that no segments, laps between them or patches are visible.
Preferably a wall or a ceiling shall be plastered in one operation with sufficient number of masons
working along side and working from top to downwards in walls. The plastered surface shall be true,
plane and plumb. All edges and corners shall be straight and squared. The surface of the plaster shall
be brought to a smooth finished with the help of steel trowels. The consistency of the mortar shall
neither be too stiff nor too fluid. The work shall be cured for 10 days, Chiselling and repairing of
cement plaster shall not be permitted under any circumstances. The thickness of plaster shall be as
mentioned in Bill of Quantities. The work shall also include providing of panel lines on plaster surface
as per drawing.
Works, Page No. 26
(vi)
(vii)
12.
Where so mentioned in the schedule of items there the plastering work shall be carried out in 2 layers
in the process as mentioned above, thickness of each layer being as mentioned in the schedule of items
except and provided that :
(a)
In both layers an admixture of "Pudlo" @4% by weight of cement shall be used.
(b)
The first layer shall be in the forms of scratch coat which shall be allowed to dry for a day
before the final coat is placed on it. The surface of the scratch coat shall be prevented from
getting covered with dirt or dust and shall be cleaned before the final coat is placed.
(c)
Immediately after finishing the final coat of plaster, its surface shall be covered with cement
powder strained through fine cloth and it shall be rubbed on the surface with the help of
small steel trowels working on the surface carefully and repeatedly and spreading of cement
and rubbing by steel surface shall be continued till the finished surface is very smooth,
polished, plane, hard and dry.
The mortar which was partially hardened or otherwise deteriorated shall not be used in work.
BRICK LINING WORK
The specification of this item of work shall be same a that for "Brick work" vide item no.2 except and provided
that the work shall include formwork and cutting of bricks as necessary with the help of hacksaw and that the
thickness of brick lining shall be as stated in the schedule of items.
13.
RULED POINTING WORK :

The recess kept for pointing work during brick work shall be minimum 9.50mm and it shall be cleaned of all
dirts, dusts and extraneous matter and shall be washed with and soaked in clean water before the
commencement of pointing work.
The recess shall be completely filled with cement sand mortar in 1:2 proportion using medium sand and
admixture of black oxide 0.34 kg per bag of cement. The mixing of mortar shall be done as specified in cement
plaster work. During filling of the joint the mortar shall not be allowed to spread over the edges of the bricks.
When the cement mortar is thumb-print hard it shall be tooled with a non-staining tool of the special profile
instructed by the Employer.
The tooling shall be done neatly and skillfully so that the joint surface is true, hard, dense, smooth and glossy.
Works, Page No. 27
The rules shall be absolutely straight. The horizontal rules shall be continuous horizontal lines without break.
The vertical rules in alternate layers shall be in same vertical lines. The pointing work shall be cured for 7 days.
14.
ARTIFICIAL STONE FLOORING WORK

The floor shall be divided into panels, for providing contraction joints, as shown on the plan or decided by the
Consultant. The area of any panel shall normally not exceed 1.488 sqm. The temporary dividers may be of
metal strips or a wooden batten of true line and shape. The top of the dividers shall be perfectly level with level
of the finished floor desired. The sequence of filling in the panels should be on `checker board' plan. The
casting of the complementary set shall be done at least 48 hours after the first set is cast and dividers removed.
Extreme care shall be taken that the concrete or mortar of a panel does not `ride over' the top surface of the
adjoining panels previously cast.
The concrete work shall be done in accordance with the specifications for R.C. works except that no
reinforcement will be used in the work and that vibrators need not be used for compaction. Fixed proportion of
ingredients and not strength shall be the criteria. The proportion of concrete ingredients shall be 1 part cement,
1.5 parts coarse sand and 3 parts 9.50mm down graded chips of jhama bricks.
The concrete surface in sub-flooring shall be thoroughly scrapped to remove laitance, dirt etc. and washed
cleaned and soaked with water until no more water is absorbed.
The free water from the base being removed, a coat of mixture of cement and water, of the consistency of thick
cream, shall be brushed on the surface, just prior to placing the topping.
The ingredients shall be mixed with just sufficient water to obtain the plasticity required. Mixing for a larger
period will be preferred to adding more water to obtain this plasticity.
The concrete as prepared above, shall be laid immediately after the mixing is completed, on the freshly grouted
base. It shall be spread evenly and straight - edged carefully, and low place being filled, humps removed, and
the whole surface again straight - edged.
As soon as the layer is even, the surface shall be rapidly compacted by ramming or beating screeded to a
uniform line and level, and floated in neat cement finish using cement powder strained through fine cloth and
marble dust mixed in 1:1 proportion and it shall be rubbed on the surfaces with the help of small steel trowels
working on the surface. This trawling operation shall be repeated several times till the surface is hard,
impervious, smooth and nearly dried. The thickness of neat cement finish shall be 3.17mm (minimum).
Works, Page No. 28
Where specified in the schedule of items the top finish shall be done in neat cement finish only without
admixture of marble dust.
The finish shall be covered by burlap immediately after it has got the final set and shall be kept continuously
submerged under water for at least 21 days. The thickness of the floor finish shall be as specified in the
schedule of items.
15.
SKIRTING/DADO WORK IN CEMENT-SAND PLASTER
The specification for this item of work shall be same as that for cement-sand plaster work.
(a)
The proportion of cement-sand shall be 1:4 and sand to be used shall be medium sand.
(b)
The plaster shall be laid in two layers. The first layer shall be in the form of a scratch coat which shall
be allowed for a day before the final coat is plastered on it. The surface of the scratch coat shall be
prevented from getting covered with dirt or dust and shall be cleaned before the final coat is plastered.
(c)
Immediately after finishing the final coat of plaster its surface shall be covered with cement powder
strained through fine cloth and marble dust mixed in 1:1 proportion and it shall be rubbed on the
surface with the help of small steel trowels working on the surface carefully and repeatedly (at least
four passes over the entire area) till the finished surface is very smooth, polished, plane and hard.
Where specified in the schedule of items the top surface shall be finished in neat cement finish only
without admixture of marble dust.
16.
TERRAZZO-IN-SITU WORK IN FLOOR
The sub-floor shall be cleaned of all liatance, dirt and extraneous mater. It shall be cleaned twice with clean
water till the sub-floor is spark-clean. The sub-floor shall be kept continuously moist for 4 hours before the
concrete bed is placed.
The floor shall be divided into panels for providing contraction joints as shown in the Drawings or specified by
the Consultant. Unless otherwise specified, the area of a panel shall not exceed 1.488 sqm. The temporary
dividers may be metal strips or wooden battens whose edges shall be straight, true and sharp. The top of the
dividers shall be perfectly level with the desired level of finished floor. The sequence of casting in the panels
shall be on `finished floor' plan. The complementary panels shall not be cast till the divider strips are removed
Works, Page No. 29
and 48 hours elapse since the casting of the adjoining panels. If the material for divider strip is absorbent it shall
be moistened or oiled with non-staining grease before the flooring may come in contract with it.
A bed of plain cement concrete shall be laid on the moist sub-floor. The proportion of mix shall be 1:2:4 using
medium sand and 18mm down chips of well burnt jhama bricks as coarse aggregate. Next, the topping course
proper shall be laid, The topping course shall be composed of marble chip and cement mixed dry in the
proportion 1:1 by volume in which water shall be added gradually in order to make the mix plastic but not too
wet. Colouring agent shall be used in proper proportion if coloured flooring is intended. The flooring shall be
white unless otherwise specified, be in two fractions, 2 parts 4.76mm down and 1 part 1.60mm down. The
thickness of topping shall be 9.50mm. The mixture shall be poured into panels formed by temporary strips
along contraction joints and it shall be rolled into a compact mass by using a heavy stone or metal roller until
all superfluous cement and water are extracted.
The quality of marble chips and marble powder shall be as stated in the schedule of item.
Where so specified grey cement shall be mixed with white cement in the proportion as stated in the schedule of
Items. The surface shall then be hand trowelled to an even surface flush with the top of the strips. The finished
surface shall show 70% marble granules. The floor shall be kept moist throughout these operations and when
the operations are complete, it shall be cured for at least 10 days.
When the floor is cured for at least 10 days, it shall be polished manually or with surface grinding machine.
This grinding is to remove laitance or loose material and to produce a smooth finish. The first grinding shall be
done with a coarse carborundum stone (80 Grit) and fine sand sprinkled ever the surface, using water freely.
The floor shall be cleaned twice with clean water after the first grinding is done. All pores and holes shall next
be filled with white cement grout. After 5 days the second grinding shall be done using grinding machine or
manually using a finer grain carborundum stone (120 Grit.). The surface shall then be cleaned twice using clean
water and a light grout of pure white cement shall be spread over the entire floor an be allowed to fill in all fine
voids. After the grout has hardened for 3 days, the surface shall be subjected to final grinding with machine or
manually, with carborundum stone 240 Grit. The floor shall be washed thoroughly after each grinding and in
the final grinding washing shall be done with hot water and pure soft soap.
After washing, cleaning and drying the floor after final grinding, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface
(0.30 kg over 9.3 cm2). The floor shall then be sprinkled with water and rubbed hard. This operation shall be
repeated till the surface has acquired the required gloss. The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist
rag and dried with a soft cloth. A hot mixture of turpentine and bee-wax (3:1) shall then be applied to the
surface and thoroughly rubbed with hand and later again rubbed with clean cotton waste using 4 passes. This
rubbing will be continued till the floor ceases to be sticky. Best result will be obtained with a minimum of wax
and maximum of rubbing.
17.
GLAZED TILE WORK

The tile shall be mettle glazed, waterproof, white, dust pressed with square edges. The tiles shall be 12mm
thick. No border edging or rounding pieces will be used. Length of each side of wall shall be filled by the tiles
completely. The cut sizes, if used at the ends shall be equal in size and as close to full size as possible by
making either the edge or the centre of tile to coincide with the vertical centre line of wall. The wall on which
the tiles shall be applied shall be kept moistened for 2 hours. Next the bedding mortar in 1:3 using medium
Works, Page No. 30
sand shall be applied. The size of the tiles to be used shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The joints in
tiles shall be pointed with white cement mortar unless otherwise specified.
18.
LIME TERRACING WORK

Stone lime shall be used for this work and the stones (quicklime) shall be slaked on the job. Under no
circumstances shall lime be procured in the slaked state. The terracing shall be done by lime concrete
composed of lime, surki and brick khoa mixed in the ratio 2:2:7 by volume unless otherwise specified. The
brick khoa shall be first class brick chips and shall be graded 20mm down. The thickness of lime concrete
shown at different points of the surface shall be provided accurately. If the thickness of lime terracing is not
specified it shall be 50mm at drainage outlets with thickness increasing with increasing distance from it as
required to provide surface slope of 1:120. The platform on which the mixing will be done shall be level and
even and the surface impervious without any open joints. The platform shall be leaned thoroughly and on it the
slaked lime and surki shall be mixed dry in the requisite proportion using rectangular boxes as units by spading
the mass at least 3 times. The brick khoa shall be soaked in water continuously for 48 hours before use.
The water-soaked khoa shall be spread to a uniform height over another platform which has been thoroughly
cleaned previously. The mixture of lime and surki shall then be spread over it uniformly in a thickness as
required by the proportion of the mix. The lime-surki mixture and the khoa aggregate shall then be mixed
together by means of spades. While mixing the materials water shall be added gradually in small quantities.
The materials mixed thoroughly till the mixture is uniform and for this purpose the entire mass shall be turned
over not less than 3 times. After the mixing is done it shall be allowed to stand for being tempered. After 40
hours the concrete shall be turned over throughout its entire mass at least twice and during this spading also
small quantities of fresh water shall be added as needed for workability.
The concrete shall again be allowed to stand for being tempered. After 24 hours the mass of concrete shall be
spaded and turned over twice. It is now ready for laying.
The surface on which the lime concrete will be placed shall be cleaned and washed accompanied by scrubbing
if necessary. This surface shall never be used even partially as a mixing platform. The surface shall be well
soaked in clean water immediately before the concrete is spread over it. The concrete shall be laid in proper
thickness and slopes, a margin of 25% in thickness being allowed for settlement all over the surface and
allowed to be soaked in.
Beating shall now begin by two rows of beaters who shall traverse the length of roof backwards and forwards
while beating with wooden mallets. Beating shall continue until the mortar has almost set and the mallets
rebound from the surface, but shall not be for a period less than a week. The number of beaters shall not be less
than 3 for each 9.3 sqm.
Lime water to which molasses and conventional resins have been added @5% by weight shall be sprinkled at
intervals to keep the surface wet while being beaten. Special care shall be taken that no portion of the surface is
allowed to dry up even for a small period of time during the entire period of beating. No plaster shall be
allowed on the surface.
Works, Page No. 31
The mortar which comes up during beating shall be troweled on the surface to cover any blind spots and bring
the surface to some degree of polish. The surface shall be cured by impounding water for 14 days.
19.
PAINTING WORKS
The type of paint shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities. The surface shall be rubbed clean with sand
paper. The cleaned surface shall be free from foreign materials. If there be any unevenness in the surface it shall
be made even by making good the surface defects in a manner approved by the Consultant. The surface shall be
allowed to be completely dry before the work is undertaken.
The floor, doors, windows, glazing and other members, which may get a splash of paint during the work, shall
be covered with the help of paper or any other suitable covering sheet so that the paint does not stain any part or
any member of the building not intended to be covered by the paint. If such staining takes place in spite of the
best precautions, the stain shall be forthwith removed.
The manufacturer's specification shall be meticulously followed except and so far as not modified by the
Consultant.
The colour of the paint shall be as selected and approved by the Employer.
Painting shall not be carried out in damp weather nor when weather is excessively hot and dry. No painting
shall be done on a surface having direct sun rays at the time of painting. The relative humidity shall be above
20% and below 50% at the time of painting. No painting shall be done if there is a chance of rain, paint shall be
constantly stirred while being applied, such stirring being done with a smooth stick and under no circumstances
with the brush.
The preceding coat shall be perfectly dry and all dust shall be removed and the condition of surface approved
by the Consultant before the next coat is applied. Each coat shall differ slightly in tint from the preceding one
to permit ready distinction of each coat, the last coat being of the tint required for the finished work.
Where brushes are used for applying paint they shall be as supplied or recommended by the manufacturers. The
brushes shall be washed in hot water after work each day and hung up to dry. Brushes clogged with old paint
shall not be allowed on the work.
All coats shall be spread as evenly and smoothly as possible by means of crossing and laying off. The final coat
shall be very carefully crossed and laid off so that the brush marks are not visible.
Works, Page No. 32
When using a brush to apply paint, the paint shall be applied from the ends of the hair, If the sides are used, the
application is not satisfactory. Brush shall be reversed at frequent intervals so that it wears down evenly. A free
easy stroke shall be the rule of applying the brush. Short and jerky strokes shall be avoided. Stretching the
strokes too far shall also be avoided.
In brush painting, brushes shall be applied quickly and boldly leaving non dry edges. The brush shall be dipped
in paint and stroked horizontally on the wall, then immediately stroked up and down and stepped. Two workers
shall work on a wall together, one working from the ceiling and down-words as far as he can reach and the
second following him in applying the paint in the lower height of the wall. No patchy overlaps shall be allowed
under any circumstances.
Before starting work enough paint shall be mixed to finish one room. Each room shall be finished in one
operation and work shall not be started in a room so late as can not be finished the same day.
When paint is not in use, its containers shall be closed airtight. When painting is completed the surface shall be
of uniform colour free from blotches, lines or cut-shades and shall present a smooth, regular and even surface
such as will neither cut nor come off on the fingers when rubbed.
The Contractor shall remove with turpentine, or by other approved method, all defects and leave the work in
perfect order after removing all stains, smears splashes and dropping from floors, doors, windows glazing,
furniture etc.
Number of coats of paints to be applied is specified in the Bill of Quantities. The paint shall be of BERGER
BRAND/approved best quality by the Consultant. The priming coat shall be as recommended by the
manufacturers. Under no circumstances shall the surface be primed with whiting or lime. The items shall also
include all scaffolding work.
21.
WHITE WASHING/COLOUR WASHING WORK
Before the white wash is applied, the walls are to be thoroughly cleaned down and made free from all foreign
matters. When the wall gets dried, it will be again washed with tamarind solution in concentration approved by
the Consultant. When the wall is dry again, it is ready to receive the white wash.
The wash is to be composed of fresh stone lime and shell lime slaked on the spot in the proportion of two parts
of the former to one part of the latter. The slaked lime is placed in tub nearly full of water and is then mixed and
stirred until it attains the consistency of thin cream. When sufficiently mixed, it is to be strained into earthen
pots through coarse cloth. Gum Arabic in the proportion of two chhataks to thirty seerts of lime shall be added
to the strained wash and the whole shall then be boiled together. It is now ready for use.
Works, Page No. 33
White wash shall be laid on the walls vertically and horizontally alternately. Each coat shall perfectly dry
before the succeeding one is laid over it.
In case of colour wash work, the cream for colour wash shall be prepared by simply mixing the requisite
coloring material (to be approved by the Consultant) to the cream of white wash. The colour wash shall be laid
over a priming coat of white wash.
Number of coats of white wash/colour wash shall be as stated in the Bill of Quantities.
The items shall also include all scaffolding works.
B. PLUMBING WORKS
1.
SCOPE OF WORKS
As for Civil items of work, each item of works shall include furnishing by the Contractor of all plants,
machinery and equipment, fuel, materials and labour. It shall also include cost of all auxiliary and secondary
works to be done for executing the item. For example, the item for laying drainage pipes shall include all
excavation including shoring and dewatering if necessary, painting, laying jointing, fitting, supplying joints and
all connections, e.g. bends, Y-junction branches, supplying, sealing, providing concrete bed as per specification
carrying out tests for defective work, filling the trenches with earth, sand, formwork for concrete bed etc.
making holes in masonry or concrete works for passing through them where needed and making good area of
the hole outside the laid pipe; lintel in the wall above the pipe if the hole is wider than 150mm; testing the
completed item of work etc. complete. For second example, an item for supplying and installing galvanised
iron service pipe for water supply shall include (i) reduction joints at either ends and in intermediate locations if
needed, (ii) applying and providing bends, elbows, tees, unions, plugs and any other connections and junctions
necessary, (iii) arrangement for securing and supporting them throughout their length as per approved design
and methods, (iv) arrangement for embedment in masonry or concrete works as the masonry/concrete work
proceeds and/or cutting grooves, recesses, holes etc. as needed and surrounding the pipe by concrete/mortar as
per approved design, making good the surface of walls, floors or ceiling to the usual surface finish, (v) testing
of all defective works, (vi) supplying and providing gate and screw down valves, (which will be payable under
separate items) at each central position unless otherwise specified etc. complete.
2.
GENERAL
The work shall conform to National Plumbing Code (ASA A40.8-1955) published by the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers unless modified hereunder. General arrangement of drainage and plumbing as shown in
Drawings shall be faithfully observed. If any change is necessary for any reason, the Contractor may invite
notice of the Employer to the matter but shall not make any alteration himself.
Works, Page No. 34
3.
APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
Inspection and approval of the Employer shall be sought and secured by the Contractor before the pipes and
other materials are used in work. Rejected pipes or materials shall be separately stored and removed from site
within 24 hours of being asked for removal.
Pipes shall be kept absolutely free from earth, debries, superfluous cement and other obstructions during laying
and until the completion of contract.
GRADIENTS
Drain pipes shall be laid to following gradients unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings :
5.
Size of Pipe
Soul Pipe
Rain or waste water pipe
100mm dia
1 in 40
1 in 60
150mm dia
1 in 60
1 in 90
225mm dia
1 in 100
1 in 150
JOINTING
(i)
Cast Iron pipes :
Unless otherwise specified, the jointing shall be done as for R.C. pipe but no preliminary wetting is
necessary.
(ii)
Asbestos cement pipe : (Used as drain pipes)
Works, Page No. 35
The joints of asbestos cement pipes shall be as for R.C. pipes.

(iii)
Galvanised Iron Pipes :
The pipes, sockets and fittings shall be cleaned first and allowed to dry before use in the work. The
joints shall be made water tight using hemp yarn soaked in China Lacquer. The tightening shall be
done perfectly by Torque wrench.
(iv)
Reinforced Concrete Pipes :

Spigots and sockets shall be thoroughly wetted by water at first hemp yarn soaked in cement grout
shall be caulked turn by turn upto 12mm depth on either side of mid length of socket ensuring that the
spigots and sockets are co axial and that the hemp-seal would not permit the cement sand mortar
packing the reach inside the pipe hollow. The remaining space shall be filled up by cement sand
mortar in 1:2.5 proportion using medium sand. The filling of the mortar shall be done by small thin
trowels and in small batches. A fillet shall be formed all around the pipe at the joint at an angle of 45o.
The joints shall be cured for 14 days.
(v)
P.V.C. pipes :
The joint of PVC pipes shall be sealed with the help of Plastic Glue.
6.
TRAPS AND STRAINERS
Lavatory basins, water closets, and urinals shall be fitted with suitable traps with water seals. The collection
point in toilet room floor, collecting the waste water shall be fitted with 10mm cast iron strainer with 4.76mm
to 6mm wide slits and 10mm wide ribs and provided with a flat-bottom trap (trap is a separate item).
The rain water stacks shall have 300mm dia C.I. M.S. sheet Bell-mouth circular cone with 6mm thick C.I.
hemispherical grating of M.S. Rod mesh at the top. (Bell-mouth circular cone and Hemispherical Grating are
payable under separate items).
If for some unavoidable reasons, flat strainers are used with prior approval of the Employer, the available inlet
area shall be double the pipe area. The strainer shall be firmly secured to the pipe by means of bell and spigot
joints or 4 nos. nuts and bolts of 6mm dia. The thickness of cast iron strainers shall be 6mm; the strainer holes
shall not be more than 12mm long, its width shall be more than 9mm but less than 8mm; the width of metal
between holes shall not be less than 6mm.
7.
ANTI-SIPHON/VENT PIPE
Anti-siphon pipe or by-pass vent pipe shall be used to serve water closets which drains to a soil stack serving
water closets in a higher floor(s). The anti-siphon pipe shall be connected to the soil pipe at least 0.76M above
the highest floor served by the soil stack.
Works, Page No. 36
8.
VERTICAL EXTENSION OF STACKS

The soil stack, vent stack and waste water stack shall be carried to at least 0.61M above roof finish work, unless
otherwise shown in the Drawings.
9.
BRANCH DRAIN PIPE AT FLOOR LEVELS

If the water from lavatory, wash basin, kitchen sink or bath tub is not connected to a waste stack or inspection
pit directly but, drained through a floor trap, 50mm dia C.I. pipe laid at a slope 1:50 shall be used as branch
drain pipes unless otherwise specified or approved. These pipes shall be embedded in the floor slab which may
be thickened for this purpose. The extra thickness of floor slab on this account will be paid for under the item of
floor slab, prior authorization of the Employer shall be secured in the matter.
10.
PIPES TO BE CONCEALED
All work shall be concealed and embedded in wall, floor, roof and below grade or ground unless otherwise
specified. The routing of the plumbing lines concealed in the building must precede simultaneous with the
construction of masonry work phase by phase. In the straight reaches in brick walls, the alternative of leaving a
recess in the wall of future insertion of the pipe may be allowed.
Access and inspection doors and covers shall be provided in all bends and junctions. These covers shall be
neatly provided and housed in the surface of the wall opposite to one facing the pipe.
In brick walls, the pipes shall be surrounded by concrete in 1:2:4 at least 38mm thick, all around them, the
coarse aggregate of the concrete being 10mm down size of Jhama brick chips and fine aggregate is medium
sand. All pipes except G.I. pipes less than 38mm dia when embedded in walls, shall be located in the Midthickness of wall unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings.
11.
PIPES TO BE SUPPORTED
If a pipe is embedded in wall with insufficient cover (less than 38mm) or if it is carried exposed, it shall be
supported by clamps and nails/nuts and bolts according to approved designs/methods. The distance between
supports shall not exceed 0.91M and the strength of each anchore shall not be less than that of a 10mm Ubolt.
12.
PROVISION OF LINTELS
If holes or grooves or partial pulling down of masonry or concrete work requires, according to the advice of the
Employer a lintel above it shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. The design and details of lintel
shall be as prepared or approved by the Consultant.
13.
EXCAVATION
Excavation of trenches for drains shall be made true to drawing and gradient. Over-excavation shall be avoided.
If over-excavation is done, this shall be filled up by the Contractor at his own cost with 1:5:7 cement concrete
in jhama chips and medium sand. If during excavation existing utility lines are exposed they shall be well
secured according to Employer's instruction. Care shall be taken for securing the utility lines and it will be paid
for separately. The width of the trench shall be at least 0.36M grater than the diameter of the pipe. Any shoring
Works, Page No. 37
and dewatering required during excavation shall be done at the Contractor's own cost. Before laying the pipes,
inspection and approval of the Employer shall be sought and secured by the Contractor.
All excavated materials shall be deposited away from the edge of the trance keeping at least 0.46M margin
concrete bedding of the pipes and joints and filling of the trench shall not commence till the drain pipes are
inspected and approved by the Employer. A depth of 0.30M above the top of the pipes shall be filled by hand
packing of selected soil out of the spoils. It shall be watered liberally and compacted with great care.
In selecting the soil for filling, all lump and clods larger then 25mm size shall be powdered or avoided. The
filling above this 0.30M shall be done in the usual way as specified under side filling of trenches. If grass
covered soil is removed during excavation of trenches. If grass covered soil is removed during excavation of
trenches, the top grass-bearing layer shall be separately preserved and replaced after filling the trench and
nursed till the original grass cover is restored and this work of preservation of grass top and re-laying will not
be paid for separately, its cost being deemed to have been included in the rate for pipe laying, surplus spoils of
excavation shall be disposed according to the instruction of the Employer but if the lead exceeds 152.44M
and/or if the materials is used for compacted fill, it shall be paid for as an item for excavation and/or compacted
fill.
14.
BENDS AND JUNCTION
No bend or junction shall be used in the buried drain pipes except at inspection chambers. All junctions shall be
oblique.
15.
TESTING
Immediately after the drains are laid and jointed but before bedding in concrete they shall be inspected, tested
and passed by the Employer as satisfactory. The testing shall be done by water pressure for a head 3.05M more
than the highest point. Testing may be done section by section. The drain shall not be walked over before
concrete bedding is placed.
16.
BEDDING AND ENCASING DRAIN PIPES
The trench bottom shall be rammed and compacted to the satisfaction of the Employer. The drain pipes shall be
laid and supported on false supports. The jointing shall then be done and after the pipe network is tested under
pressure and approved by the Employer the concrete bed in 1:2:4 using 18mm down jhama brick chips and
medium sand shall be placed. The width of the bed at the bottom will be 350mm wider than the internal
diameter of the pipe.
The side slopes will joint the edge of the bottom of concrete bed and the pipe tangentially. The depth of
concrete bed shall be 100mm minimum below the pipe and shall be increased at joints as needed to maintain
100mm minimum from socket surface. The concrete bed shall be cured for 10 days
Particulars Specifications, Page No. 1
SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 8A: CIVIL WORKS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
1.0
GENERAL
This specification has been prepared with all possible care and diligence and every effort has been made
to cover all types of materials and items of works necessary to complete the Project in all respect.
All workmanship and materials to be used in the Works shall be of the best quality of their respective
kinds as specified herein. All materials used in the Works shall be new and obtained from the sources and
suppliers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials shall comply strictly with the requirements
prescribed hereinafter or, where such requirements are not specified in this specification, the latest issues
of the relevant Technical Standard shall be followed. All tests of materials shall be done from the
laboratory (ies) designated by the Engineer -in-Charge. The accuracy and sufficiency of information
furnished in this specification is not guaranteed It is the responsibility of the Contractor to clear any
confusion or ambiguity in this specification well ahead of submission of bid. In case of any missing item
relevant standard specification shall be followed.
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1
CEMENT
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to the requirements of the Standard Specifications
for Portland cement Type-I. ASTM C-150 or BDS '232:1993 (2' ` ' U Revision) unless otherwise specified.
Cement shall conform to the following standards as per BDS 232:1993 (2 n'' Revision) and ASTM C109,
C191, C204.
a). Water for normal consistency
26% to 33%
: Minimum 280 sqm/kg (by air permeability method)

i).
Initial setting time. ASTM C191
ii).
Final setting time. ASTM C191
: Not less than 45 min.

: Not more than 375 min.
c). Minimum compressive strength

i).
3 days
ii).
7 days
iii).28 days (optional)
: 12.4 Mpa (1800 psi)

:19.3 Mpa (2800 psi)
: 27.6 Mpa (4000 psi)
d). Minimum compressive strength

i).
3 days
:12.4 Mpa (1800 psi)
ii).
7 days
:19.3 Mpa (2800 psi)
iii).28 days (optional)
:27.6 Mpa (4000 psi)
Cement shall be delivered in packages as packed by the Manufacturer with the brand name, type of
cement and weight of each bag marked on the bag. Sample test must be
done from the laboratory designated by the [Engineer in Charge. two bags, from each, or each
consignment of supply of 25 metric tons of cement shall be selected for testing.
2.2
BRICK
Common building clay bricks shall conform to BDS 208:1980 (First Revision).
Bricks shall be manufactured from combination of clay mixed with silica sand and alumina and shall be
uniformly burnt throughout. Bricks shall be kiln burnt.
2.2.1
First Class Bricks
First Class Bricks shall comply with the following requirements of BDS 208:1980 Building Clay Bricks
First Revision)
a).
Bricks shall be of machine mould/, uniform color/, shape and size having " square sides and
edges and parallel faces.
b).
Bricks shall be sound, hard and well burnt homogeneous in texture and free flaws and cracks.
c).
Bricks shall emit a clear metallic sound when struck with a small hammer brick. A fractured
surface shall show a uniform compact structure free from lumps, grits or holes.
d).
A first class brick shall not absorb more than 1/6th of its dry weight when immersed in water
for 24 hours.
e).
A first class brick shall not break when struck against another brick or when. at T-position on
hard ground from a height of about 1.2 meter.
f).
Standard dimension of bricks shall be 240 x 115 x 70mm (9 1 /2"x4 1 /2''x2. 3 /4")
g).
Allowable variations in dimensions shall be:
i).
in length not more than 6mm
ii).
in breadth not more than 5mm
iii).
in height not more than 1.5mm
h).Unit weight of bricks shall be minimum 1100 kg/cum
i). Minimum compressive strength of bricks shall be for
i).
halved bricks (mean of 12 bricks) : 28 Mpa (4000 psi)
ii).
Individual brick : 21.1 Mpa (3000 psi)
j). range of efflorescence for a first class brick shall be slight to nil.
2.2.2
Picked Jhama Bricks
Picked Jhama Bricks shall be over-burnt First Class Bricks. uniformly vitrified throughout : with good
shape, hard, slightly black in color. and without cracks or spongy areas Minimum compressive strength
shall not be less than 28N/mm 2 (4000 psi).
ama e x c e p t dimensions.
2.2.3
Perforated Bricks
Perforated bricks shall meet the f o l l o w i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s '

a).
Minimum unit weight
b).
Minimum compressive strength on gross area:
i).
Multi-core brick
ii).
10-Hole engineering brick
iii).
Maximum size of perforation
3 . 0 0 kg/brick by Minimum
: 70 kg/sq.cm
: 210 kg/sq.cr'
:
25
sq.mm
c).
Minimum number of perforation
i) Along width of brick
ii). Along length of brick
d).
Minimum wall thickness
i).
Between brick edge and perforation
ii).
Between adjacent perforations
e).
Maximum water absorption
i).
5 hrs, boiling
ii).
Efflorescence
2
6
10mm
10mm
20 % of dry wt.
Nil
Dimensions (3mm) 24cm x 1 1 cm x 7cm (9 '11/2" x 4 '11/2" x 2 3/4 " )

The perforations may he of any regular shape in cross section. In case of rectangular section the larger
dimension shall be parallel to length of the brick. Dimension of perforation measured parallel to the
plane of the shorter side shall not be more than 15cm except in case o f circular shape of the
perforation in which case it may be allowed up to 20cm. Total area of perforation shall not exceed
45% of the total area of corresponding face of the brick.
2.2.4 Clinker Bricks
Clinker bricks or tiles shall meet the following requirement:
Minimum unit weight
Minimum compressive strength
Minimum modulus of rupture
Water absorption 5 hrs. boiling
Efflorescence
:200mm x 100mm x 5mm
(8"x 4"x2")
:2 kg/brick
:560 kg/sq.cm (8000 psi)
:12 kg/sq.cm (600 psi)
:12%-15% of dry wt.
:Nil
Clinker bricks shall be manufactured by dry process and burnt to a higher temperature and shall be
uniformly vitrified to a dark copper tone. Edges shall be square, straight and sharply defined.
2.3
SAND
Sand shall conform to BDS 243:1963. ASTM C33

Sand shall be either natural sand, composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles resulting from
the disintegration of siliceous and/or calcareous rocks; or manufactured sand resulting from the
crushing of boulders or shingle.
Sand shall be clean and free of injurious amounts of organic impurities; deleterious substances shall
not exceed the following percentages by weight:
Clay Lumps and friable particles - maximum
3%
Coal and Lignite
0.25%
Material passing the 0.075mm (No 200) sieve
1%
Shale, coal, soft or flaky fragments
1%
Sulfur compounds
0.3%
Organic material content
no organic material
Sand shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to the following Fineness Modulus.
[4]
Concrete
2.5
(Two point five)
Mortar
1.5
1.5
(One point five)

(One point five)
Filling sand
1.0
(One point zero)
0.8
(Zero point ight)
Sand
from
different
sources of supply shall not be mixed and stored in the same stockpile nor used alternately in the
work without permission from the Engineer-in-Charge
2.4
COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall conform to BDS 243.1963 (Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete 1; ASTM C 33: Concrete Aggregates).
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall not be larger than:
a). One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms; or
b). One- third the depth of slabs; or
c). Three- fourth the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires,
bundles of bars, or prestressing tendons or ducts.
2.4.1Boulder
The boulders to be used for coarse aggregate in concrete shall be composed of limestone, sandstone,
granite, trap rock or rock of similar nature and shall have the following properties:
Compressive strength (minimum)
35 Mpa (5000 psi)
Specific gravity
2.2-2.6
Unit weights
22-25.1 kn./cum
Porosity
2.10%
Water absorption (maximum)
2.5% by wt
The boulder shall be of uniform light color as approved and shall be free of thin laminations. adherent
coatings, and deleterious substances, The wear loss of co arse aggregate of a types shall not exceed
35% by weight when tested by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test.
2.5
WATER
The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be tested for chlorides and sulphates in a
standard material-testing laboratory as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The maximum acceptable
limits shall be as follows:
1000 mg/I as SO 3 for sulphates
500 mg/I as CI ion for chloride
Water shall be clear and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substances injurious to the
finished product. Water used in construction work shall be potable
2.6
ADMIXTURES
Admixtures used for the purpose of modifying the normal plastic life of concrete mix or for
influencing its rate of gaining hardness and strength or for the workability of concret e shall not be
used except with the written approval of the Engineer -in-Charge.
[5]
Admixture if specified or permitted shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO standard

Specification M-194/ASTM, C-494 or ASTM C-1017.
It shall be kept in mind that a small change in the amount of Admixture may cause great: change in
their action and their adequacy of performance is difficult to measure at hi construction site during
the progress of work. Water reducing admixture, accelerating admixture, water reducing and
retarding admixtures, water-reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C -494
(Chemical Admixtures for Concrete of ASTM 1017 (chemical admixtures for 1017 . (Chemical
Admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete).
2.7
REINFORCING BAR
High tensile steel reinforcing bar shall be structural grade deformed bar specified as per ASTM A615M, and
BDS 1313: 91- Cars having minimum yield levels of 275 Mpa (40,000 psi) and 415 Mpa (60,000 psi) are
designated as Grade 40 and Grade 60 respectively. High tensile steel reinforcing bars shall meet the following
strength test requirements;
Properties
Yield strength (minimum)
Grade 40
275 Mpa
(40000 psi)
483 Mpa
Ultimate strength (minimum)

(70000 psi)
2.7.1
620 Mpa
(90000 psi)
Tolerance on Mass
Nominal size
(mm)
Upto 7
8 to 12 __ + 6.0
Over 12
2.7.2
Grade 60
415 MPA
(60000 psi)
Tolerance of mass per

metre run (%)
+ 8.0
+ 4.5
Tolerance on Diameter
Tolerance in diameter for both plain and deformed bars shall not exceed 2.5% for 12mm and less size and 1.8%
for sizes larger than 12 mm.
2.7.3
Tensile Requirements
Tensile strength, min.

psi
Yield strength min. psi
Elongation in 8 in.
min. %
Bar nos.
3 (10 mm)
4, 5, 6 (12; 16, 20 mm)
7, 8 (22, 25 mm)
9,10(28,32mm)
1 1 , 14, 18 (35. 45
57 mm)
Grade 40
70000
Grade 60
90000
40000
60000
9
9
8
7
7
[6]
2.7.4
Bending Requirements
The bend-test specimen shall withstand being bent around a pin without cracking on the outside of the bent
portion. The requirements for degree of bending and sizes of pins are prescribed in Table 3 Bend Test
Requirement.
The bend test shall be made on specimens of sufficient length to ensure free bendin g
and with apparatus which
Continuous and uniform application of force throughout the duration of the bending operation.
Unrestricted movement of the specimen at points of contact with the apparatus and bending around
a pin free to rotate.
Close wrapping of the specimen around the pin during the bending operation.
Bend Test Requirements
Bar Designation No.
Pin diameter for Bend Test "A

Grade 60
3 '1/2d '
5d
5d
7d
7d
9d
3, 4, 5
6
7, 8
9, 10
11
14, 18 (90)
Grade 40
3 '1/2d
5d
-----
A. Test bends 180 unless noted otherwise.

B. d=nominal diameter of specimen
Table -3
2.7.5.
Frequency of Tensile, Bend, Rebend testing

Nominal size of bar
(mm)
Under 10
10 to 16
20 to 32
Value of x (Quality of materials in tonnes)

Tensile test
25
35
45
Bend test
50
70
90
Rebend test
50
70
90
For the specified tests sample length shall be 600mm long or 20 times nominal size whichever is
greater. Sample shall be selected from each batch a frequency of not less than one per x tonnes or
part thereof where x has the value give in the above table. Samples from the bend and rebend tests
shall not be selected from the same bar.
2.7.6
Cross Sectional Area and Mass

[7]
Mass
(kg/m)
0.222
Nominal size
6 mm
8 mm
- --------10
mm 12 mm
0.395
0.616
0.888
Cross sectional
area ( m m 2 )
28.30
50.30
78.50
113.00
113.00
201.00
16mm
1.579
20 mm
2.466
22 mm
2.980
380.00
25 mm
3.854
491.00
28 mm
32 mm
4.830
6.313
314.00
616.00
804.00
All steel bars prior to its use ';shall be cleaned with wire brush to make it free from loose scale.
dirt, paint. oil, grease or other foreign substances.
All reinforcing steel shall be stored properly under shed not to be contaminated by oil, grease or mud.
2.7.7
Requirement for Deformation in Reinforcing Steel

The reqirement of deformation shall meet ASTM A615.
a). Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The deformations on
opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape.
b). The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that th e included angle is not
less than 45 deg. Where the line of deformations forms an included angle with the axis of the bar
of from 45 to 70 deg. inclusive, the deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each
side, or those on one side shall be reversed in direction from those on the opposite side. Where the
line of deformation is over 70 deg. a reversal in direction is not required
c).
The average spacing or distance between deformations on each side of the bar shall not exceed
seventeenths of the nominal diameter of the bar.
d). The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the ends of the deformations
on opposite sides of the bar shall not exceed 12.5% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. Where the
ends terminate in a longitudinal rib. The width of the longitudinal rib shall be considered the gap.
Where more than two longitudinal ribs are involved, the total width of all longitudinal ribs shall not
exceed 25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. Furthermore, the summation of gaps shall not
exceed 25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be 3.14
times the nominal diameter.
e).
The spacing/height and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1
of ASTM A615.
f).
Any bar that fails to satisfy the above requirements is to be treated as plain reinforcement according
to ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 318-95
[8]
Measurement
i)
The average spacing of deformations shall be determined by dividing a measured length of the bar
specimen by the number of individual deformations on any one side of the bar specimen. A
measured length of the bar specimen shall be considered the distance from a point on a deformation
to a corresponding point on any other deformation on the same side of the bar
ii)
The average height of deformations shall be determined from measurements made on not less than
two typical deformations.
Deformations shall be based on three measurements per deformations, one at the centre of the over-all length
and the other two at the quarter points of the over-all length.
2.8
TIMBER FOR DOORS/ WINDOWS
Timber for doors shall conform to BDS 142:1961 specification for Wood Doors (under revision): BDS
820:1978, Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture content of timber used for different purpose in
Bangladesh.
Timber used for doorframe and leaf shall be well-seasoned, dry and straight grained, free from knots and other
defects affecting its appearance, strength and durability. All timbers used for doors/windows shall be
mechanically seasoned and the moisture content shall not be more than 12-13%.
2.9
ALUMINIUM SECTIONS
All Aluminum Sections shall conform to U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association Standards
(AAMA).
The following are the standards to be followed for Aluminum doors, windows and curtain walls or as specified
in Bill of Quantity:
Channel
:
Channel
thickness
thickness
for
for
Anodization
:
Density
of anodization
:
doors
1.8 2.5mm
windows
1.2 1.8mm
thickness
15 microns
: 4mg per sqm
2.10
M. S. PIPE
M.S. pipe shall be made from low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53 and followin g { physical
requirements:
Nominal
Pipe
Diameter
Schedule
No.
100mm
150 mm
40
60
Wall
I Thickness
6mm
7 mm
[9]
Inside
Diameter
Outside
Diameter
102.3mm
154.0 mm
114.4 mm
168.3
mm
Weight/ft
4.90 kg
8.60 kg
2.11
UPVC PIPE
UPVC pipe shall be of Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) and shall conform to the following
specifications:
Specific Gravity
: 1.36 1.43
Tensile strength
: 450Kgf/Cm2 560Kgf/Cm2
Elongation
: 80%
Compressive Strength
: 600-700 Kgf/Cm2
No minal size
Diameter (mm)
Inch
2.00"
3.00"
4.00"
5.00"
6.00"
8.00"
(mm)
100
125
150
200
Moan o utside
Min
50 60.17
75 88.70
114.07
141.05
168.00
218.70 219A6
Sched ule 40
Schedule 80
Wall Thickness (mm) 1 Wall Thickness (mm)
Max
60.47
89.10
114.53
141.55
168.56
8.18
Min
3.91
5.49
6.02
6.55
7.11
9.17
Max
4.42
6.15
6.73
7.34
7.79
12.70
Min
5.54
7.62
8.56
9.52
10.97
14.22
Max
6.20
8.53
9.58
10.66
12.29
2.12 WHITE CEMENT

It shall be made from pure calcite lime stone and have the same physical properties as that of
Portland cement Type 1 ASTM C-150.
Cao
Sio
Al 2 0 3
Fe 2 0 3
Mg
SO 3
- 65.0%
- 25.056%
- 5.9%
- 0.6%
-1.1%
- 0.1%
2.13 MARBLE CHIPS

Marble chips shall be white in color and shall be of size No. 2 -3 (retained on screens 6mm and
10mm mesh). The chips shall be of uniform color and texture and shall be made from white marble
stone, a calcareous metamorphic rock. which is capable of being polished and have following
properties:
560 840 kg/sq.cm (8000-12000 psi)
Specific Gravity
2.72
[10]
Unit Weight
3.0
2560 2760 kg/cum (60-170 per Cft)
CIVIL WORKS
3.01 Mobilization and Preparation of Site

The Contractor has to make all mobilization and preparation o f site as described in Sub-section
1.1.5 of Section 7.0 (General Specifications) this document.
3.02 Establishment of Contractor's Facilities
The site facilities required for the work are described in Suh-section 1.2 of Section 7.0 (General
Sp ecificatio n) o f this Document.
3.03 General and Sundry Obligations
These are described in Sub-section 1.3 of Section 7.0 (General Sp ecificatio n s) this d ocument
3.04 REINFORCED CONCRETE CAST-IN-SITU BORED PILES
3.04.1 Description
This work shall consist of constructing reinforced concrete cast -in-situ bored piles for column
foundations as per drawing and specifications and to provide all labour, materials, equipment
including boring & testing equipments and incidentals necessary to complete the work as per
direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.04.2
Materials
3.04.2.1
Concrete
The concrete for cast-in-situ pile shall be manufactured as per Section 3.13 of concrete C19 with a
minimum proportion 1:1.5:3 having a minimum concrete strength of 19 Mpa at 28 days. The
concrete shall be placed by using a tremie pipe as per section 3.12 of concrete C19. The tremie pipe
shall be sufficiently long to reach the bottom level of the pile and gradually withdraw as the placing
of the concrete proceeds.
3.04.2.2 Reinforcing Steel
Steel bars used as reinforcement fore cast -in-situ concrete piles shall meet the requirements of
section 3.15. The reinforcing bars for each pile shall be assembled on the ground and spiral bar will
be tack welded with alternative main bar of the pile to form a rigid cage. Lapping of vertical
reinforcement shall be tack welded as per drawing or BOQ or as directed. Binding with galvanized
iron wire shall not be allowed where welding is specified. Concrete spacer blocks shall be used in
adequate member to hold the the reinforcement in position and to ensure that the specified concrete
cover is maintained throughout.
3.04.2.3 Welding
[11]
i
a) Electrodes: All welding electrodes shall conform to American Welding Society (AWS standards
and the electrodes shall be rods of size and classification number as, recommended by their
manufacturers.
b) Quality: Welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed by skilled and experiences welders and the
connections shall be made in accordance with the AWS stan dards.
3.04.2.4 Casings
Temporary casing shall be of steel, smooth, clean, watertight and of ample strength to withstand
both handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both concrete and the! surrounding earth
materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not be less than the specified size of the shaft.
Casings which are required to be incorporated as part of the permanent work shall conform:, to the
Specification AS T M A36, Grade 36 unless otherwise specified.
3.04.3 Construction
3.04.3.1 General
The basic length of pile, its diameter and arrangement is shown in drawings. The final length and
arrangement shall be decided by the Engineer -in-Charge on the basis of study of the result of
preliminary load test on piles. The diameter of pile shall be not less than the specified and as shown
on the drawings.
3.04.3.2 Setting Out of Piles
The contractor shall set out position of each pile at the site and agree it with the Engineer -inCharge. However, agreement of the Engineer -in-Charge shall not relieve the Contractor from his
responsibility for correct setting out of the piles at the site.
3.04.3.3 Preparation
Before starting the drilling operation the Contractor shall establish levels, grades and alignment of
all piles with reference to bench marks (BM) previously established at the site. The Contractor
shall have all casing pipes and reinforcing bars fabircate d as per design and ready for lowering
after the completion of drilling. All necessary equipment such as piling rigs, pumps, welding sets,
etc. and materials for concrete work including tremie pipe shall be made available before the start of
the drilling operation.
3.04.3.4 Method of Boring
The hole shall be bored by direct mud circulation method by using bentonite as drilling fluid for
cast-in-situ piles or as per method submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer -inCharge.
The guide pipe shall be installed at the surface and thereafter boring shall be executed by means a
[12]
chisel attached at the end of drilling rods. The bore hole shall be filled with drilling slurry, which
circulates through the drilling rods and the chisel at the base. Bec ause of high viscosity, (specific
gravity being 1.2 to 1.3) the bentonite slurry stabilizes the side of bore hole and in addition the
hydrostatic head due to higher specific gravity does not allow the bore -hole to collapse, and also
the back flows of water into the bore-hole should be avoided. Further the bentonite form a thin film
on the side and acts as a further protection against caving -in.
For preparing the slurry only good quality bentonite shall be used and whenever the viscosity of
slurry shall drop due to concentration of cuttings in the slurry, additional bentonite shall be added
to maintain the requisite viscosity. The density of the bentonite solution should be about 1.12. Once
the bore-hole has been drilled down to the final depth, fresh benton ite slurry from a reserve tank
shall be pumped through the bore-hole for approximately 10minutes so that the previous
cotaminated slurry is completely removed and the bore -hole is also throughly cleaned and all the
cuttings from the base are removed. Only when the bore-hole is completely filled with fresh slurry
free from all cuttings the circulation of fresh bentonite shall be stopped.
3.04.3.5 Li mit a t io n of Boring Sequence
No boring operations shall take nearer than 2.50m from any piles for which concreting operations
are in progress or from any nev . ily completed pile until at least five days have elapsed from the last
concreting operation on that pile. Where there are more than 4 (four) piles in a cluster, the centre
pile shall be installed first. The piles in a cluster shall be of the same depth.
3.04.3.6 Samples and Boring Logs
Two soil samples shall be taken from the bottom 300mm in each borehole and shall preserved in
sealed and adequately leveled glass until personally inspected by the Engineer-in-Charge that
shall then issue instructions regarding the further disposal of these samples.
3.04.3.7 Tolerance for Drilling Holes
Bores shall be accurately drilled in the locations shown in the contract drawings. All p shall be
drilled with a lateral tolerance o f not more than 75mm from the point specified. Pi e that deviate
more than 75mm in lateral location or piles whose slope deviates from vertical by more than 2%
(two percent) shall be rejected. Additional piles shall then furnished and in stalled by the
Contractor in such locations as the Engineer -in-Charge ma direct. All costs of such additional
piles required to suit changed pile locations shall be b o r n by the Contractor.
3.04.3.8 O b s t r u ct io n s During Drilling

[13]
When obstructions make it extremely difficult to drill certain holes in the location shown a to
reach the proper bearing strata the Contractor shall take all usual methods to install : piles as
required including jetting, cutting, drilling or other feasible means. If in judgement o f the
Engineer-in-Charge the Contractor is unable to complete properly any by resorting to such
methods the Engineer-in-Charge may order for additional pile(s) dr at another location(s) at the
Contractor's expense.
3.04.3.9 Depth of Holes
The depth of holes shall be checked by the Engineer -in-Charge by lowering a suite device.
Immediately after approval of the bore the reinforcement cage shall be lowered. Contractor shall
have available a suitable light for inspection of each bore througho..: entire len gth.
3.04.3.10 Placing of Reinforcement
Before placing the concrete in the bore -holes, reinforcement as per design & drawing be placed.
The reinforcement for each pile shall be assembled on the ground and spiral will be tack welded
with alternative main bar of the pile to form a ridig cage. Lapping vertical reinforcement shall be
joint welding as per drawing or as per schedule of items directed by the Engineer -in-Charge.
Binding with galvanzed iron wire shall not be where welding is specified. Concrete sp acer blocks
specially prepared for this purpose be securely attached to the reinforcement at a suitable spacing
in such a manner as ensure that the concrete cover is maintained throughout and that the
reinforcement ca:= not displaced in the caseing in the course of the subsequent concrete
operations. '. particullar care shall be taken to ensure that none of these spacer blocks can swivel
are to the inside of the reinforcement cage and that, in general, there are no obstructions c = kind
inside the reinforcement cage due to spacer blocks or lapped reinforcement c -other reason. The
entire reinforcement cage assembly shall than be carefully lifter carefully lowered into the bore hole previously made ready to receive it as desc ribed previously.
When bore-holes have been thoroughly cleaned and fresh bentonite sluury circulated for
approximately 10 to 50 minutes : the reinforcement eage then Wall he introduced into the bore-hole.
3.04.3.11 Placing of Concrete
No concrete shall be placed until all driving within a radius of 2.5m has been completed, not until
all the shells for any one bent have been completely driven. If this cannot be done, all driving
within the above limits shall be discontinued until the concrete in the last pile cast has set at least
four days or in sequence approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. Accumulation of any foreign material
in the bores or casings shall be removed before concrete is placed.
[14]
The concrete shall be placed by means of tremie pipe. The 203.2mm (8") dia tremie pipes shall be
placed in the bore-hole so that thay are about 304.8mm (1feet) above the base of the hole. A funnel
shall be fixed on the top of the tremie pipes and concrete shall be introduced into the funnel by
means of concrete bucket. In this way, the concrete will flow through the funnel and the tremie
pipes to the bottom of the bore-hole and from there it will rise up in the bore -hole itself flowing out
of the base of the tremie pipes. It shall be ensured that that the 203.2mm (8") dia pipe s are always
at least 1828.8mm to 2438.4mm (6' to 8') within the concrete, so that the fresh concrete is always
added in the concrete and in this way the concrete will rise to the required surface and concreting of
the pile completed.
3.04.3.12 Casings
Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains workable. Generally the removal of
temporary casing shall not be started until concrete placement in the shaft is at or above ground
surface. Movement of the casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and tapping to facilitate
extraction with a vibratory hammer will not be permitted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow,
uniform rate with the pull in line with the shaft axis.
A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the casing to overcome the
hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling fluid outside of the casing.
3.04.3.13 Slurry
Slurry used in the drilling process shall be a mineral slurry. The slurry shall have both a mineral
grain size that will remain in suspe nsion and sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to transport
excavated material to a suitable screening system. The percentage and specific gravity of the
material used to make the suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of the exca vation
and to allow proper concrete placement. The level of the slurry shall be maintained at a height
sufficient to prevent caving of the hole.
The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and adequate time allotted
for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry tanks will be provided
as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. No excavated slurry pits will be allowed when slurry tanks
are required on the project without written permission of the Engine er-in-Charge. Adequate
descending equipment will be required as directed by the Engineer -in-Charge. Steps shall be taken
as necessary to prevent the slurry from "setting up" in the shaft excavation, such as, agitation.
circulation, and adjusting the properties of the slurry.
Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor on the
[15]
mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity and pH. An acceptable range of values for those
physical properties is shown in the following table.
Range of Values (at 20 C)
Property (Units)
Time Slurry
Time of Concerning
Test Method
Introduction
(In Hole)
Density (kg/m 3 )
1030 to 1110
1013 to 1200
Density Balance
Viscosity (Sec.)
28 to 45
28 to 45
Marsh Cone
Per quarter_pH
8 to 11
8 to 11
p " paper or
3
a) Increase density values by 32 kg/m in salt water
b) If descending is required: sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by volume) at
any point in the shaft excavation as determined by the American Petroleum
Institute sand content test.
Tests to determine density, viscosity and p " values shall be done during the shaft excavation to
establish a consistent working pattern.
Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom and at: intervals not
exceeding 3 m for the full height of slurry. Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at
the bottom of the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification
requirements immediately before shaft concrete placement.
3.04.4 Measurement and Payment
The cast-in-situ bored pile of the required size shall be paid separately for boring a n : j concreting
as per contract unit price shown in the schedule of items of works and shall be the full
compensation for providing all materials, labour, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
the work. Reinforcing steel & its fabrication and weldi ng shall be p a l : separately as per contract
unit price of the respective item. Permanent steel casing pipe shall be paid separately only if shown
as separate items in the schedule of items of work. No payment will be made for rejected pile.
3.04.5 Pile Load Test

3.04.5.1 General
[16]
This section deals with the testing of a pile by the application of an axial load or force. i) covers
vertical piles tested in compression.
3.04.5.1.1 Def init io ns
a) Allowable load:
The load which may be safely applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimately
bearing capacity, negative friction, pile spacing, overall bearing capacity of t o ground
below and allowable settlement.
b) Compression pile:
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to penetrel further
into the ground.
c) Kentledge:
The dead weight used in a loading test
d) Maintained load test:

A loading test in which each increment of load is held constant either for a defined period
of time or until the rate of movement (settlement or uplift) falls to a specified value.
e) Preliminary load test pile:

A pile installed before the commencement of the main piling works or a specific part of the
works for the purpose of establishing the suitability of the chosen type of pile and for
confirming its design, dimensions and baring capacity.
f)
Proof load:
A load applied to a selected pile to confirm that it is suitable for the load at the settlement
specified. A proof load should not normally exceed 200% o f the working load on a working
test pile. For preliminary load test pile proof load shall be 300% of working load or failure
load which reaches early.
g) Reaction system:
The arrangement of kentledge, piles. anchors or rafts that provides a resistance against
which the pile is tested.
h) Tension pile:
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to be extracted from
the ground.
i)
Test pile:
[17]
Any pile to which a test loading is or is to be applied.

j)
Ultimate bearing capacity:

The load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilized.
k) Working load:
The load which the pile is designed to carry.
l)
Working pile:
One of the piles forming the foundation of a structure.
3 .0 4.5 .1 .2 Supervision
All test shall be carried out under the direction of an experienced and competent supervisor
conversant with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel operating the test equipment
shall have been trained in its use.
3.04.5.1.3 Safety Precautions
3.04.5.1.3.1
General
When preparing for, conducting and dismantling a pile test the Contractor shall carry out the
requirement of the various regulations and other statutory requirements that are applicable to the
work for the provision and maintenance of safe working conditions, a nd shall in addition make
such other provision as may be necessary to safeguard against any hazards that are involved in
the testing or preparations for testing.
3.04.5.1.3.2 Kentledge
Where kentledge is used, the Contractor shall construct the foundatio ns for the kentledge and any
crib work, beams or other supporting structure in such a manner that there will nor be differential
settlement, bending or deflexion of an amount that . constitutes a hazard to safety or impairs the
efficiency of the operation. The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held
together to prevent it falling apart, or becoming unstable because of deflection of the supports.
The weight of kentlege shall be greater than the maximum test load and if the weight is esti mated
from the density and volume of the constituent materials an adequate factor of safety against
error shall be allowed.
3.04.5.1.3.3 Tension Piles and Ground Anchors
Where tension piles or ground anchors are used, the Contractor shall ensure that the load is
[18]
correctly transmitted to all the rods or bolts. The extension of rods by wielding shall not be
permitted unless it is known that the steel will not be reduced in strength by welding. The bond
stresses of the rods in tension shall not exceed normal permissible bond stresses for the type of
steel and grade of concrete used. At any circumstances working pile shall not be allowed to use as
tension pile.
3.04.5.1.3.4 Testing Equipment
In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device
are mounted on the pile head, the whole system shall be stable up to the maximum load to be
applied. Means shall be provided to enable dial gauges to be read fr om a position clear of the
kentledge stack or test frame in conditions where failure in an part of the system due to
overloading, buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure and so on might constitute a hazard to personnel.
The hydraulic jack, pump, houses, pipe s, couplings and other apparatus to be operated under
hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 1.5 tirnes the maximum
working pressure without leaking.
The maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shat, be
displayed and all operators shall be aware of this limit.
3.04.5.1.4 C o n st r u ct i o n of a Pile for Preliminary Load Test
3.04.5.1.4.1
General
At lest one preliminary pile load test shall be completed before construction of any working pile.
The Contractor shall allow one week after the last load test for the analysis of the load
test data by the Engineer-in-Charge before specified pile tip elevations will be provided for working
piles.
The location of load test piles shall be decided b y the Engineer-in-Charge. Proposal for reaction
piles or kentledge and test equipments shall be submitted by the Contractor for Engineer -in-Charge
approval.
The preliminary load test pile shall be subjected a load of three times the working load capacity or
upto failure which ever is less. The sequence of loading will be as stipulated in Table - 1.
After testing is completed, the test piles and reaction piles (if any) shall be cut off at an elevation
900 mm below the finished ground surface. Kentledge and other assembly to be , removed and the
surrounding areas to be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge. The portion of the
shafts cut off shall be disposed off by the Contractor.
[19]
3.04.5.1.4.2 Notice of Construction
The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge at least 48 hours notice of the commencement of
construction of any preliminary load test pile.
3.04.5.1.4.3 Method of Construction
Each preliminary load test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be used fo r the
construction of the working piles, and by the use of similar equipment and material. Any variation
shall only be permitted with prior approval of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Extra reinforcement and concrete of increased strength shall be permitted in th e shafts of

preliminary load test piles at the discretion of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.4.4 B o r i n g or Driving Record
For each preliminary load test pile, a detailed record of the soils encountered during boring shall be
made and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge daily not later than noon of the next working day.
3.04.5.1.4.5 Cut Off Level

The pile shaft shall terminate at the normal cut -off level or at a level required by the Engineer -inCharge.
The pile shaft shall be extended where necessary so that gauges and other apparatus to be used in
the testing process are not damaged by water or falling debris.
3.04.5.1.4.6 Pile Head for Compression Tests
For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to give a plane surface
which is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to accommodate the loading and settlement
measuring equipment and adequately reinforced or projected to prevent damage from the
concentrated application of load from the loading equipment.
3.04.5.1.4.7 Preparation of a Working Pile to be Tested
If a test is required on a working pile the Contractor shall cut down or otherwise prepare the pile for
testing as required by the Engineer -in-Charge in accordance with the previous Clauses above.
[20]
3.04.5.1.5 Reaction Systems
3.04.5.1.5.1 Compression Tests
Compression tests shall be carried out using kentledge, tension piles or specially constru cted
anchorages as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge.
Where kentledge is to be used, it shall be supported on cribwork . disposed around the pile head so
that its centre of gravity is on the axis of the kentledge stack. kentledge shall not be carried directly
on the pile head, except when directed by the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.2 Spacing
Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance from the edge of
the test pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the kentledge stack in contact with the ground
shall be not be less than 2.5m.
The center to center spacing of vertical reaction piles from a test pile shalt be not less than three
times the diameter of the test pile or 3.0 m, whichever is greater.
3.04.5.1.5.3 Adequate Reaction
The size, length and number of the piles or anchors, or the area of rafts, shall be adequate to
transrnit the maximum test load to the ground in a safe manner without excessive disturbance or
influence on the test pile.
3.04.5.1.5.4 Care of Piles
The method employed in the installation of any reaction piles, anchors or rafts shall be such as to
prevent damage to any test pile or working pile.
3.04.5.1.5.5Loading Arrangement
The loading arrangement used shall be designed to transfer safely to the test pile the maximum
load required in testing. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer -in-Charge prior to any work
related to the testing process being carried out on the site.
3.04.5.1.5.6 Equipment f or Applying Load
The equipment used for applying load shall consist of one or more hydraulic rams or jacks The
total capacity of the jacks shall be at least equal to one and quarter times the requires maximum
load. The jack or jacks shall be arranged in conjunction with th e reaction syster-; to deliver an
[21]
axial load to the test pile. The complete system shall be capable fen transforming the maximum
load required for the test.
3.04.5.1.5.7 Measurement of Load
Suitable approved measuring devices for determining the load on the pile shat be supplied by the
contractor. Certificates of calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer -in-Charge.
The type of gauges to be used and if required other details on the instrumentation shall be approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.8 Adjustability of Loading Equipment
The loading equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a smooth
increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a maintained loading
test.
3.04.5.1.5.9 Measuring Movement of Pile Heads
3.04.5.1.5.9.1 General
In a maintained load test movement of the pile head shall be measured by two of the methods as
described below. One method for settlement measurements. the other method for control.
3.04.5.1.5.9.2 Leveling Method
An optical or any other leveling method by reference to an external datum may be used.
Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen to enable
readings to be made to within an accuracy o f 0.5 mm. A scale attached to the pile or pile cap may
be used instead of a leveling staff. At least two datum points shall be established on permanent
objects or other well-founded structures, or deep datum points shall be installed. Each datum
point shall be situated so that only one setting up of the level is needed.
No datum point shall be affected by the test loading or other operations on the site.
Where another method of leveling is proposed this shall be approved in writing by the Engineer in-Charge.
[22]
3.04.5.1.5.9.2 Independent Reference Frame
An independent reference frame may be set up to permit measurement of the movement of

pile. The supports for the frame shall be founded in such a manner and at such a distance from
test pile, kentledge support cribs, reaction pikes, anchorages and rafts that movements of
ground in the vicinity of the equipment do not cause movement of the reference frame during
testing.
the
the
the
the
Check observations of any movements of the reference frame shall be made and a check shall be
made of the movement of the pile head relative to an external datum during the progress of the
test. In no case shall the supports be less than three test pile diameters or 3.0 m. whichever is
greater, from the center of the test pile .
The measurement of pile movement shall be made by two dial gauges rigidly mounted on the
reference frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile axis fixed to the pile cap or head.
Alternatively the gauges may be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on thereference frame. The
dial gauges shall be placed in diametrically opposed positions and be equidistant from the pile axis.
The dial gauges shall enable readings to he made to within an accuracy of 0.1 mm
The reference frames shall be protected from sun and wind.

3.04.5.1.5.9.3 Other Methods
The Contractor may submit for approval any other method for measuring the movement c pile
heads.
3.04.5.1.5.10 Protection of Testing Equipment
3.04.5.1.5.10.1 Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period all equipment for measuring load and movement shall protected from the
weather.
3.04.5.1.5.10.2 Prevention of Disturbance

Construction equipment and persons who are not involved in the testing process shall be kept at a
sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the measuremer: ' apparatus
3.04.5.1.5.11 Supervision
3.04.5.1.5.13.1 Notice of Test
[23]
The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge at least 24 hours notice commencement of the
test.
3.04.5.1.5.11.2 Records
During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test as require Clause shall
be available for inspection by the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.12 Test Procedure
3.04.5.1.5.12.1Test by Maintained Load
The maximum load which shall be applied in a preliminary pile load test shall be three times the
working load capacity of the pile for upto failure which over is less. The maximum e i which shall
be applied in a working pile load test shall be two times the working load of to pile. The loading
and unloading shall be carried out in stages as shown in Table - 1 or required by the Engineer-inCharge.
Follo wing each application of an increment o f load, it shall be held for not less than the
period shown in Table 3A:1 or until the rate of settlement is less than -0.25 mm/h and is
slowing down. The rate of settlement shall be calculated from the slope of the curve through the
points. Each stage of unloading shall proceed after the expiry of the period shown in Table - 1.
For any period when the load is constant, time and settlement shall be recorded
immediately on reaching the load and at approximately 15 minute in intervals for 1 h, at 30
minute intervals between 1 h and 4 h, and at 1 h interva ls between 4 h and 12 h after the
application of the increment of load.
The Engineer-in-Charge may require that the full loading, or any portion of the loading, be
maintained on the pile for periods longer than shown in Table-1.
3.04.5.1.5.13 Presentation of Results
3.04.5.1.5.13.1 Results to be Submitted
Results shall be submitted as
a)
A summary in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge, unless otherwise directed within 24

hours of the completion of the test, which shall give for a proof test by maintained load
for each stage of loading, the period for which the load was held, the load and the
maximum settlement or uplift recorded.
b)
The completed schedule of recorded data as in Clause below within 7 (seven) days of the
completion of the test.
3.04.5.1.5.13.2 The Contractor shall provide information about the tested pile in accordance with
[24]
the following schedule where applicable.

a)
General
Project
Proposed structure
Date of test
b)
P i l e d e t a i l s Identification (number and location

of the test pile)
Ground level at pile position
Head level as which test load is applied
Type of pile
Length in ground
Level of toe
Details of Permanent casing (if any)
c)
Installation details
Dates and times of boring, driving and concreting of test pile and adjacent
piles.
Date and time of casting concrete
Driven length of pile or temporary casing at final set
d)
Test procedure
Weight of kentledge
Tension pile, ground anchor or compression pile details (if used)
P lan o f test arrangement sho wing p o sitio n and d istances o f kentled ge
supports, rafts, tension or compression piles and reference frame to test pile
Jack capacity
Method of load measurement
Method(s) of penetration measurement
Relevant dates and times.
e)
Test results
In tabular form
In g graphical form: loads plotted against movements and time.
3.04.5.1.5.14 Completion of a test

3.04.5.1.5.14.1 Measuring Equipment
On completion of a test all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled, check and
either stored so that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the s as directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.14.2 Kentledge
Kentieldge and its supporting structure shall be removed from the site pile and stored that they
are available for use in further tests or removed from the site as directed
[25]
3.04.5.1.5.14.3 Temporary Piles

Temporary tension piles, if used for a load test, shall be cut off below ground level, removed
from the Site and the ground made good with approved material as specified.
3.04.5.1.5.14.4 Failure Criterion of Working Test Pile
The Working Test Pile deemed to have failed if:
i)
Maximum settlement at twice the working load (proof load) exceeds 25 mm at the end of 24
hours, minimum time of holding the load.
ii)
Residual settlement exceeds 6 mm at the end of I hour minimum time of holding load for the
final unloading.
If t he t es t p i le fa il s, fo r wh ic h t he o p i n io n o f t he E n g i ne er -i n - C h ar ge i s fi n al, t he
Contractor shall not be paid for the failed pile and the load test. The Contractor shall
propose remedial measure for the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge and the cost of the
remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor. For each pile failure the Contr actor shall
carryout two additional working pile load test at his own cost as per specification and
3.04.5.1.6
3.04.5.1.6.1
Measurement and Payment

Measurement
3.04.5.1.6.1.1 Working Piles

Piles, complete in place, will be measured by the linear meter each size of shaft listed in the
schedule of bid items. Measurement will be along the center -line of the shaft based on the tip
and shaft cut-off elevations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.6.1.2 Test Shafts
Test shafts of the specified diameter will be measured from the elevation of the ground at the
time drilling begins, by the linear meter of acceptable test shaft drilled.
3.04.5.1.6.1.2 Load Test
Load tests will be measured by the number of load tests performed for each designated pile load
capacity.
3.04.5.1.6.2 Payment
3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Working Piles
Piles will be paid for at the contract price as per schedule of items for boring, concreting,
welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be considered to be full
compensation for all costs involved with shaft excavation, disposal of excavated material,
a n d t h e f u r n i s h i n g i n c l u d i n g a l l l a b o u r, ma t e r i a l s e q u i p me n t , t e mp o r a r y c a s i n g a n d
incidentals necessary to complete the piles.
[26]
3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Tests Shafts

welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be full co mpensation
for excavation and concrete for backfill material including all labour, materials, equipment
and incidentals necessary to complete the test shafts.
3 .0 4 .6 P il e I nt e gr i t y T es t
3.04.6.1 General Requirement
T he intent of the pile integrity test (PI T) is to assess qualitatively the integrity and
workmanship of the production pile - through a low strain hammer impacts made on the pile
head the condition of pile shaft with respect to potential defects such as necking, honey
combing, existing of cracks and voids etc, but not to substitute/ replace the routine load test on
pile. It is called as Low Strain Method (since it requires the impact of only a small hand held
ha mmer) and also r efer r ed to as a No n -Destructive Metho d . T he evaluatio n o f P IT
records is conducted either according to the Pulse -Echo or the Transient Response
Procedure.
The test shall be conducted in accordance with internatio nal codes such as ASTM 5882 - -00
or "Specification for Piling" by Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE), U.K.
3.04.6.2 Description of Method
In Low Strain Integrity test the impact of a small hand held hammer is applied axially on the
sha ft to p and the sha ft to p mo tio n i s meas ured . Fo r the T ransient Resp o nse Metho d th e
measurement of hammer force is also necessary.
The motion record, more specifically the pile top velocity, must be displayed and produce on
hard co p y as a functio n o f time. W here high soil frictio n fo rces are present, integratio n with
exponentially increasing magnitude should be applied to the velocity signal such that the pile
toe reflection is enhanced. The apparatus must have filter for wavelet analysis. The wa v e l e t
a n a l ys i s i s a s p e c i a l iz e d f i l t e r t h a t e ffe c t iv e l y s t r e n g t h e n s t h e s i g n a l fr e q u e n c y
c o mp o n e n t s t h a t ma t c h t h e i n p u t p u l s e a n d r e mo v e s u n d e s i r a b le fr eq u e n c y c o mp o n e n t s
r e s u l t i n g fr o m n o i s e . I n g e n e r a l , s e v e r a l r e co rd s s h o u l d b e a v e r a g e d , h o we v e r , t h e *e s
engi neer is r esp o n sib le f o r assur in g t hat co n siste nt reco rd s are i nclud ed i n t he avera ge The
averaged, amplified velocity is the standard result of the Sonic Pulse Echo Method. in
addition to the velocity record as a function of time, the amplified and averaged difference
b e t we e n v e l o c i t y a n d f o r c e m a y a l s o b e d e p i c t e d . T h i s g r a p h wo u l d p r o v i d e a d d i t i o n a l
information as to the quality near the pile top. The velocity vs. frequency plot and I
transform may add valuable pile length and damage location information.
The Transient Response Method includes as a result the ratio of velocity to force transform
fo r all relevant fr eq uencies. T his curve is called Mob ility. It sho uld b e sho wn to get her
wit h the related low frequency pile stiffness. These Transient Response results are only
available if hammer force is measured.
3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Tests Shafts

welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be full compensation
[27]
for excavation and concrete for backfill material including all labour, materials, equipment
and incidentals necessary to complete the test shafts.
3 .0 4 .6 P il e I nt e gr i t y T es t
in the field such that at least a preliminary data quality evaluation can be mad e. A timing
calibration should be possible. The test equipment for the integrity testing shall, at the
minimum, consists of a portable computer, signal conditioning sub -system, accelerometer, and
computer controlled amplifier and connection cables. Any oth er equipment required shall also be
mobilized by the agency without any obligation to the owner
3.04.6.4 Test Personnel
Non-destructive pile integrity tests shall be conducted by a specialized agency approved by the Engineer
to evaluate the integrity of piles. The specialized agency shall design the instrument system and
testing procedures and provide personnel and instruments for carrying out the tests and submit test
report.
Objective of testing is to detect pile defects, including cracks, soil intrusions, caving, bulging, voids
and variation in pile diameter and length.
The credentials and past experiences of the specialized agency and professional to be deputed
for testing along with method statement detailing the testing procedure including equipment
details, analysis, data interpretation and reporting of test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 28 days before commencement of tests for his approval.
The Contractor shall provide all reasonable facilities to the specialized agency. The Contractor shall
provide all inserts provided in detailed drawings.
The actual field-testing may be performed by an experienced technician with at least two (2) years
experience in dynamic pile testing. The analysis and interpretation of the records, however,
requires extensive experience by a graduated engineer with at least three (3) years experience in
dynamic pile testing on large diameter bored cast-in-situ piles.
3.04.6.5 Test Preparation
Pile Integrity testing shall not be performed on a pile until the concrete has cured for a
minimum of seven (7) days unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The pile head shall be free
from water, dirt or other debris. The concrete at the pile top surface must be flat or level and have
sufficient space for attachment of the sensing device and impact area.
At the assigned site, test piles (on which initial & routine load tests wil l be conducted) shall be
initially tested to enable establishment of a characteristic or reference signal which can then be
used to compare the observed signals obtained for the subsequent selected piles The number,
type, and locatio n o f piles for testing shall be sp ecified b y the Engineer. Additional piles may
be selected for testing at the discretion of the engineer if circumstances either during or after pile
installation should make a piles' integrity suspect.
[28]
Concreting of pile caps shall commence only after the piles are accepted by the Engineer.
3.04.6.6 Frequency of Tests
This testing shall be carried out on cast-in-situ piles employed for foundations of the project. At
least one integrity test shall be carried out at each column locations. Engine er based on
geotechnical and construction details shall select the pile location under pier/ abutment for testing.
However, the Engineer at his own direction may increase the number of integrity testing.
3.04.6.7 Presentations and Interpretation of Results

The testing engineer will have a minimum of forty-eight, (48) hours after performing a test to provide the final
test results and integrity evaluation.
As a minimum, for each pile tested, the averaged, amplified velocity vs. time record should be included
in the report. Additional plots and analyses can be included as required or suggested by the testing
engineer. The experienced test engineer shall discuss each record summarizing his diagnosis in
a table. This diagnosis may be based on the appearance of a "typical" record.
The agency shall prepare a detailed report including their engineering analysis and
recommendations and identify substandard piles and also recommend remedial measures required to be
followed by the owner to ensure subsequent quality piling. If any load testing is required, the same shall
also be indicated & piles identified for the same from the response of piles during integrity testing.
Improvements/changes required in the procedure of installation of piles, if any, will also be clearly brought
out.
Shafts with only insignificant reflections from locations other than the pile toe and with a clear pile
toe reflection may be accepted. Where no clear toe reflection is app arent, the experienced test
engineer shall state to which depth the test appears to be conclusive. Where significant reflections from
locations above the pile toe are observed, a quantification of the irregularity must be attempted by the
test engineer. If such reflection indicates a significant pile impedance reduction, the pile either will be
rejected or any suitable remedial measure will be undertaken if deemed fit by Engineer. If the record is
complex, the results may be deemed questionable. Constructio n records (concrete usage, grout
pressure records, soil borings) may be valuable in results interpretation or additional numerical
analysis modeling may be used to quantify the record. At the discretion of Engineer the rejected/
questionable piles may be subjected to further testing, e.g., static.
If the overall test results indicate the deficiency in the integrity of the pile due to which the future
performance of the pile is questionable and is not structurally adequate, the pile/ piles shall be rejected. The
Contractor shall repair, replace or supplement the defective work in a manner approved by Engineer. The
construction of additional drilled shaft shall be discontinued until the Contractor demonstrates
the adequacy of the shaft construction method and any subsequent method changes to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The cost involves for any additional works i.e further test to reconfirm the acceptability
of the pile or any remedial measures or replacement by new pile/s and subsequent changes in struc tural
design etc. shall be borne by Contractor without any extra claim.
3.04.6.8 Payment
The payment for this item of test shall cover all cost of mobilizing/hiring the specialized team and
equipment to site including all preparatory arrangement, overhead expenses, VAT, IT and incidentals. The
payment will be based on the actual number of pile s subjected to integrity testing as per the directive of
the Engineer-in-charge.
3.05 BREAKING OF PILE HEAD 3.05.1 1 Description
[29]
r
Breaking the head of pile upto required length by approved means and removing the
dismantled materials such as concrete to a safe distance including scrapping and removing concrete from rods,
bending of rod for anchorage in pile cap, carrying all sorts of handling,stacking the same properly after
clearing, levelling and dressing the site etc. complete as p er drawing, specification and direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.05.2 Method of Measurement

T h e wo r k s h a l l b e p a id fo r o n t h e b a s i s a s n o t ed i n t h e s c h e d u l e
quantities.
of
it e m a n d b i l l o f
3.05.3 Basis of Payment

The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid at t h e
contract unit price for the item which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for performing all the requirements of this item including furnishing al l labor,
equipment and materials, excavating, handling of excavated materials, disposing of the debris
at the place ordered by the Engineer -in-Charge inside or within 300 meters outside the site as well
as all incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, V ATS etc. necessary to
complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.06 EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION 3.06.1
Description
The work includes setting out true lines to all foundation structures, performing excavation to the
required levels and grades in any kind of soil encountered, removing the spoils to a safe distance as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.06.2 Construction requirements
Before any excavation commences, the reference bench marks need to be carefully f ixed on the
ground at some suitable place by putting 16mm M.S. bar protecting it by 450mm x 450mm x
600mm concrete covering around it. The bar top should be the reduced level of b ench mark.
B ar top sho uld b e projected 20 mm abo ve the co ncrete top surface. T he Contractor shall take
necessary measure and protect the vertical shoring in such a way that the entire excavation
(including the protective measures) strictly remains with the shore protection line. If any
encroachment is done or any damages occur to an y neighbouring building & plots or to
Municipality lands, the Contractor shall be sole responsible for such damages and shall be bound to
pay all compensation claimed by the owners of these lands.
T he excavated ear th excep ting tho se req uired fo r b ack filling will b e d isp o sed b y the
Contractor and he will carry it away from the site to a safe place to be arranged by him
(Contractor). The site should be kept clean and no earth should be deposited in o r near the site.
The depth of excavation will be as shown in the plans and as per direction of the Engineer inCharge. The Contractor will keep the excavated level in such a working condition that it will be
possible for him to erect all equipment during the excavation work and remove them after the excavation of
the earth is complete. Contractor should fill excess excavated level if any, to the design level by
1:3:6 concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge without any extra cost.
[30]
3.06.2.1 Disposal of Excavated Materials

All excavated materials shall be the property of the Emp lo yer. During excavatio n, the
Contractor will simultaneous remove the excavated earth at his own cost at any place where he like
to disposal the earth as there is no space to damp the earth at site. The Employer shall charge a
royalty per Cum for this excavated earth to the Contractor.
All excavation shall be measured net between the vertical plans of outsides of structures and no
allowance shall be made for the extra excavation for working space, etc. Any extra excavation
beyond depth and dimension which is carried out through error and detrimental for the structure,
must be compensated by the Contractor at his own expenses by furnishing compacted sand fill of FM
2.5 or concrete as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Payment for excavatio n will b e mad e at the co ntract unit price per cub ic meter (cum)
measured as provided above, which price shall consti tute full compensation for furnishing,
transporting and placing a\\
equi\pmev>t and materials, including setting out of pits and
trenches, establishing and securing bench marks, excavating, handling of excavated
materials, backfilling and compacting of the same, shoring, dewatering, and disposing of surplus
excavated materials and debris by hauling to any distance at approved locations inside/outside
the site, as well as all incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the
work according to the applicable plans. The Employer will deduct
at a rate of T aka 9.00 per cubic meter
the contractor as royalty of the
excavated earth. The deducted volume of the earth will be same as excavated volume of
earth.
3.07 EARTH FILLING 3.07.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels,
according to these Specifications and Plans with specified earth materials.
3.07.2 Construction Requirements
Silty Sand or other approved materials, free from large lumps, organic or other extraneous
materials, shall be used for fill. Materials from excavation on the sites may be used as
ordinary fill if it is approved.
The fill materials shall be deposited and spread in successive thin uniform horizontal layers of
about 150mm thick and compacted by use of mechanical or other approved devices to 98% in
standard Proctor in road and pavement sub-base and 95% for other area.
Tests will have to be carried out at BRTC -BUET laboratory or in any recognizes laboratory to
ascertain the nature of the fill material and the degree of compaction obtained for the filled
material for which samples have to be taken expense and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge
3. 0 7.3 Method of Measurement

T he method of measurement will be as follows : - The ditch or filling area will be divided into small
[31]
regular sections such as square or rectangular section of 3m x 3m or 3m x 5m or any other suitable

dimension. Each sectional area is then multiplied by the average of corner ordinates of that
section taken from pre work contour levels and add the whole volume. This volume is termed as
volume reference to (o) zero level. The square or rect angular sections at slope will be adjusted
mutually to take into account the shape of the slope. Then the total sectional area is multiplied by
the post work level (average level after filling) of the filled area.
The difference between post work and pre work volume is the actual filled volume of ditch or filling
area.
Veasurement for which payment will be made for filling shall be the quantities of completed .vork
in place deter mined by the method described above: The ground level elevations shown on the
plan will be used as original level. The volume of foundation pits and trenches 'o be backfilled by
excavated earth shall not be considered in this item.
3 .0 7 .4 B a s is o f Pa y me n t
Payment for filling will be made at the contract unit price per cum measured as provided above
which price shall be full compensation for materials, carrying, placing, levelling, shaping and
compacting of fill materials in layers and furnishing of all equi pment, tools, incidentals such as
overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work.
3.08
SAND
FILLING
3.08.1Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels,
according to these Specifications and Plans with specified and approved materials.
3.08.2Material
Fineness modulus of sand shall not be less than 1.2 (one point two), shall be clean and -lee from
organic and other deleterious materials.
The fill materials shall be deposited and spread in successive uniform horizontal layers of about
150mm thick and compacted by use of mechanical or other approved devices to 98% standard
Proctor in road and pavement sub -base and 95% for other area. In filling /back filling against a
newly constructed structure precaution must be taken so that the structure is well matured to take the
thrust of filling and while filling that against a wall, the filling is done from both sides simultaneously.
Tests will have to be carried out at BRTC-BUET laboratory or in any recognized laboratory
designated by the Engineer -in-Charge to ascertain the nature of the fill material and the
Engineer-in-Charge.
The method of measurement will be as follows:
T he d itch or filling ar ea will b e d ivid ed into s mall reg ular sectio ns s uch as sq uare o r
rectangular section of 3m x 3m or 3m x 5m or any other suitable dimension. Each sectional area is
then multiplied by the average of corner ordinates of that section taken from pre work contour
[32]
levels and add the whole volume. This volume is termed as volume reference to zero (o) level.
The square or rectangular sections at slope will be adjuste d mutually to take into account the
shape of the slope. Then the total sectional area is multiplied by the post work level (average
level after filling) of the filled area. The difference between post work and pre work volume is the
actual filled volume of ditch or filling area.
Measurement for which payment will be made for filling shall be the quantities of completed work
in place deter mined b y the method described above. The ground level elevatio ns shown on the
plan will be used as original level.
Payment for filling will be made at the contract unit price per cum measured as provided above
which price shall be full compensation for materials, carrying, placing, levelling, shaping and
compacting of fill materials in layers and furn ishing of all labours, equipment, tools, incidentals
such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work.
3.09
BRICK
FLAT
SOLING
(BFS)
3.09.1Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and laying bricks on top of the earth or sand
bed to form a sub-base.
3.09.2Materials
Bricks shall comply with requirements of First Class bricks unless otherwise required by the Engineer-inCharge.
The blinding sand will have a minimum Fineness Modulus of 1.0 (one) and shall be clean, and free
of any organic matters.
The bed for BFS shall be prepared level and compacted, dewatered and cleared of all loose
materials.
Bricks shall be laid flat in surface to surface contact with adjoining bricks and their joints shall
be filled with sand. The sand shall be brushed in until the joints are filled. Flushing in of sand with
water will not be done unless permitted. Bricks shall not be laid on the floor or foundation bed
until the floor or foundation bed is inspected and approved by the Engineer in-Charge representative.
In case of Multi-layer Soling, care shall be taken to stagger or "break" all joints in placing
subsequent courses of soling. No brick shall be laid on loose earth or earth filling which are not
compacted to the desired degree.

Brick soling shall be measured in square meter.
[33]

The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the
contract unit price per sq. which price shall be in full compensation for all material, transporting,
placing, and all labor, mason, equipment, tools, and incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes,
VAT etc. necessary to complete the work.
3.10
BRICK ON END EDGING
3.10.1 Description
This work consists of providing and placing five holeBull nose bricks on end edging along the road and aproan
on a single layer brick flat soling and sand filling.
3.10.2 Materials
Bull nose Bricks (190X9OX90mm) shall comply with requirements of local made landscaping bricks
ofgood quality (equivalent to First Class brick).
The blinding sand will have a minimum Fineness Modulus of 1.0 (one point zero) and shall be
clean, and free of any organic matters.
Bricks shall be laid on end edging with their longest side vertical or inclined
to a certain degree with the alignment of the road and short side
perpendicular to the road including necessary excavation filling and ramming
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The completed work shall be
true to line and level and grade as indicated on the drawings. Interstices
between brick edging and adjacent paving or soling shall be filled by brushing
in sand until voids are filled, the edging shall be sprinkled with water.
3 .1 0.4 M ea sureme nt
This item shall be measured in linear meters of completed brick on end edging.
3 .1 0 .5 Pa y me nt
Payment shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.11
CEMENT CONCRETE (C.C.) WORKS
3.11.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing in foundation/floor and where
necessary as per drawing with Concrete Class C14/C15 as specified in schedule of item.
3.11.2 Materials
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type -1, sand shall be 50%
local sand with minimum FM 1.5, 50% sylhet sand with FM 2.5. coarse
aggregate shall be either crushed stone or picked jhama brick chips as
[34]
specified in Bill of Quantities, water shall be potable water.

The specification shall be the same as for R.C.C works excepting that.
(1)
(ii)
No reinforcement will be used-,

Strength/Proportion shall be as noted in Schedule of Items;
(iii) 20mm downgraded chips of stone shall be used as coarse aggregate or as

specified in Schedule of Item;
(iv)
(v)
The curing shall be done for 7 days minimum;

Wooden or steel tempers or y ammers in lieu of vibrators may do compaction of
concrete.
If C.C. work is done over brick soling, it shall be sprinkled with water so that no loss of water from
concrete can occur due to absorption of water by dry bricks. In case sub soil water tends to rise
and wash away C.C. work in foundation, while this is being done, dewatering of foundation bed
shall be done by making sumps and using pump or manual labo r. The dewatering process shall
continue until the concrete has set.
In order to improve bond with masonr y/co ncrete work co ming above it, if required, the
surface shall be roughened before it reaches initial set, b y scouring with the help of a pointed
tool or wire brush.
This item shall be measured in the cubic meter complete in place.
The amount of completed and accepted work, as mentioned above shall be paid for at the q uoted
unit price and payment shall b e for full co mp ensa tio n o f all materials, labors including
preparation of bed transport, hatching, mixing, pouring, compacting and curing etc. necessary to
complete the item according to drawing and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.12
REINFORCED CEM ENT CONCRETE (R.C.C) WORK
3.12.1 Scope of Work

T he wo r k co ver ed b y t h i s i te m s h al l co n si s t o f b ut no t li mi t ed to rei n fo r ced co nc ret e
construction in foundations, rafts, columns, lintels, beams, slab, wall panels, retaining walls,
underground water reservoirs, water tanks etc. of the form, demension and design shown in the
drawings
[35]
3.12.2 Materials
3.12.2.1 Cement
P o r t l a n d C e m e n t T y p e - 1 c o n f o r m i n g t o A S T M C - r o c 2 3 2 - 1 9 9 3 ( 2 n d Revision). It
shall be free from any hardened lumps and any foreign material other than the manufacturing
ingredients. Cement shall have a minimum 90% o f particles b y weight, passing the 75 micron
sieve. The Engineer-in-Charge Representative reserves the right to reject any cement that fails
to achieve specified co ncrete strength laid do wn in the se specifications and the schedule of items
Only approved brand, grade or kind of cement shall be used in a given structure above the round level
especially for fair face concrete, tiles work etc. except upon the written permission of the Engineer-inCharge where other brands may be used.
Cement bags containing clods giving indications of starting of initial setting time shall not be -d in R.C.0
work.
Only one brand of cement shall be used for a particular casting work except by written permission from the
Engineer-in-Charge. Different types of cement, if approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be stored
separately and shall not be mixed.
Use of rebagged cement shall not be allowed.
Engineer-in-Charge, at his discretion shall test cement which he feels to have deteriorated rough age,
damage to bags, improper storage or for any other reason. In the event of any sample being found to be not
in accordance with BIDS 232-1993 (2nd Revision) or ASTM 150 or any other standard as specified, the
whole consignment from which the sample comes shall be rejected and removed from the site immediately
notwithstanding any previous acceptance otherwise.
cement may be measured by weight or in a standard bag to weigh 1 cwt or 112 pounds/50kg having a
volume of 0.0354 cum/1.25 cft. The Contractor shall maintain the records of deliveries of cement to the site
and its use in the work.
Cement shall be stored at site in such a manner as to permit easy access for proper inspection, handling and
identification of each shipment. Cement shall not be stocked higher than 6 bags. 3.12.2.2 Supply of Aggregates
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, fine and coarse aggregates for concrete shall comply
with the relevant requirements of ASTM C33.
[36]
All coarse aggregates for incorporation into concrete mixes shall consist of hard, solid, durable, uncoated
angular rock fragments or angular fragments of crushed stones and shall not contain dust, mud, organic
materials or other deleterious matter.
All fine aggregates for incorporation into concrete mixes shall be clean, hard, solid and durable natural sand
and shall not contain harmful amounts of dust, mud, organic material or other deleterious substances. The
fine aggregates shall be as far as possible pure Silica (Si02).
1)
The aggregates shall be graded and the combined gradation of aggregates used for the concreting
works shall have to be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.12.2.3 Gradation of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
The gradation of the fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements shown below.
Grading of fine aggregate
ASTM Sieve Designation
Per Cent Finer by Weight
3/8 in (9.5 mm
100
No. 4 (4.75 mm
95-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm
80-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm)
50-85
No. 30 (600 mm)
25-60
No. 50 (300 mm)
10-30
No. 100 (150 mm)
2-10
The gradation of coarse aggregate shall conform to the following:
Designated sizes
Percentage by weight passing US Standard sieves having square openings
38 mm
25 mm down graded
20 mm down graded
12 mm down graded
100
-
25 mm
95100
100
20 mm
12 mm
10 mm
No. 4
No. 8
25-60
0-10
0-5
90-
20-55
0-10
0-5
100
100
90-
40-70
0-15
0-5
100
[37]
3.12.2.4 Reinforcement for Concrete

(i) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, the reinforcement to be used shall be mild steel 60
Grade deformed bars having minimum yield strength of 415 Mpa (60,000 psi) and shall conform to ASTM
A615.
Cutting, bending, cleaning and fastening in position of reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of
ACI 318, unless otherwise specified by Engineer-in-Charge.
(iii)
Prior to placing orders for reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall submit samples, Specifications and test
certificates as specified herein and as required by the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. No order shall be placed
until such approval is given in writing.
(iv)
All consignments of reinforcing steel shall be stamped by the manufacturer to identify the Mill, Grade
of steel, and the lot number from which the consignment was made.
(v') Reinforcing steel shall be stored on the ground in separate groups according to size and length in such a
manner as to be readily accessible when required, and with facilities for inspection.
(vi)
Before being placed in position, all reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, paint, loose
rust or other coatings of any kind, which reduce bond.

(vii)
All reinforcing steel to be incorporated in the work shall be placed accurately in the position shown on
the drawings and shall be held firmly in position during placing and setting of concrete.
(viii)
The detailing of all reinforcing steel on the construction drawings shall be to therequirements of ACI
31 8-current issues.
3.12.2.5 Mixing Water
Water for mixing concrete shall, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, be potable water drawn
from a tubewell or obtained from a public water supply authority.
The water to be used shall be clean and free from all deleterious materials that significantly affect the hydration
reactions of Portland cement.
iii).
The Contractor shall propose the provisions to ensure a satisfactory and adequate supply of potable
water subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
[38]
iv),
In no case, the Contractor shall be allowed to use surface water.
V).
Water must be free from excessive chlorides and sulphates. Water supplies shall be
Sampled and tested for chlorides and sulphates in a standard materials testing
laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The maximum acceptance limits
shall be as follows :
1000 mg/1 as S03 for sulphates 500 mg/1 as CI ion for chlorides. 3.12.2.6 Admixtures for Concrete
An air-entraining admixture may be desirable because of the increased workability of concrete that can be
achieved. Water-reducing or water-reducing and retarding admixtures are particularly beneficial in reducing
water content to provide a cohesive yet high slump concrete.
(ii)
The Contractor may add water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures into concrete mixes subject to
satisfactory trial mixes and to prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Such admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494. Where admixtures are added for the purpose of entraining air
they shall comply with ASTM C260.
(iii)
Additives containing chlorides shall not be used.
(iv)
Details of the type and quantities of admixtures which the Contractor wishes to usein the underwater
concreting work shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge forapproval. Any admixture to be used by the
Contractor must conform to therequirements outlined in ACI 212.3R.
3.12.3
Delivery and Storage of Materials
3.12.3.1 Cement
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage of the cement at the job site. Cement shall be
stored in a weather proof shaded area having damproof floor, waterproof walls and leakproof roof. The
cement stacks shall be placed at a minimum distance of 300mm from the walls. The dampproof floor shall
be constructed by raising it minimum 300mm above the ground. If the cement is damaged and becomes
lumpy due to defective storage, it shall be removed from the job site within 24 hours of receipt of
instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge Representative.
Cement in transit and storage or stock-piled at site shall be protected from dampness or any damage by
climatic conditions that would change its characteristics or usability. Cement godown shall be constructed to
be fully weather proof. Batches of cement shall be used for the work in the order in which they are delivered
[39]
to the site. A register shall be maintained by the Contractor listing date of delivery and quantity of each
consignment for easy identification.
3.12.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stock-piled at least 7 days prior to their anticipated use to permit the Engineer-in-Charge
to sample each stockpile to determine the acceptability of the material for the intended use.
Aggregates of different sizes or grades and from different sources of supply shall not be mixed. All
aggregate shall be stored free from contact with earth and other deleterious matter.
Every precaution shall be taken during transport and stockpiling of coarse aggregate to prevent segregation.
Segregated aggregates shall not be used until they have been thoroughly remixed and the resultant pile is of
uniform and acceptable grading at any point from which a representative sample is taken.
3.12.3.3 Reinforcing steel
Reinforcing steel shall be stacked with each dia type of bars stockpiling seperately under shed to avoid effect
of rain and dew. Stockpiling of huge quantity of steel bar shall be avoided to save it from- rusting and
deterioration through oxidation. Sufficient quantity required for single operation of casting should be
collected from one approved source and stored at site prior to rod bending and binding work. Reinforcing
bars shall not be stockpiled on soil. A raised platform shall be prepared by laying brick flat soling over
which reinforcing bars shall be stacked in orderly manner.
Sufficient acceptable materials shall be available at the batching site to ensure continuous placement
necessary for structures. The moisture content of the accepted aggregate shall remain consistent to the extent
that the resultant successive batches of concrete do not vary in consistency by more than 6mm of slump. If
the moisture content in the aggregate varies by more than the above tolerance, corrective measures shall be
taken to bring the moisture to a constant and uniform quantity before any more concrete is placed.
Coarse aggregate shall be saturated with water at least 12 hours before use to prevent absorption of the
mixing water.
3.12.3.4 Boulders
The boulders shall be supplied in sizes that can be handled manually by one person. Stock piling shall be
such as to permit ready identification of the materials and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Site
[40]
for stockpiles shall be clean prior to storing materials. The stockpiles shall be built-up in layers not to exceed
1200mm in height and each layer shall be in place before the next layer is started.
3.12.4 Composition of Mix
The strength requirement and workability shall govern the max. proportion for each class of concrete:
3.12.4.1 Trial Mixes and Mix Proportion
(i) The Contractor shall undertake the design of concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1 for the designated
class of concrete to be used in the works. The design of concrete mix shall be carried out in a recognized
material-testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The following requirements shall be fulfilled
in proportioning the ingredients and designing the concrete mix:
The minimum amount of cement to be used by the Contractor shall be as per Clause 3.13.4
To produce dense impermeable concrete, water cement ratio of not more than 0.45 shall be used.
Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to the limits as
Specified in Clauses 3.13.2.3 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer -in-Charge.
Fine aggregates of not less than 45 per cent by volume of total aggregates shall be used.
The maximum slump for different class of concrete shall be as follows:
Piles: 150-200 mm
Raft: 75 mm
Mat Foundation: 25 to 62.5 mm Columns and Walls: 25 to 50 mm Slabs and Beams. 25 to 50 mm
Required average compressive strength used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions (mix
design) shall be 8.3 Mpa (1200 psi) more than the specified compressive strength of concrete.
(ii) No concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer-in-Charge has approved the mix design.
(iii) When a mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the sources of cement
and aggregates, or in the types, size and grading of the aggregates without the approval of the Engineerin-Charge.
(iv) When (after approval of a mix by the Engineer-in-Charge) the seasonal climatic conditions have
[41]
changed significantly, the Contractor shall make any necessary modifications to mix design and carry out
further trials and resubmit the mix design (whether amended or not) for re-approval by the Engineer-inCharge.
(v) The Contractor shall allow an adequate period for design of mixes, trials and approval before concrete
is to be placed in the works.
3.12.4.2 Concrete Batching and Mixing
(i) The Contractor shall provide modern and dependable batching and mixing equipment capable of supplying
concrete of the approved mixes and Specification at the placement location at a continuous production rate
adequate to meet the requirement of the working schedule.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain all necessary equipment required to determine accurately
and to control the amount of each separate ingredient entering the concrete mix.
(iii) The Contractor shall use weight-batch equipment for batching different ingredients of concrete.
(iv) The Contractor shall use truck-mounted drum mixers for mixing different ingredients of concrete.
(v) Concrete shall be batched using the cement-, fine aggregates and graded (combined) coarse aggregates in
proportions used in the trial mixes prepared in connection with the mix design approved by the Engineer-inCharge.
(vi) The amount of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate entering each batch of concrete shall be based
on weight. Where powdered admixtures are used, the amount shall be determined by weight, and where liquid
admixtures are used, the amount may be determined either by weight or by volume. The Engineer-in-Charge
shall approve the use and amount of admixtures to be used.
vii) The weights of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in
them. The corresponding free water content shall increase the batch weight of aggregates. The volume of water
to be added to the mix shall be reduced by an amount equal to the free water contained in the aggregates.
(viii)
All materials used in the concrete mix shall be measured separately and not cumulatively. The
Engineer-in-Charge shall check the accuracy of the measuring devices. He shall be provided with all the
necessary checking facilities by the Contractor and this accuracy shall be maintained so that the indicated
measure does not vary by more than one per cent from true measure throughout their range of use.
(ix)
Mixing equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before being charged with a new batch of concrete.
Mixers, which have been out of, use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh
concrete is mixed.
[42]
Mixers shall not be loaded in excess of the manufacturer's rated capacity, which shall be displayed on the mixer
in terms of the volume of mixed concrete.
(xi)
In addition to the above requirements, all aspects of batching, mixing and placing of concrete shall be
in accordance with ACI 304R and to the approval of the Engineer- in-Charge.
Class of
28 day
Concrete
cylinder
Place of use
Aggregates
Min
cement
crushing
(Min Mixing
strength
proportion)
(min)
C23 (1:1.5:3)
23 Mpa
per cum
Raft/footing, column, wall
Fine
Coarse
Sand FM
20mm
etc. as specified in bill of
C23 (1:1.5:3)
C19 (1:1.5:3)
23 Mpa
19 Mpa
downgraded
quantities
2.5
stone chips
grade beam, beam, slab,
Sand 50%
20mm
stair etc, as specified in bill
FM 2.5 and
downgraded
of quantities
50 % FM 1.2
stone chips
In cast-in-situ concrete pile
Sand FM
20mm
as specified in bill of
C19 (1:1.5:3)
C17 (1:2:4)
19 Mpa
17 Mpa
downgraded
quantities
2.5
stone chips
DPC, internal road
Sand 50%
20mm
FM 2.5 and
downgraded
50 % FM 1.2
stone chips
In lintel, sun shade, fin,
Sand 50%
20mm
false slab, railing, drop
FM 2.5 and
downgraded
wall, parapet, boundary
50 % FM 1.2
stone chips
Sand 50%
20/12mm
FM 1.5 and
downgraded
50 % FM 2.5
stone chips
Sand FM 1.5
20mm
400 kg
400 kg
400 kg
400 kg
300 kg
wall, road, patent stone,

screeding, kerb stone septic
tank & soak well slab etc.
as per bill of quantities
C15 (1:3:5)
C14(1:3:6)
15 Mpa
14 Mpa
Paving slab on roof
Cement concrete, apron
downgraded
stone chips
[43]
235 kg
210 kg
1:5:10
Temporary work
Sand FM 1.5
20mm
downgraded
150 kg
stone chips
(xii)
Standby mixing capacity shall be provided by the Contractor (sufficient to ensure continuity of
concreting in the event of breakdowns of mixing plant) and shall be maintained ready for immediate use during
the course of all concrete pours.
(xiii)
The Contractor shall not use ready-mixed concrete made off the site by others (suppliers or
subcontractors) except with the prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge in each case.
(xiv)
The Contractor shall conduct a series of trial mixes using the batching and mixing equipment to
determine appropriate concrete mixes with regard to the consistency and strength requirements. These trial
mixes shall be carried out by the Contractor on the site and be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to the
start of any placement of concrete. Copies giving details of all trial mix results shall be forwarded to the
Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
3.12.5 Preparation before Mixing of Concrete
Before mixing concrete, preparation shall include the following
a)
All equipment's for mixing and transporting concrete shall be cleaned.
b)
The platform where the concrete shall be poured from mixer machine shall be cleaned with water and
free from debris and other harmful materials.

c)
Containers for measuring coarse aggregates, sand, cement; water shall be checked and approved by the
Site Engineer-in-Charge.
d)
All debris shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete.
e)
Forms shall be properly cleaned.
f)
Coarse aggregate shall be thoroughly watered, cleaned of all foreign materials, silt and mud.
g)
Reinforcement shall he thoroughly cleaned of deleterious coatings
h)
Concrete blocks for maintaining clear cover shall be properly placed.
i)
Water shall be removed from the place of deposit before concrete is placed.
[44]
j)
All laitance and other unsound materials shall be removed before additional concrete is placed against
hardened concrete.
k)
All reinforcements shall be checked to verify whether the rods of the specified number, diameter
length, shape with proper laps have been provided and necessary clearance maintained as shown in the design
drawings. It shall also be checked whether the rods have been tied rigidly by wires, with the correct spacing. in
between. The effective depth shall be checked to see whether it conforms to that shown in the drawings.
l)
No rectification works, for any part of the proposed R.C.0 work, whether it relates to bending, binding
of the reinforcement, or the correction of formworks shall be allowed to be left for the day of the casting of the
concrete. All such rectification and correction shall have to be done and completed on the day before casting is
taken up.
m)
If any casting work is done over load bearing brick wall the supporting brick wall shall be smoothened
to avoid adhesion or grip of the concrete with wail resulting in cracks in the wall due to construction and
shrinkage stresses developed when setting. This may done by plastering the top surface of the wall and neat
cement finishing and properly curing with water and then placing polythene sheet on the top of the wall before
laying concrete.
n)
Vibrator shall be kept ready for vibrating the concrete.
o)
All scaffoldings and shuttering work shall be carefully and thoroughly checked to avoid any loose
joint, support, which might give in during casting.

p)
Availability of enough quantity of cement, coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked for completing
the basting
q)
Shuttering shall be properly wetted before lying of concrete.
r)
It shall be checked whether conduits, pipes and other fitting that shall remain inside the concrete have
been properly laid and placed.

s)
Opening for fixing 1, .1-C.pans, pipes, clamps for hooks shall be kept in the forms befom casting
concrete, so that concrete is not partially dismantled and disturbed afterwards.

3.12.6
Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in concrete mixer of approved type and appropriate capacity.
Each batch shall be thoroughly mixed for a period of not less than 1.5 minute after all materials including theare
in the drum and during this period the drum shall be in the mixing position and at uniform rate of not less than
14 or more than 20 revolutionsper minute The cement sand shall be thoroughly mixed in dry condition.
[45]
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer drum that some water shall enter in advance of the
cement and aggregate. The entire content shall be removed from the drum before the succeeding
batch is introduced.
Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Concrete shall not be used
which has developed initial set or which is not in place within thirty (30) minutes after the water has
been added.
Retempering of partially hardened concrete by remixing with or without additional materials or
water, or by other means will not be permitted. The inside of the mixing drum shall be kept free
of hardened concrete at all times. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes
shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed . Unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, the first batch of concrete through the mixer shall contain only two thirds of
the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from
one type of cement to another.
3.12.7 Consistency of Concrete
The consistency of concrete shall be determined following evaluation of the placement
conditions for each individual section of the work to be decided and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Mix
proportions & consistency will produce a dense, well compacted concrete with a minimum tendency to
segregate under placing conditions, free from sand streaks, honeycomb, air pockets, exposed reinforcing steel &
other forms of structural weakness & unsatisfactory appearance.
3.12.8 Transport and Placing
A most thorough and careful design can be completely defeated by the improper practices in the
handling of ingredients and placing of concrete. Unrestrained dropping, horizontal flow o f c o n c r e t e
i s e x t r e me l y h a r m f u l a n d s h a l l n o t b e to l er a t ed . C o n c r e te s h a l l b e s o transported from the
mixer and placed in the form that contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials
does not occur. Before placing the concrete, all form w ork, space and the reinforcement contained
in it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter. Care shall be taken to fill every part of
the forms, to work the coarse aggregate back from the face so that sufficient mortar will be
flushed from the mass to form a smooth surface, and to force the concrete under and around reinforcing
bars without displacing them.
Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final disposition by suitable
method, which will prevent segregation or loss of ing redients or damage, by exposure to the elements
The Contractor should preferably use a crane of adequate capacity and reach for transporting
concrete from the mixing site or temporary storage area of fresh concrete to the final placement
location. Alternatively, the Contractor ; with the approval of the Engineer -in Charge, may adopt
[46]
pumping method for transporting concrete from the mixing site to the ultimate placement
location. Placing concrete by pumping methods shall conform to the requirements of ACI 304.2R.
The detail procedures for transporting concrete and equipment to be used for transporting concrete
by the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of ACI 304R and approved by the Engineer-inCharge.
The maximum time elapsed between mixing and pla cing shall not be more than 45 (forty-five)
minutes.
The concrete shall be deposited vertically in the form of horizontal layers to a depth not exceeding 300mm &
each shall be properly vibrated before laying the next one.
The concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height exceeding 1.8 meter nor shall it be
deposited in large quantities at any point. In columns or wall structures special tremie pipe may be
used for drop more than 1.8 meters. Dragging of concrete inside the forms or distribution by vibrators or
allowing it to flow by gravity to the ends of the forms will not be permitted. Great lift of a simple pour
encourages segregation of coarse aggregate and sed imentatio n o f the finer co nstituents o f the
mixer and mo r eo ver may cause uneven displacement of the forms.
In sections where it is extremely difficult, to place concrete containing the larger sizes of the coarse
aggregate, a modified mix, as approved by the Engineer -in-Charge, may be used to ensure against
ho ne yco mb and sep ar atio n o f the co arse aggregate fro m t he mo rtar. Concrete shall be
deposited and compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the mixer
and shall not be subjected to vibration between 2 and 24 hour s after compaction. When insitu
concrete has been in place for 4 hours no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further
20 hours. After concreting is started.it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing
of a panel or section is completed. During pouring of concrete, the mason shall not be allowed to use his
mug and water. To achieve the laying of concrete to proper thickness, two strips of concrete about
200mm wide and a little over the specified thickness shall first be placed 1800-2000mm apart,
compacted and l e vel ed to t he e x ac t t h ic k ne s s. Co ncr et e i s t he n p o ur ed wi th i n t he
in ter v e ni n g sp a ce b et we en t he s tr ip s ( l o c a l l y k n o wn a s 'p a y s ' ) a n d p r o p e r l y c o m p a c t e d t o
the desired thickness.
Care shall be taken during the concreting, the rods are not displaced and that the effective depths of slabs,
beams, spacing of stirrups, and rings and the clear cover to the bars are maintained. Care shall be taken to
see that the top negative rods are not displaced at all which seriouly affects the design and
desired strength of the structure. Particular attention shall be given to the placing and spacing of rods in
the cantilevers.
[47]
Before and during casting, the main reinforcing bars.both positive and negative shall be kept in
position. Negative reinforcements shall be kept in position by steel chairs and the p o s i t i v e
o n e s b y c o n c r e t e b l o c k s o f r e q u i r e d s i z e . A d e q u a t e p r e c a u t i o n s a g a i n s t displacement and
depression of rods due to trampling of the workers shall be taken.
Walking on recently poured concrete shall not be allowed.
3.12.9 Compaction of Concrete
Concrete during & immediately after placing shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical vibration. The
vibration shall be internal unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer-in-charge. For compaction of concrete,
the contractor shall conform to the requirements of ACI 309.
Vibration shall be of a type and design approved b y the Engineer -in-Charge. It shall be
cap able o f transmitting vibr atio n to the co ncrete at freq uencies o f no t less than 4,5 00
impulses per minute.
The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of one inch slump
over a radius of at least 450rnm.
The contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch
immediately after it is placed in the forms. He also provides sufficient number of nozzles of
different diameter to execute the work smoothly.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete.
Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete which have
hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to lie plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make
concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation. Vibrators shall not be used to
transport concrete in the forms.
Tamping on the laid concrete in slab shall be done with fairly heavy wooden straight edges (Patta) fixed with
handles, by two masons at either and till the level of the finished surface is attained, proper compaction made
and laitance come out on the surface. Wooden mallets shall also be used for offering a uniform compaction and
for filling up depression.
Concrete pouring schedules and construction joint sequences of different stages shall have to be approved well
in advance by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.12.10 Construction and Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be constructed at the locations and to the dimensions shown on the cans. Position and
detail of construction joints, not shown on the plans, shall be planned in advance by the Contractor for which
approval will be necessary. The Contractor shall locate such joints conforming the general consideration for
[48]
construction joints as set out in ACI 304R and by the Engineer-in-Charge. Placement of concrete shall be in a
continuous operation between consecutive joints.
Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts, the line of the proposed joint on all exposed surfaces shall be
made truly straight by tacking a temporary horizontal straight edge on the inside of the form with its lower edge
on the line of the joint and then placing concrete 12mm higher than this edge to allow for settlement. In case of
water reservoir PVC, water stopper shall be used in all construction joints with 250mm overlapping at the water
stopper joints.
in resuming the work, the old concrete surface shall be thoroughly, cleaned of laitance and all loose material by
stiff wire brush, roughened, if deemed necessary, and washed with clean water.
The surface then shall be coated with very thick cement slurry/bonding agent before fresh concrete is placed.
3.12.11 Special Casting Process for Columns and R.C.CWall
Minimum of construction joints shall be allowed in beams. and Column of the structures. No construction joint
in columns from below floor to bottom of beam shall be allowed. column must be cast in a lift, to avoid any
construction joint below lintel level. Special shuttering with opening at middle height shall be used for the
facility of casting. The opening shall be closed after casting of concrete upto that level without disturbing the
green concrete. The contractor shall prepare shuttering details ahead of actual work and shop drawings are to be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. In any case the safety and stability of form work shall -e the Contractor's
responsibility. No construction joint shall be allowed between beam, web & roof slab of building. For wall &
water reservoir no concrete shall be placed from a heightmore than 1.0m and the shuttering of the wall shall not
be more than 1.25m in height.
3.12.12 Water Reservoir
A mixture of SikaPlastocrete Super (IS 2645-1975 and IS 9103-1979) 0.2% by weight ofcement or similar
product of approved quality at manufacturer's recommendation for water tank are to be used in bases
and walls of R.C.C. reservoirs.
3.12.13 Concrete Temperature

(i)
Concrete construction on ho t weather without appropriate measures impairs the

properties o f fresh as well as hard ened co ncrete. A higher temp erature o f fresh
concrete results in more rapid hydration and leads, therefore, to accelerated setting and a
lower strength of hardened concrete. The concrete temperature should be kept as low as
practical to improve placement and structural qualities.
[49]
(ii)
The Contractor must ensure that the temperature of fresh concrete at the time of
placement shall be i n the range of 60 to 90F (16 to 32C). The temperature shall be
measur ed b y a i mmer s io n ther mo meter co mp l yin g with AST M 1 5 ''C t yp e o r its
equivalent graduated at each 0.2 C over a range from 2C to + 80C, inserted in a
sample within 2 minutes of sampling and recorded 1 minutes after reaching a stable
temperature.
3 .1 2 .1 4 Fo r mw o r k a n d sca f f o ld i ng
The system of formwork & props for reinforced concrete work shall be the responsibility to the contractor. All
formworks shall conform to the requirements of ACI 347R. Formwork may consist of steel sheets of
minimum thickness of 14 BG or wooden planks of hard wood of approved variety having a
minimum thickness of 45mm with necessary battens, struts, stringers, beams, ties, In case of wooden
planks the same shall be new and shall not be used more than 3 times in contact with concrete.
Formwork for fair face concrete must be fabricated from best quality new marine ply having
hardcore face of required thickness and ply. The contractor must prepare a shop drawing for the
fair face shuttering work and obtain necessary approval from the Engineer -in-Charge before
fabricating the same, well in advance to commencement of the works. All joints in boards for
such formworks must be carefully designed; no repair on the fair fi nish concrete shall be accepted.
Construction joints shall be positioned as instructed by the Engineer -in Charge. There must not be
any visible patches, stains or efflorescence in the fair faced concrete. Only non staining from oil,
release agent shall be used with due approval from the Engineer in charge.
All formwork shall be of found materials constructed water -tight, true to line as per drawing and
of such rigidity to present bulging or movement during the placement and curing of the concrete.
Formwork for bases & walls for water reservoir shall have the chamfer of appropriate dimension as per drawing
& dimension.
Form lining shall be in largest practicable panel to minimize joints. Under usual conditions the
following minimum periods between concreting and the removal of formwork shall be observed
Vertical sides expecting beams
3 days
Vertical sides of beams
7 days
Soffits for span of 6m or less
18 days
Soffits from span of over 6ms
min 21 days
Scaffolding shall be made from strong and suita ble bamboo poles, wooden post or steel p ip es.
Steel center ing frames may b e used for any height pro vided they are properly designed for
[50]
that particular height or above. For all concrete works having a crushing strength equal to or
above 21 Mpa, steel shuttering and scaffolding shall be used.
Tubular centering shall be thoroughly inspected before erection. Defected members shall be discarded.
Adjustment screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment after assembling the basic unit
and the unit shall be leveled and plumbed.
Approval of Engineer-in-Charge will be required regarding adequacy of the shuttering before
placement of concrete can be started.
For concreting operation ever 4.0 m height detail design and shop drawings of propping shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
The centering frame shall be braced to make a rigid and solid unit. Struts and diagonal braces
shall be in proper position and secured. As erection progresses, all connecting devirs shall be in place
and fastened for full stability of joint and units.
The props shall be placed on timber planks, false brickwork, or steel shut covering several posts at
a time so as to eliminate the possibility of any sinking of the earth below especially in the ground floor
where the earth is likely to the moistened by water.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of reused forms shall b e
maintained at all time. Any war p ed o r b ulged timb er must be resized before b eing reused.
The formwork made of materials liable to absorb water shall always be sprinkled with water to
p ercent water ab sorp tio n fro m co ncr ete. Water shall no t be pro fusely used and the formwork
shall be in a saturated surface dry condition.
Scaffolding and formwork shall b e checked to see if all the props are stiffly supported over the
firm base. It any prop is found off based, wooded edges shall be inserted below the prop to obtain the
required degree of rigidity, with regard to horizontal movement. No clay plaster, pocking with
pieces of paper, jute, cotton waster etc. shall be allowed to make up the gaps between the centering.
Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be left untouched pending inspection by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Cement mortar separators or block of appropriate sizes are to be used in all
covering as per drawing or directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
The drip course shall be constructed at the edge of roof slab etc. by means of an approved batten
included in the form work before casting or after casti ng as desired by the Engineer in-Charge.
3.12.15 Embedded pipes and conduits
The Contractor shall co-ordinate among all trades like civil, electrical, plumbing, mechanical etc. in
[51]
placement of pipes, conduits. equipments and other accessories and shall provide necessary
opening in the slabs. Concrete shall not be poured before placement of pipe and concealed service
lines.
The pipes shall be so fabricated and installed that it will require minimum cutting, bending or
displacement of reinforcement from its proper location. If any bending or displacement is
required, the attention of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be drawn for his decision.
All pipes, conduits or fixutres required to be embedded in the concrete shall be placed and secured
in position before casting is commenced.
Special care shall be taken in case of electric wiring, so that it is not laid in the slab below the bottom
reinforcement, which shall invariably result in crackers in the slab. Placing of conduit pipes parallel to
the main reinforcement shall be avoided as far as possible. Conduit pipes shall be placed diagonal
to the reinforcement as far as practical to avoid cracks in slab.
Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall n ot be embedded in structural concrete unless
effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum concrete reaction or electrolytic action between
aluminum and steel.
Conduits and pipes with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than
4% of the area of cross section on which strength is calculated.
Conduits shall not be larger inoutside dimension than
1/3rd
the overall thickness of slab, wall or
beam in which they are embedded.

Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on centres.
3.12.16 Surface Finish and Remedial Treatment of Surfaces
Unless otherwise provided on the plans, all reasonably true and even surfaces, which are of
uniform color and texture and free from stone pockets, honeycomb, depressions or
projections, shall be considered as acceptable surfaces.
Immediately after the removal of forms, all cavities produced by form ties and all other
holes, broken corners or edges and other defects except air bubble holes, shall be cleaned and
after having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less than two hours shall b e
co mp le te l y fi ll ed , r a n - m o d a nd mad e go o d wi t h a mo rt ar o r co n cre te o f t he s a me
proportions as used in the concrete being finished.
The holes shall be completely filled by use of a pressure gun or hand rammed method as directed by
Engineer-in-charges representative.
[52]
Any remedial treatment to the surface shall be agreed with the Engineer-in-charges following inspection
after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay. Any concrete, the surface of which has
been treated before being inspected by the Engineer-in-charge shall be liable to rejection.
Broom finishing shall be made for all slabs to receive artificial patent stone, terrazzo flooring using wire
broom after the concrete is partially set.
3.12.17 Curing & Protection

Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather for a period not less than 7 ( seven) days
immediately following the placing of concrete.
All concrete surface will be covered with two thicknesses of wet burlap which have been spot stitched, or wet
jute felt or gunny bags as soon after placing of concrete as it can be one without marking the surface and kept
thoroughly wet by continuously sprinkling water for a period not less than 21 days after the concrete has taken
its final set.
In lieu of continuous sprinkling, plastic sheeting or plastic coated burlap may be used to prevent moisture loss.
The concrete shall be pre-moistened & the plastic sheeting shall be held securely in place so that positive
moisture seal is provided to retain the curing moisture during the 14 days curing period. Form of perforated
sheeting shall be without delay repaired or replaced with suitable material.
Ponding which is most efficient method shall be used for curing slabs. For the first 18 to 24 hours,
the exposed surface is covered with moist hessian or canvas. After that small bank of dykes of lean
mortar are built around and along the slab, into number of rectangular ponds and filled with water.
This method is suitable for floors roof, slabs etc.
The method of curing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge and shall conform
to the requirements of ACI 308.
3.12.18 Quality Control Scheme and Testing Requirements
3.12.18.1 General Requirements
(a)
All materials shall be tested in the laboratories of Bangladesh University of

Engineering and Technology, Dhaka or at any recognized laboratory as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
(b)
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the standard procedure set herein.
(c)
After the test, if the quality of a particular consignment is found to be inferior to what is
specified, the material of the consignment will not be accepted and the Contractor shall
remove such rejected materials from site within the time stated in writing at the time of
[53]
rejection
(d)
The Contractor may arrange for testing to be carried out from the approved laboratory p r io r t o
d e l i v e r y o f ma t e r i a l s to s i t e . B u t t h i s s h a l l i n n o wa y r e l i e v e h i m o f h i s obligations
and responsibilities of carrying out necessary tests and removing all materials not fulfilling the
requirements set under this specification.
(e)
All sampling of m a t e r i a l s f o r t e s t i n g p u r p o s e s s h a l l b e m a d e o n a r a n d o m b a s i s
f o l l o w i n g t h e g u i d e l i n e o f the Engineer-in-Charge. All test samples shall be collected
in presence o f the designated representative o f the Engineer -in-Charge, who shall
supervise proper sealing/securing of the sample prior to sending it to the relevant
laboratory for testing. Engineer -in-Charge and the Contractor or their authorized
representative shall put joint signatures on the sealed containers/bags of the sample before
sending those to the recognized materials testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(f)
In transporting the sample (s) to the approved testing laboratory, precautions shall be
exer cised b y the Co ntr actor so as to ensure that samp les are no t harmed due to shock,
impact or jerk impairing its structural soundness.
(g)
On co mp letio n of tests, results shall be collected b y person (s) authorized b y the

Engineer-in-Charge only.
(h)
T he cost of all testing including all repeat tests (in case of non -fulfillment of
req u ir e me n t) a nd i ncid e nt al e xp e n se s s ha ll b e b o rne b y t h e Co ntr a cto r a nd no
separate payment shall be given to the Contractor for this purpose
3.12.18.2 Testing Requirements of Various Structural Materials

Unless provided otherwise in the Specifications or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any or
all of the tests specified here shall be performed as may be required by the Engineer in-Charge to
ascertain whether the quality of material and/or of any finished or partially finished wo rk is
approp riate for the p urpose for which it is or was inte nd ed to fulfill in accordance with the
Specifications. Only the major structural materials are covered in this section, the Engineer -inCharge may require tests on other materials and the Contractor shall have to comply with those
requirements as well.
C e me n t
For cement to be used, the mechanical properties as mentioned in Technical Specifications under Clause
No. 2.1 and its Sub-Clauses shall have to be satisfied.
Sampling, Testing and Approval of Cement
[54]
(i)
The Engineer-in-Charge for testing shall select the sample (two bags from each brand or each
consignment of supply of 25 metric tons).
(ii)
The Engineer-in-Charge shall approve or reject sources of cement on the basis of the test
results shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Tests for Cement

Sl no.
Property
Test method
Limit
Compressive strength of hydraulic cement
ASTM C109
3days:12.4 MPa(1800psi)
mortars using 2 or 50mm cube specimens

2
Initial time of setting of hydraulic cement by
ASTM C191
Not less than 45 min
ASTM C191
Mot more than 375 min
ASTM C204
Min 280m2 /Kg
vicat needle
3
Final time of setting of hydraulic cement by

vicat needle
Fineness of Portland cement by air

permeability apparatus
b) Fine and Coarse Aggregates

All aggregates to be used in the works shall fulfill the requirements set in the Technical Specification
under Clause No. 2.3, 2.4 and its Sub-Clauses.
Sampling, testing & approval of fine & coarse aggregates
(i)
Sampling of aggregates shall be done in accorda nce with the procedure outline in ASTM
D 75.
(ii)
For each consignment not exceeding 50m3 at least 1 (one) sample of sand shall be tested.
For each consignment not exceeding 100m", at least 1 (one) sample of coarse aggregates shall be
[55]
tested. Each sample for test shall be put in a bag closed with jute rope and wrapped with a
piece of paper containing signature of all the concerned parties and shall b sealed with
gala. The samples shall then be sent to recognize materials testing laboratory as directed by
(iii)
The Contractor shall supply the results of the tests set out in Table 2.
(iv)
Once the soundness and resistance to abrasion of coarse aggregates are established further
test will not be required on these properties as long as source and type of aggregates
remain unchanged.
(v)
No aggregate shall be used for concrete in the works unless the Engineer -in-Charge
has given his approval to
The source of supply
The chemical & physical properties of the aggregates.
The approval of Engineer -in-Charge will be based upon the information, samples and test results
submitted by the Contractor.
Table 2: Tests for Concrete Aggregates
Sl no.
Property
Test method
Limit
Particle size distribution of fine &
ASTM C136
As specified in Tables Y, Z1 &
coarse aggregates by sieve analysis
Clay lumps & friable particles in
Z2
ASTM C142
aggregates.
Maximum 3% for fineaggregates

and maximum 2% for coarse
Organic impurities in fine aggregates
ASTM C40
No organic material
Absorption of fine aggregates
ASTM 0128
Maximum 2.5%
Absorption of coarse aggregates
ASTM C127
Maximum 2.5%
Unit weight & voids in fine & coarse
ASTM C 29
To be determined by Engineer-
[56]
aggregates
Soundness of aggregates by use of 5
in-Charge from test results.
ASTM C 88
cycles of magnesium Sulphate tests
Magnesium Sulphate 15% for

coarse aggregates magnesium
Sulphate 10% for fine
aggregates Maximum 1.5%
Mica contents in fine aggregates
By physical
Maximum 1.5%
separation
Materials finer than 75 mm (No. 200)
ASTM C 117
Maximum 1%
ASTM D2419
Minimum 75
Los Angeles abrasion value of coarse
ASTM 131 (grade
Maximum 35%
aggregates
B samle)
sieve in fine aggregates
10
Sand equivalent value offine

aggregates
11
Mild Steel Reinforcing Bar
The M. S. reinforcing bar to be used shall have the properties as mentioned in Technical
Specifications under Clause No. 2.7 and its Sub-Clauses.
Sampling, Testing and Approval of Reinforcement

(i). For each consignment not exceeding 20 metric tons of as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge at least three
representative samples of each size of reinforcement shall beselected by the Engineer-in-Charge in presence of
the Contractor or his authorizedr ep r es e nta ti v e a nd s ha l l b e se n t i n s eal ed co nd i tio n fo r te s ti n g i n
a reco g n ized materials testing laboratory as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(ii). Tests shall be performed to ascertain the performed to ascertain the mechanicalproperties set in Table 3
[57]
Table 3: Tests for Reinforcing Steel
SL. NO.
Property
Test Method
Limit
Actual Diameter
1
Unit Weight
2
Yield or Proof Strength
ASTM C370
3
Ultimate Strength
ASTM A615
As per ASTM A615
4
Percent Elongation
5
Bending
6
Measurement of Deformation
7
The Contractor shall submit the test results to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. No reinforcement from a
consignment or lot shall be placed in the work without approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(d) Strength Test of Concrete
Mix proportions for desired concrete strength shall be based on Clauses 3 13.4 and its sub-clauses of
Technical Specifications. For sampling and strength test requirements Clauses 3.13.18.2 of the Technical
Specifications shall apply.
Sampling, Testing and Approval of Concrete Cast in Place
Six (6) samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed on each day shall be taken not less than
i).
ii).
iii).
once a day
nor less than once for each 115 cum casting
nor less than once each 465 sqm. of surface area for slabs or walls,
Three (3) cylinders shall be tested at 7 (seven) days and 3 (three) cylinders tested at 28 days for compressive
strength determinations
Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete"
(ASTM C 172).
Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and laboratory-cured in accordance with C
"Practice for Marking and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C 31) and
tested in accordance width, "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens"
(ASTM C 39).
The cylinders shall be provided with identification marks (8 characters maximum) and casting
date installed with synthetic paint. The markings should be placed as soon as the concrete hardens
on the top of the cylinders (about 18-24 hours after casting).
[58]
For each class of concrete (see section 3.13.4), the specified 28 days compressive strength (f'c)
shall have to be achieved. Strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered
satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met:
(i)
(ii)
Arithmetic average of strength of three samples equals or exceeds f 'c.
No individual strength falls below f 'c by more than 500 psi.
T he 2 8 d a ys st r e n gt h ( a ver a ge o f t hr e e c yl i nd er s) te st s ha ll b e u sed as a b as i s fo r
accep tance o f the co ncrete placed. 7 ( seven) d ays tests are made to ob tain ad vance
information on the adequacy of strength development.
Investigation of Low- strength test results

If any strength test of concrete sample of laboratory -cured cylinders falls below specified value of
f'c by more than 500 psi, the Contractor at his own cost and under guidance of the E n g i n eer -i n - C h ar ge
s ha ll arra n ge te s ts o f co r es d r il led f r o m t h e ar ea i n q ue st io n i n accordance with "Method
of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sa wed Beams of Co n cre te" ( AST M C 4 2 ) a nd
th e g uid el i ne s o f AC I 3 1 8 -9 5 s ha ll al so b e ap p li cab le i n evaluation of strength of the
member. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if
the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of f 'c and if no single core is less than 75
percent of f'c. If evaluation of strength by concrete cores confirms that the structural adequacy of the
portion of the structure remains in doubt, that portion will be removed by the Contractor and fresh
concreting shall be made under the guidance of the Engineer -in-Charge. If, in contrary, the
Engineer-in-Charge d eter mi n e s t h at t he sa id co n c rete i s lo cat ed wh e re it wi l l no t cr eat e a n
in to l erab le detrimental effect on the structure and the Contractor agrees to it, a reduced payment
to compensate the Employer for loss of durability and other lost benefits shall be a rranged. The
Engineer-in-Charge decision in regard to the amount of compensation shall be final.
(e) Test of Bricks
The bricks to be used shall have the properties as mentioned in Technical Specifications under
Clause No 2.2 and its Sub-Clauses.
For each consignment not exceeding 100,000 bricks at least 6 (six) bricks shall be tested to ascertain
the properties listed in Table 4.
Table 4: Test of Bricks
[59]
Sl. No.
1
2
3
4
Property
Immersions and Unit Weight
Efflorescence
Water Absorption
Test Method
Limit
3.12.18.3 Reporting Requirements
The Contractor shall keep records of all tests conducted including those which fail to meet
requirements dur ing the course o f execution o f the works or approval of materials. A
summary of tests conducted during each month shall be furnished enclosing all test results thereof
as an annexure to the Monthly Progress Report to be submitted by the contractor.
On co mp letio n o f the W o r k, and b efo re issuance o f the Co mp letio n Certi ficate, co p ies o f
all test reports shall be consolidated in a volume, three copies of which shall be submitted for
record of the Employer.
3
.Applicable Specification and Standards
1
2
The following ACI Specifications shall apply to the work:
.
ACI
1 201.2R ACI 207.1 R ACI 211.1
8
ACID
212.3R ACI 221 R ACI 304R ACID 304.2R ACI 305R ACI 308 AC1309
.
4
ACI 311 AR A C I 3 1 5 A C I 3 4 7 ACI 318 ACI363.3R
Guide to Durable Concrete
Mass Concrete
Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy Weight and Mass Concrete
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Guide for Use of Normal Weight Aggregates in Concrete
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. Placing Concrete by pumping
Methods
Hot Weather Concreting
[60]
Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
Guide for Concrete Inspection
Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement Guide to Formwork for Concrete
Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete Design and Construction of Drilled Piers
The following ASTM Standards shall apply to the work:
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
ASTM A370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel ASTM A563
Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel
Reinforcement
Bars for Concrete
ASTM C29
Test Method for Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate
ASTM C31
Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimen in the Field
ASTM C33
Specification for Concrete Aggregates
T e s t M e t h o d f o r C o m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h o f C y l i n d r i c a l C o n c r e t e Specimens
ASTM C40
Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C67
Test Method for Bricks
Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Viagnesiurn Sulfate
T est Metho d fo r Co mp r essive Str e ngt h o f H yd rau lic Ce men t Mo rtars (Using 2-in. or 50 mm
Cube Specimens)
Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 -mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM 125
Definition of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregate ASTM C127
Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggr egates ASTM C128 Test
Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregates ASTM C131 Standard Test Method
for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine. ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C142
Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump
of Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C187 Test Method for Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement
[61]
ASTM C191 Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cemen t by Vicat Needle ASTM C192
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
AS T M C 2 0 4 T e s t M e t h o d f o r F i n e n e s s o f P o r t lan d C e me n t b y Ai r P er m e a b i l i t y
Apparatus
ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Standard Specific ation for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C470 Specification for Moulds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically ASTM
C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C566 Test for Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
ASTM C617 Standard Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM D75
Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soil and Fine Aggregate
ASTM E l l
Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
T his item shall b e measur ed b y the cub ic meter co mp lete in place fo r the several classes of
concrete that may be involved. However measurements of particular items are indicated in Bill of
quantities Measurement shall be to the neat lines of the structure shown on the plans or as
ordered in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. The volume of reinforcement, conduit pipes and
fittings embedded in the concrete shall not be deducted from volume of the concrete.
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per cubic meter or as indicated in Bill of quantities for the severa l
cla s se s o f co ncr e te, wh i ch p r ic es s h al l b e fu ll c o mp e n s at io n fo r fur n i s h in g , preparing,
transporting, delivering, breaking chips, screening chips as requir ed, mixing and placing all
materials, including any admixtures, curing compound and curing and finishing of concrete,
construction including chamfering and removal of formwork and scaffolding where required and for
all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to
complete the item, except reinforcing steel unless otherwise noted in the Bill of quantities.
[62]
3.13 R.C.0 WITH WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURE
3.13.1
Description
This item shall be done as described in item 3.13 except that for water proofing admixture of Sika
Plastocrete Super (IS: 2645-1975 and IS 9103-1979) in proportion of 0.2% by weight of cement or
"SUPERBARBARA 05" of MBI International AG, NITTOPROOF of FOSR OK or equivalent,
made in UK/ Switzerland/ Singapore/ Saudi Arabia in proportion recommended by the
manufacturer is to be used in the concrete of the basement mat & wall, underground water reservoir
and where necessary.
3.13.2 Construction Requirement
Thins approved admixture shall be put to the concrete mixture machine along with the cement. Other
procedures are same as in item 3.13 including form work etc.
3 .1 3 . 3 M ea s u r e me n t
Same as mentioned in item 3.13.
3.13.4 Basis of payment
Same as mentioned in item 3.13. Waterproofing admixture will be paid separately as stated in bill of
quantities.
3.14 BINDING AGENT
3 .1 4 .1
Description
[63]
This item shall be applied as a bonding agent for concrete and morter by "BARRA
EMULSION 57D" or approved equivalent compound for construction joint as per
manufacturer instruction, drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
This approved admixture shall be put to joints of old & new concrete and concrete & brick work
as per manufactural instruction.
3 .1 4 .3 Basis of payment
Bond agent will be paid separately as stated in bill of quantities.
3.15 REINFORCING STEEL IN CONCRETE

This item shall consist of furnishing and placing in concrete reinforcing steel (MKS Rod) of
quality, type, size and quantity designated, all as required by these Specifications and as shown
on
the applicable
structural drawings.
3.15.1
Description
3.15.2 Materials
Reinforcing steel shall be 60 Grade, deformed bars from billet steel as specified on the
structural drawings and shall meet the following requirements:
a). Quality of reinforcement steel, its properties including strength, elongation, bending,
splicing, hooking, co vering and all related events shall be in accordance with the requirements
of BDS 1313-1991 and ASTM A615 M.
It should be noted that steel made from scrap iron shall not be accepted for any type of work.
All reinforcement bars shall be clean and free from loose scale, dirt, paint oil, grease or other
foreign substance. Bars should be placed in position as drawing/design requirement and be cleaned
with a stiff wire brash if required.
[64]
3.15.3 Bending of Reinforcement
All reinforcement bars shall be bent cold to pertinent dimensions using bending appliances and
method approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. All bars of slab and beam shall invariably have
standard hooks at the end. All standard hook shall meet the following requirements:
a) A semicircular turn plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than
the free end of the bar.
62mm at
b) A 90-degree turns plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free. end of the bar.
c) For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn plus an extension
of at least six bar diameters but not less than 75mm at the free end of the bar.
The radii of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks shall n ot be less than the
values given bellow-
Bar size
Minimum radii
10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm
2.5 bar dia
19 mm, 22 mm, 25 mm
28 mm, 32 mm, 35 mm
bar dia
4 bar die
Ends for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside of the bar not less than one bar diameter.
In case of any discrepency between the drawing and specification, drawing shall prevail.
3.15.4 Placing of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be placed, supported and maintained in the position shown in the
Contract Drawing and shall be checked and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge before
placement of concrete begins. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer -in-Charge, all
intersecting bars shall be tied together with double layer of 22G black iron wire and the ends of
[65]
wire shall be turned into the main bod y of the co ncrete. Clear co ver must be maintained to the
side of reinforcement as shown on the drawing by using concrete blocks or separators.
3.15.5 Splicing of Reinforcement
No splices shall be made in the reinforcement where not shown in the drawing. Wherever it is
necessar y to sp lice r einf o r cement at p o ints o ther than tho se s ho wn o n the p lans, Drawings
showing the location of each splice shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge
before the reinforcing steel is placed.
a) Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is tensile: Splices at points of

maximum tensile stress shall be avoided where possible, such splices where used shall be
lapped or otherwise fully developed. In any case the splice shall transfer the entire co mp uted
str es s fro m b ar to b a r wi tho u t e x ceed i n g t hree fo ur t hs o f t h e permissible bond values for
the co ncrete. The length of lap shall be as sho wn in structural drawing.
b) Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is compressive: Where lapped splices
are used at zones of compressive stress, it will be as sp ecified in drawing. Where longitudinal
bars are offset at a splice the slope of the inclined portion of the bar with the axis of the column
shall not exceed 1 in 6 and the portions of the bar above and below the offset shall be parallel
to the axis of the column. Additional stirrups, ties, etc shall secure adequate horizontal support
at the offset. Offset bars shall be bent before they are placed in the forms.
3.15.6 Supports
Precast concrete blocks or metal supports of adequate strength, of proper dimen sion and in sufficient
number shall be used for supporting the bars in position. Blocks shall be of a shape acceptable to
the Engineer-in-Charge and designed so that they will not overturn when concrete is stored. They shall be
made of concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate size from same materials and of the same mix
proportions as that of the oncrcte in which they are to be used. They shall be cast and properly
cured for at least seven days before use and shall have wire or other device cast in the block fo r the
purpose of attaching them secur el y to the reinfo rcement. W here d irected chairs mad e with
1 2 mm b ars s hall b e provided in slab for keeping the negative reinforcement in place during
concreting. These chair s when used shall provide proper cover as required and the numbers
shall be as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
[66]
3 .1 5 .7 W el di ng o f Re in f o rce me nt
Reinforcement in str uctur es shall not be welded excep t where permitted. All weld ing
procedures shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer -in-Charge in writing. In pile
reinforcement welding may be necessary and shall be done in accordance to the drawing and
with the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge. Welding for connecting the damaged portion of
the reinforcement shall be allowed on both sides of the Re -bar and shall be 50mm of welding length on
both sides and on ends.
3 .1 5 .8 Co ncr et e pro t ect io n f o r R ei nfo r ce me nt
Unless other wise sho wn in the structural drawings. the co vering of reinforcement for different
types of members shall be as follows:
N/lat/Footing bottom
75 mm
Mat/Footing side
75 mm
Column.
All sides, above FGL
50 mm
Below ground level
75 mm
Beam:
40 mm V11,311s (Above 250n,)m except
Side, Top and Bottom
Basement wall
Exposed face
Inside face
40 mm
20 mm
Slab & Stair:

Bottom
20 mm
Top
20 mm
[67]
Water tank:
Water face
50 mm
Otherface
25 mm
3.15.9
Protective Coating
All exposed reinforcing steel at construction joints shall be protected with a brush coat neat
cement, mixed to a consistency of thick paint, within one week after the placing of. -- initial
concrete, unless it is definitely known that the steel will be embedded within 60 Ca., This coating
shall be entirely removed, by lightly tapping with a hammer or other tool, mc than one week
previous to the placing of the final pour. The contractor shall notify Engineer -in-Charge or his
authorised representative when the steel has been placed position for pouring concrete and no
concrete shall be placed until the Engineer-in-Charge has inspected the steel and given his approval in
writing.
Reinforcing steel bars shall be measured in M.Ton actually placed in different reinforced
concrete members like mat, column, beam, slab, stair etc. With unit price, reinforcement
actually in place as shown on the plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer -in-Charge shall
be considered. The weight paid for shall include splice laps o f reinforcement as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge but no allo wance will be made for the laps, clips, c h a ir, sepera to r,
wires, o ver wei ght s etc. o r o ther fastening d evic es fo r ho ld ing the reinforcement in place.
No measurements shall b e given for over weight, clips or other fastening devices.
The amount of completed and accepted material, measured as provided above, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price per Metric Ton for "Reinforcing Steel", which prices shall be full
compensation for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting, and placing all
materials, and for all labour equipment, tools, including all chairs, seperator, overweight,
overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and incidentals necessary to co mplete the work. The weight
shall be considered as per BDS 131191
3.16 WATER PROOFING POLYTHENE SHEET
3.16.1
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and laying in place two layers of
0.075mm thick polythene sheets over brick flat soling in floor of buildings and where needed in
accordance with the applicable Plans, Schedules and Specification.
[68]
The sheets shall be laid within the building covering the entire inside floor area. Before laying
the sheets the brick surface shall be cleaned with a duster to give the surface a free of extraneous
particles. The sheets shall be free of darnage tear or other imperfection and shall be laid such that
there is a minimum of 225mm overlap between adjacent strips. The second layer shall be laid
over the first in the same direction but with a stagger of half the strip width.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of area covered by the sheet. No allowance
will be made for overlaps.

The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the
contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
all materials, equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials, cleaning,
preparing, cutting, laying, fixing overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as all incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
3.17 PVC WATER STOPPER
3.17.1
Description
This item shall be done by approved type of PVC Water Stopper having 250mm width and
minimum 6mm thickness for horizontal and vertical construction joint, length to be provided on site
as per drawing or as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.17.2 Workmanship
The PVC Water Stopper sheet will be fixed vertically in the vertical construction joints and
horizontally in the horizontal construction joints in such a way that half o f its width will be
embedded in the 1st stage of the casting at construction joints. The fixing should be such that its
position and alignment shall not be changed due to concreting or any other activity. Before 2nd
stage of construction, the PVC water stopper surface along with the old concrete surface should be
cleaned; cleaned properly. Care should be taken. so that PVC water stopper is not de-bonded
with the old concrete any way. The strip should be continuous. In the basement, wall it should be
continuous close circuit. Any joint of the PVC water stopper should be of water tight and should be
done as per manufacturer's instructions.
Water stopper shall be measured in linear meter in accordance with the drawing and Bill of
Quantities
[69]

The rates shall cover the full compensation for providing the materials. fixing in position
including all splicing, -joints, testing as required, covering all labour incidental etc.
3.18 WATER PROOF MEMBRANE WORK ON WALL AND FLOOR
3.18.1. Description
This item of work shall be of approved type of reinforced petroleum asphalt sheet (proofex
GP or Jiffy seal or approved Equivalent) of minimum 1.40mm thickness for the area under
basement raft, side of raft, outside surface of the vertical wall as per drawing and instruction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Before applying the sheet, the surface on wh i ch sheet to be applied need to be improve for even and
smooth and should be clean from dust. dirt, mud or any type of loose material. After approved type of
primer and a coal of black bituminous paint should be applied and then reinforced petroleum
asphalt sheet should be fixed on this treated surface as per manufacturer's instruction. The joint of
the sheet should be done by overlapping each other by at least 75mm and should be 100%
watertight No loose fixing will be accepted. Joints should be sealed as per manufacturer's
instruction. Double layer to be provided as per drawings in same procedure.
3 . 1 8 . 3 M e t h o d o f M e a su r e me n t
The unit price shall be in square meter complete in place of the built up area i.e. completion of the
all the processes shall be measured double layer alo ne unit. No measurement shall be given for
overlapping.
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per Sqm of completed and accepted work which
price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transporting, prepa ring, laying of
all materials and for all materials, labour tools and equipment, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT and
all incidental necessary to complete the item.
3.19 BRICK
3.19.1
WORK 250mm THICK AND ABOVE
Description
This item shall consist of constructing brick masonry work in 1:6 cement mortar in such thickness and
at such heights as required by the plans.
[70]
319.2
Materials
All materials shall meet the requirement of the re Specifications.
a) Bricks shall be 1st class well-burnt bricks of uni with sharp corners conforming to BDS 208:1980.
b) Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement 232:1993 (2"d Revision)
c) Sand shall be clean well-graded natural sand having a minimum FM of 1.5 as per BNBC 6-95.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportions on a clean board or platform
until the colour of the mixture is uniform. Water shall then be a d d e d s p a r i n g l y , o n l y t h e
m i n i m u m n e c e s s a r y b e i n g u s e d t o p r o d u c e a workable mixture of normal cons istency, The
water cement ratio in no case shall exceed 0.50 by weight, or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The mixing shall be done on a clean hard platform with watertight joints to avoid leakage. The mixture should
be covered with polythene sheet or other means so that dust or other foreign materials cannot be , deposited. At
the close of each day's work, the mixing trough and the pans shall be thoroughly I'cleaned and
washed.
Mo rtar s h al l b e mi x ed i n q u a nti ti e s r eq u ired fo r i m med ia te u se wi t hi n 3 0 minutes of

mixing. Mortar, which has taken its initial set, shall, on no account be used on the work, nor shall it
be remixed with or without additional materials
or re tempered by other means.
If necessary, bricks shall be scrubbed clean by steel brush and washed. W a t e r i n s o a k i n g v a t
s h a l l b e r e p l a c e d a t r e g u l a r i n t e r v a l s t o a v o i d concentration of salt and dirt. VAT for the
soaking of brick shall be constructed above the ground with a height of about 1 metre and size
enough to soak sufficient for a days work. For clearing the drity water a hole shall be kept at the
bottem of one side. The vat shall have two chambers, one for soaking brick and one for clean
water to be used for mixing mortar. After the days work, the vat shall be cleaned, filled with fresh
water and sufficient number of bricks shall be submerged in the vat for overnight soaking.
Brickwork shall be built in plumb and shall be carried up regularly throughout the entire length of
the structure. Unless otherwise specified, bricks shall be laid in English Bond with frog mark on
top and each brick being set with mortar in bed and vertical joints. All bricks shall be whole except
where necessary for closers and where expressly authorised. All horizontal joints shall be parallel
[71]
and level. Vertical joints in alter nate co urses shall co me directly o ver one another. Joint
thickness should be uniform and shall be 6mm for pointing brick work and shall in no case exceed
10mm for other brick works. Exposed joints shall be raked and flush-pointed unless otherwise
specified and the face of the work shall be kept clean as work proceeds. Pouring of water in the
joints at the time of laying the brick shall be strictly prohibited. If the brick work is to be
plastered, at the end of the days work the vertical and horizontal joints be raked to a depth of
12mm with a bent iron rod. so as to ensure good adhesion to the plaster to be done subsequently. The
joints of brickwork that shall remain below and in contact with ground shall be made flushed with
mortar by trowels at the time o f br ick wo rk. At freq uent intervals, the wall surface shall be
checked with the straight edge (patta) and the plumb bob to see that the wall is in correct vertical
plane and that t;-)ere is no depression on the surface any where. T he straight ed ge shall b e p ut
at vario us angles to ensur e corr ect surface of brickwork. All masonary shall be true to plumb
within the tolerance prescribed below :
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall riot exceed 6mm per 3m
b) Relative d isplacement between load bearing walls in adjacent stories intended to be in

vertical alignment shall not exceed 6mm.
Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry by means of a sleeve
at least long enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipe line. Such sleeves shall not be
placed closer than three diamaters centre to centre nor shall they unduly impair the strength of
construction.
Chases, recesses and holes shall be permitted within the tolerances preseribed below:
c) Vertical chases shall be preferred instead of horizontal chase.
d) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2m in any stretch of wall and shall not lbw located within
350mm of an opening or within 250mm of a cross wall that serves as a stiffening wall for stability.
e) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of a wall.
When brickwork in any section can not be carried up in level courses, the work is to be racked back in
regular steps of one course each.
The height of day's work shall be limited to 1.25 meter unless otherwise permitted. In exposed
situations the day's work shall be protected against harmful effect of weather during and for a period
immediately following construction until the mortar has sufficiently hardened. All brick work shall be
thoroughly cured for a period of at least 7 days. Fixture in masonry such as anchors, clamps, brackets,
pipes, etc. shall be built-in during construction at no additional cost to the Contract.
[72]
3.19.4
Method of Measurement
This item shall be measured in net cubic meter of brickwork built in place to the neat lines of the structures
shown on the plans with 250mm width for one brick and 375mm for one and half brick length. No
deduction shall be made for flues, storm drainage, sewerage, electric conduit and other utility pipe
holes for payment of work. Necessary scaffolding shall be done at the expense of the contractor for
proper execution of work. The rate shall include the cost of erection and removal of scaffolding.
3.19.5
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price per cum of completed and accepted work measured as
provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transporting,
preparing, laying, and curing all materials and for all labour, scaffolding, tools and equipment,
overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item.
3.20
3.20.1
125mm THICK BRICK WORK

Description
The work covered by this item shall consists in constructing 125mm thick wall with 1st class bricks in
1:4 cement mortar at any heights as required by the plans.
3.20.2
Construction Requirement and Materials
Materials and method of construction shall be as stated in item 3.20 except that the mortar shall consist of 1
part of cement and 4 parts of sand.
3.20.3
125mm thick brick walls shall be measured in square meter actually built wall deducting all openings and
incorporated foreign structures, such as lintels, columns, beams, etc., provided that the area to be deducted
exceeds 0.1 square meter.
3.20.4
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed and accepted work
measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing,
transporting, preparing, l a yi n g a nd c u ri n g al l ma te rial s a nd fo r a ll lab o u r, sca ffo ld i n gs ,
to o l s a nd equipment, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
3 .2 1
3.21.1
6 2 m m T H I C K F A C E B R I CK W O RK
Description
The work covered by this item shall consists in constructing 25 mm thick facing b r i c k w o r k o n t h e
e x t e r n a l s i d e o f 2 5 0 m m b r i c k w a l l a n d c o l u m n , d r o p w a l l e t c with hard
pressed clinker Facing Bricks (200 x 62 x 25 mm size, CT -5 of Mirpur Cera mi c o r eq uivalent) o f
ap p ro ved q uality, p r essed with 1 0 /2 0 mm t hic k cement mortar (1:3) at any heights as required by the
[73]
plans.
3.21.2
Construction Require ment and Materials
This item will provide brick work for 200 x 62 x25 mm facing brick work in superstructure.
Materials and method of construction is mostly same as item 3.19. It 'is suggested that, 10days
after of the completion of 250 mm brick wall fa c i n g b r i c k - wo r k m a y s t a r t w i t h t h e r a c k i n g
o u t j o i n t s o f b a c k wa l l a n d application of a 5mm rough plaster. The bricks need to be cut to
required sizes with electric machines wherever necess ary. Br i ck work needs to be washed with
clean water and a piece of foam within short intervals after the completion every 2 -3 feet of
brick work so that cement can not adhere to the finished surface. Final wash of after every day
work is suggested with a strong wire brush with care. High quality Groove pointing to brick
wall with cement having (conforming to BIDS 232) pointing salt cement (mixed filth Black
Oxide) and raking out the joints. Finally a layer of Water-soluble Silicon coating should be applied
with proper brush within 5-10 days of the completion of whole work.
3 .2 0 .3
M et ho d o f M ea s ure me nt
45-50 mm thick brick walls shall be measured in square meter actually built wall deducting
all openings and 'incorporated foreign structures, such as lintels co lumns, b eams, etc., p ro vided
that the area to b e d ed ucted exceed s 0 .1 sq uare meters.
3 .2 0 . 4
B a s i s o f Pa y me n t
P a y m e n t s h a l l b e m a d e a t t h e c o n t r a c t u n i t p r i c e p e r s q u a r e m e t e r completed and
accepted work measured as provided above which price s constitute full compensation for furnishing,
storing, transport c o m p e n s a t i o n f o r f u r n i s h i n g , s t o r i n g , t r a n s p o r t i n g , p r e p a r e la yi n g
and c uri n g al l ma ter ia l s and fo r a ll lab o ur, s ca ffo ld i n g s, to o l s equipment, overhead, profit,
taxes. VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item
3.22
DAMP-PROOF COURSE (DPC)
3.22.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing, on top of foundation walls or elsewhere,
75mm thick artificial stone with Concrete Class C19 having water proofing admixture of Sika
Plastocrete Super or equivalent 0.2% by weight of cement or eq uivalent admixture of approved quality
and then hessian-bitumen sand including two water tight layers of bitumen as per instruction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.22.2
Materials
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone chips graded from 12 mm to 6mm, fine aggregate
shall be Sylhet sand of FM. 2.5 minimum. Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-1, water
shall be potable water.
[74]
3.22.3
Construction Requirements
The surface over which the DPC is to be lad shall be thoroughly scrapped to remove mud, dirt etc. and
washed clean with clean water and allowed to dry.
Shuttering shall be done on both sides of the wall where DPC is layed over walls. The shuttering
shall be strong and so fixed that it does not give in or gets disturbed during compaction and the
concrete slurry does not leak out.
The concrete prepared by mixing the ingredients shall be laid and tempered thoroughly to make a dense
mass.
The top surface of DPC in walls shall be in the same level of floor finish and shall no t be carried
across the doorways or other openings. The upper layer of cement concrete floors shall be continued
over such openings and shall be laid at the same time as floor.
The base of the DPC shall be even. Uneven base shall cause retention of air void between the base and
the DPC, which is not desirable.
Damp-proof course shall extend the full width of the plinth walls unless otherwise required by the plans
and shall be laid only after the levels of the plinth have been checked.
The concrete of Class C19 shall be cast with admixture of Sika Plastocrete Super or equivalent
and shall be cured for at least 5 (five) days after placement and shall then be allowed to dry for 24 hours
before applying bitumen. The bitumen shall be heated to between 350-375 0 F and applied on the concrete
in two layers in an even coat using 160 kg of bitumen per 100 sqm of the damp-proof course and
then one layer of hessain and bitumen (140 kg/100 sqm) and another layer of hessian over it use
another layer of bitumen (150 kg/sqm) and sand. The last layer shall be sanded immediately after it is
applied. The bitumen shall be of grade 80-100 penetration.
3.22.4
Damp-proof course shall be measured by square meter in place.

3.22.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price of sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, labors, tools and equipment in mixing, placing and curing concrete, application of bituminous,
coats and sand blinding and for all incidentals such as over profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to
complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.23
PLASTER ON R.C.C. SURFACES
3.23.1
Description
This item shall consist of providing 6 mm to 10 mm thick 1:4 cement -sand plaster R.C.0
members in accordance with these Specification.
[75]
3.23.2
Materials
Materials shall be same as plaster on brick surface.

3.23.3
Construction Requirement
When a flat smooth concrete surface such as ceiling, column or beam shall be plastered the
surface shall be roughened beforehand by picking thoroughly with a suitable picking tool and
then watered. Plaster shall consist of 1 part cement and 4 parts sand a -have thickness of 6mm
and shall be applied in a single coat. Where plaster on concrete surface is required 12mm
thick, it shall consist of two coats, under and finish. The coat shall consist of a grout application
and shall have minimum thickness of 6mm and shall be leveled with straight edge and scratched
for key. The finish coat shall be toweled over with care and leveled with straight edge to obtain
a flat smooth surface. The under and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to permit the
under coat to set. All edges and corners unless otherwise shown on the plans, shall be rounded or
chamfered as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All mouldings shall be neat, clean and true to
template. The use of `Usha' in the ceiling plaster is very important as this is the only way ho w
the plaster concrete can be conveniently made smooth and even. Lack of attention on this point
shall give a poor finish on surfaces like ceiling, which speaks s eriously on the aesthetic look and
finish of the room.
3.23.4
The work shall be measured in Square meter of actually plastered surface.

3.23.5
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made for the amo unt o f co mp leted and accep ted wo rk measures provided
above at the contract unit price per Square meter of plaster which price shall, constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering su rface to be plastered,
watering and protecting the plaster after completion, provision, erection removal of scaffoldings
including overhead, profit, taxes. VAT etc as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to
the applicable plans.
3.24
3.24.1
PLASTER ON BRICK MASONRY
Description
This item shall consist of providing 12mm to 20mm thick (1:4)/ (1:6) on walls, and where necessary
in accordance with these Specifications & direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.24.2 Materials
Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant section of Material Specifications.
a).
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-I ASTM C-150 or BDS 232:1993 (2"
Revision) unless stated otherwise.
b).
Sand shall be clean well grade natural sand having a fineness modulus of 1.5. Sand shall be washed
carefully in water to get rid of the trouble of U altpeter action in plaster and dampness to the wall due to
efflorescence. A 100-mesh wire netting sieve shall screen Sand.
c).
Water shall be potable and clean and contain no salt or organic materials
[76]
d).
Admixture shall be mixed with the cement mortar of approved quantity where item in BOQ is
specifically mentioned.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportion until the mixture is uniform in colour.
Only enough water shall be added to provide plasticity. Mortar shall be mixed only in quantities for
immediate use. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be used on the work with or without
addition of fresh material. Mixing of mortar on a finished floor must not be allowed.
3.24.3
Surface preparation
Before application of plaster, the joints in brickwalls shall be adequately raked out where necessary and
smooth concrete surfaces shall be roughened to provide key. The surfaces shall be scrubbed clean of
loose materials and soaked with water and kept damped for 24 hours in case of brick masonry.
3.24.4
Construction requirements
All concealed utility servi ce lines, conduits, pipes, clamps, door/windows frames and other inserts must
be in position before plastering commences. Chiselling and patch repairing of piaster shall not be
permitted.
Application Method : Cement and sand properly mixed with water in the proportion as specified shall be
laid on clean walls to a thickness of 12mm. Thicker plaster on an average upto 20mm may be necessary for
the uneven face of the 250mm wall.
Guide bands of plaster called the 'Paya' first be laid on the wall at suitable distance and their verticality
and their being in the same plane shall be checked by a wooden straight edge (Patta) and plumb bob.
Then the space in between shall be made even by laying the plastering materials and finishing the
surface evenly between guide bunds. The surface and level of plaster should be checked by placing
the straight edge horizontally, vertically and at different angles.
Laid plaster shall be finished by straight edge and trowel. Adequately long straight edge shall be
used to bring the surface t o true plane and level. After finishing the plaster with trowels and after
some time steel trowel (USHA) shall be used to make the plaster smooth. Care should be taken
to see that usha is not used just after laying of the plaster when it is too soft.
Neither should it be used after it has completely hardened up. It should be use: just after the
plaster has commened to set, so that there is no mark of usha in the plaster for obtaining a perfectly
smooth surface having no undulation.
Plaster which co nsists of two coats, under and finish, when applied over masonry, the under
and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to perm undercoat to set. Water proofing
admixture of specified quantity shall be r with cement mortar as per manufacturers instruction.
Plaster shall be kept moist by watering and protected from weather for at lee days immediately
following completion.
If any cracks appear in the plaster or any part sounds hollow when tapped found to b e so ft or
o therwise defective after the p laster has dri ed, it XA co n sid ered as d e fe ct an d t he d e fe ct
s ha ll b e mad e go o d b y c ut ti n g o ut a nd replastering at the Contractor's own cost.
3.24.5
The work shall be measured in square meter of actually plastered surface.
3.24.6
Basis of Pay ment

[77]
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as
provided above at the contract unit price per square meter of plaster which price shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mor tar p lasterin g sur fa ce to be
p lastered , water ing a nd p r o tecting the p laster after completion, provision, erection and
removal of scaffoldings including overhead p ro fit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as incidentals
necessary to co mp lete the wo r k according to the applicable plans.
3 .2 5
N EA T - C EM E NT (SKIRTING/DADO)
3 .2 5 .1
Description
T h i s i t e m S h u l l c o n s i s t o f p r o v i d i n g 6 m n 1 t o 1 2 m r n m a t c e m e n t with
black/redoxide finished (1:2) cement- sand Skirting/ Dado on a (1:4) cement-sand mortar plaster
of 12mm thick underbed on walls or where necessary in according with these specifications.
3 .2 5 .2
Materials
Materials shall meet requirement as stated in item in 3.24.2.
3.25.3
Construction requirements
Wall plaster, if any, shall be removed along the floor to the required height and the surface shall be
thoroughly scrubbed and wetted before applying the underbid the second undercoat shall have a nominal
thickness of 6mm and the total built-up thickness will be same as that of the plaster on the wall. A3mm
deep and 3mm wide groove shall be formed where skirting/Dado meets wall plaster.
The skirting/ Dado shall be installed flush with the finished wall surface. The intersection with the
floor shall be a right angle and the top of the skirting/ Dado shall be straight and sharp.
The underbid shall be laid as uniformly as possible and allowed to become firm before scratching for
key and subsequently allowed to become thoroughly dry before applying the second undercoat. A neat
cement paste 3mm thick shall be spread evenly over the second coat and shall be steel trowelled
under firm pressure to produce a dense uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks.
The work shall be cured and protected from weather for a t least 10 days immediately following the
installation.
3.25.4
The work shall be measured in square meter of actually plastered surface.

3.25.5
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above at
the contract unit price per Square meter of plaster which price shall constitute full compensation for
[78]
furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering surface to be plastered, watering and protecting the
plaster after completion, provision, erection and removal of scaffoldings including overhead, profit,
taxes, VAT etc. as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable
plans.
3.26
PLINTH PROTECTION
3.26.1
Description
Plinth protection work around the building by 20mm cement plaster with neat cement finish at top
3.26.2
Plaster 20mm thick with (1:4) cement sand mortar according to specification no 1.5 and neat cement finish
at top.
3.26.3
Plinth protection shall be measured in square meter actually built area from top of the apron or finished
ground level to the plinth level or otherwise specified.
3.26.4
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed & accepted work
measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for plastering with neat
cement finishing including supply of all materials labor, equipment, curing etc. complete.
3.27
PLASTER WITH WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURE
3.27.1
Description
This item consists of providing 20mm thick 1:4 cement mortar plaster with water proofing
admixture of Sika Plastocrate Super in proportion of 0.2% by weight of cement or approved
similar quality o f ad mixture in proportion of manufacturer recommendation. This plaster shall
be used on R.C.C, surface or Brick wall as or directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.27.2
P l a s t e r s h a l l c o n s i s t o f 1 p a r t o f p o r t l a n d c e m e n t a n d 4 p a r t s o f s a n d w i t h recommended
quantity of approved water proofing admixture. However the whole procedure of this work
shall be done according to the directio n of Engineer -in-Charge.
Method of Measurement: Same as sated in 3.24.
3.27.3
Basis of payment
Same as stated in 3.24 except admixture. The quantity of admixture will be paid it separate.
3.28
DRIP COURSE
[79]
3.28.1
Description
The work co vered b y this item shall co nsists of providing drip course /nosing / throating at
the edge of sunshade or cornice with cement mortar (1:2) including scaffolding, curing at least
for 7 days etc. all complete in all floor as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.28.2
Measurement shall be on running meter for completed and acceptable works.

3.28.3
Basis of Payment
P a yme n t s ha ll b e gi v e n as p er u ni t co n tra ct p r ic e a s me n tio n ed i n t he b i ll o f quantities.

This payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, and equipment, taxes,
VATS etc. and incidental charges necessary to complete work.
3.29
3.29.1
MAKING GROOVE ON WALL SURFACE

Description
The work covered by this item shall consists of making groove of 50mm, wide & 25mm deep and
to be provided on all types of wall surface as per drawing and direction of Engineer-in-charge. The faces of the
groove must be straight, smooth and well finished as per approved sample.
Z
3.29.2
Groove shall be marked during plaster. Care shall be taken for pointing. In case of any damage the
contractor shall make good to the damage at his own cost.
3.29.3
Measurement shall be on running meter for completed and acceptable works.

3.29.4
Basis of Payment.
Payment shall be given as per unit contract price as mentioned in the bill of quantities. This
payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, equipment, taxes, VATS etc. and
incidental charges necessary to complete the work.
3.30
NEAT CEMENT FINISHING
3.30.1
Description
The work shall consist of applying neat cement finishing over green plaster/ concrete surface using
cement slurry, rubbing smooth with steel trowel curing for 7 days etc. complete in all floor or where
necessary as per requirements and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.30.2
Measurement
[80]
Measurements for payment shall be made in square meter of area covered by the neat cement finishing.
3.30.3
Basis of Payment
Payment for completed and accepted work, shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of
quantities per square meter which payment include supply of all materials, labors, equipment etc. complete.
3.31
CEMENT CONCRETE IN FLOOR
3.31.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing i n floor or elsewhere, 75150mm thick
cement concrete with Concrete Class C141C17 as specificed in Schedule of Item.
3.31.2
Materials
Same as in Article 3.12.2.

3.31.3
Construction Requirements
Construction shall be done as per requirements of drawing and the method shall be same as decribed in 3.12.
3.31.4
Ce me nt co ncr ete in flo o r at p linths level s hall b e mea sured in sq uare met er in p lace
provided the thickness of C .C. is mentioned in the Bill of Quantities or the measurement shall be
in cum.
3.31.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above. shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall con stitute full compensation for furnishing
all materials, labour, mason, tools and equipment in mixing, placing and curing concrete,
application of bituminous coats and sand blinding and for all incidentals such as overhead, profit,
taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.32
PATENT STONE FLOORING
3.32.1 Description
The item shall consist of constructing 38mm thick concrete with 12mm downgraded stone, sand
and cement in specified panels of floor slab and elsewhere in accordance with these Sp ecificatio ns. Use
ap p ro xi matel y 2 5 kg o f c e ment p er 1 0 m 2 fo r neat ce ment fini sh a nd finish with steel trowel up to
the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge or as directed.
3 .3 2 .2
M a t er ia l s
Cement: Ordinary PortIand Cement Type-1.

Sand: Sand shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
C o a r se a g g r eg a t e: C o a r s e a g g r e g a t e s h a l l b e 1 2 m m d o wn g r a d e d cr u s h e d s t o n e. Crushed
stone and sand shall be properly washed and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
[81]
Materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of item 3.13. here of for
Concrete Class C17. The flooring shall be laid preferably not later than 24 hours after the floor
slab is poured. When flooring is to be laid on an older concrete slab, the base surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all loose materials by stiff wire brush, roughened seemed necessary and washed
and so aked with clean water. Surp lus water shall b e removed and a dense cement grouting is applied
to the surface before flooring is placed. The floor shall be divided into panels of specified sizes,
which shall not be more than 1 sqm by means of wooden battens. The top of the ba t tens shall be at
the level of the finished floor surface. The mixture shall be spread evenly between the battens in
alternate panels and shall uniformly consolidated and leveled by a strike -off. When the moisture
has disappeared from the surface, the surface shall be steel -toweled under firm pressure to
produce a dense uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks. If any depression has to be filled, a small
quantity of the finer materials in the proportions specified may be used but his should t_ avoided
as far as possible. Minimum 1.5nim thick, neat cement finishing shall be done using cement powder
strained through fine cloth and paste of cement shall be rubbed in surface with the help of small steel
trowels working on the surface carefully and repeat using at least 4 passes over the entire area
till the neat cement finish is smooth, polls -plane and hard.
The dividing battens shall be removed carefully after 16 hrs. and the remaining panels shall be completed
in the aforesaid manner. Joints would be marked with thin ropes to allow cracks, if any, to form along
straight line and providing neat appearance.
The work shall be cured and protected from weather for at least 10 days immediately following the
laying. Curing shall be done by banding with cement sand very lean mortar or by only sand. Under no
circumstances mud band shall be allowed which shall keep a permanent stain mark on the floor.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of visible finished floor surface, additions
being made for thresholds and deduction for columns or other constructions and openings in the floor.
The amount of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, equipment and labour, including transport, storage and handling of all materials, hatching,
mixing, pouring, rolling and curing of concrete including overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as all
incidentals necessary to complete the work according to applicable plans.
3.33 PARKING FLOORING

3.33.1
Description
Cement concrete 50mm thick on parking floor slab in ground floor and where necessary with screed
finish top with Concrete Class C19 in a maximum section 3m x 4m and filling the 12mm thick
expansion joints with premixed sand bitumen filler including preparing sub-grade, centering, shuttering,
pouring concrete, breaking stone chips, screening, mixing, compacting, leveling, curing and
finishing etc all complete including the supply of all materials and labor as per drawings, specifications
and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.33.2 Measurement and Payment
[82]
Measurement shall be made in square meter and paid at contract unit price mentioned in
the bill of quantities.
3.34 TERRAZO IN SITU FLOOR
3.34.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of providing 10/12mm thick in -situ terrazzo topping on
concrete Class C17 under-bed on floor slabs, stairs and where necessary in accordance with these
specification.
3.34.2 Materials
Gray cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-1, white cement shall be Japanese origin or as
specified in the schedule of work.
Marble chips if not otherwise specified shall be white in color and of required size and proportion and of
Italian/Pakistani or equivalent origin or as stated in the Bill of Quantities.
Sand shall he clean well-graded natural sand of fineness modules not less than 2.5.
Stone chips shall be 12mm downgraded and in all other respect meet the requirements of coarse
aggregate of item 3.13.
Base shall be thoroughly scrubbed with steel brush and clean water and surplus water shall be
removed.
An under -bed of patent stone co mpo sed of Class C17 shall be prepared and placed in
accordance with requirements of item 3.33.
The bed shall be screed to uniform level and specified thickness as per applicable plans a - -_ shall be
cured for two days before placing topping. Sample terrazzo work shall be approved by the Engineerin-Charge before full scale execution of the work started. The designed floor lay out shall be as per
plan and instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge or the Architect The marble chips shall be washed
thoroughly in clean water taking small qu antities in-bamboo basket and dip washing it in clean
water. After washing properly, dead and defective marble chips shall be taken out and the chips
shall be properly dried before mixing with cement.
Terrazzo topping shall be of 1 part of marble chips to 1 part of a cement mixture composed of 90%
white cement and 10% gray cement or as specified in BOQ. First the chips and cement mixture
shall separately be well mixed dry and then the whole thoroughly mixed.
The floor shall be divided into panels not exceeding (600x600)mm by inserting glass, brass or
aluminum as required into the under bed while it is still semi -plastic divider strips shall be 5mm
thick and 40mm deep and shall be installed with the t -3 finished floor level. Thickness of
terrazzo topping shall be specified in the BOQ. But not be less than 10mm. Terrazzo topping
shall be spread between the dividing consolidated and hand-trawled under firm pressure to an
even surface exposing the dividing strips. Rolling and trawling shall be minimum and hard so as
not to draw to surface. Special care shall be taken so that no void remains on the edge of the
[83]
strip. Marble chips shall constitute at least 70 percent of finished terrazzo surface.
The fill shall be well press with a trowel and allowed to stand a little above the remainder of the floor. The
marble chips and cement must be laid on the concrete setting bed while it is green so that the two bonds
and hardens together and acts as one slab. After a day of curing, all surplus grout shall be removed by
regrinding in water using stones of finer grain. If there are still faulty patches, these shall be filled and a
final shall be mode not later than 72 hours with # 60 grit followed by fine -grained Immidiately
after the final grinding the floor shall be rubbed and cleaned.
After drying, the floor shall be waxed and buffed, The floor shall be washed and waxed in this way every
week for a month after finishing.

Measurement for payment shall made in square meter of finished visible floor surface, addition being
made for thresholds and deduction for columns or other constructions and openings on the floor. No
measurement for under-bed patent stone shall be given, in otherwords, the rate is inclusive of
preparation of minimum 25mm thick patent stone flooring under-bed.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract
unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
labor, including preparing bed, transport, storage and handling of materials, hatching, mixing, pouring,
compacting and curing of patent stone and terrazzo, providing divider strips where required, grinding,
polishing of terrazzo as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the
applicable plans. Payment shall include cost of under-bed.
3.35 TERRAZO SKIRTING, DADO IN WALL
3.35.1
Description
This item shall consist of providing 10mm thick in-situ terrazzo skirting or dado on a 12mm thick 1:4
cement-sand mortar under bed on walls or where necessary in accordance with these specifications.
3.35.2
Materials
Composition and materials for cast-in-situ terrazzo wall, skirting or dado shall be same as cast-in-situ
terrazzo flooring.
Marble chips if not otherwise specified shall be white in color and of required size and proportion and
of Italian/ Pakistani or equivalent origin as specified in the BOQ. The wall on which the situ mosaic would
be applied shall have to be cured for 6 hours. The surface shall be scrubbed with steel brush using clean
water generously and the surface shall be brought to a spark-clean condition. In case of brickwork, mortar
joints shall be raked at least 10mm deep the wall shall be saturated with water and kept moist
continuously for 8 hours before the work to begin. Instead of 25mm patent stone setting bed, 10mm thick
cement plaster (1:4) shall be used as setting bed. If the thickness of the setting bed exceeds 12mm, it shall
be applied in multiple layers, the previous layer shall be treated as scratch layer and the surface shall
be left sufficiently youth for good bonding with the next layer. Subsequent layer shall not be applied
before the previous layer has hardened. In any case the final layer shall be left sufficiently rough for
good adherence of the topping. The setting bed shall be applied in such a manner that it provides a true
surface and plumb which will be scratched with broom and allowed to cure for at least 24 hours. Next a
[84]
coat of bonding paste of neat cement (Portland cement) shall be trowelled on the setting. The setting
bed shall be moistened before application of bonding slurry in such a way that it is damp only and not
glistening wet.
The terrazzo topping layer shall then be well trowelled in 10mm thickness over paste.
A f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e t o p p i n g s h a l l b e c u r e d fo r 3 d a y s , a n d t h e n h a n d - g r i n d wi t h
carb o r u nd u m sto n e s, wa s hed , g r o uted , re gr i nd a nd p o li s hed i n a cco rd a n ce wi t h t he
provisions of item 3.35.
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of skirting, wall in place.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at the
contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, equipment and labour, including transport, storage and handling of
materials, mixing, placing, co mp acting, curing, grind ing, po lishing a nd all incid entals
necessary to complete the works. Payment shall include cost of under-bed.
3.36 GLAZED CERAMIC TILES
3.36.1
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying ands fixing glazed ceramic tiles.
36.2 Materials
Glazed tiles shall be either local or foreign made as specified in the schedule of works - Glazed
ceramic tiles unle ss o the r wise sp ecified . shall b e stand ard Grad e 16 00 mm x 1600mm (for
floor) 800mm x 1200mm (for wall) white/colored interior wall tiles free fr o m warpage, blemishes
and dimensional defects and as per instruction of the Engineer -in Charge.
Mortar for installation shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand (FM 1.5) for wall and 1:2 for
floors.specified grout for tile joints shall be made of white cement colored as and where specified
with in pigments.
Preparation of wall surface and application of mortar bed shall comply with the provisions item
3.23 & 3.24. If the surface needs leveling a scratch coat of plaster shall be tiles applied leveled
and scratched for key and allowed to dry for 12 hours before installing tiles. The setting mortar
shall be applied evenly and a neat -cement paste to a thickness of 1.5mm shall be trawled to
the back of tile and the tile set o n fir mly tapped into place ensure full contact. The joints shall
be in specified pattern and shall not exceed 1.5mm width.
For walls, top of the glazed tiles shall be i n the same line with full tile at the top. No cut tiles shall be
laid at the top. For maintaining levels in the bathrooms, a slope is proved towards outlets of
water, as such bottom lines of the four walls shall be at different levels First a line shall be drawn on
the four walls of the bathroom near the bottom in such a way that the height of the tiles up to which the tiles
shall be laid shall be a multiple of the height of the approved tiles so that no cut piece tiles is required to be
laid above this selected bottom line. Area below the selected bottom line shall be fitted with cut price tiles of
different heights according to the slope of the floor. If must be remember that floor tiles shall be laid only
[85]
after laying the wall tiles. If the floor is made of terrazzo tiles, areas below the bottom selected line may
be made of cast-in-situ terrazzo wall.
If there is a false ceiling in bathroom or other rooms, where tiles are to be fitted upto the bottom of the
false ceiling then the ceiling plaster of the false ceiling shall be done after laying the wall tiles to
maintain perfect horizontal line between the junction of top level of the tiles and the plastered bottom of the
false ceiling.
The mortar bed shall be minimum 6mm thick and shall be cut through horizontally and vertically
every 400mm to 600mm. The tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours before setting.
Installation shall be controlled by strings, pegs, spacers, levels or other suitable methods to ensure
correct layout and uniform leveled joints. The joints shall be grouted, cleaned and damp-cured for at least
7 days.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of finished tiled surface. No allowance will
be made for cutting.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the contract
unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials,
equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials, cleaning, preparing and laying
bed and cutting, fixing, grouting and curing tiles as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the
work. Payment shall include cost of underbed.
3.37 MARBLEIGRANITE TILE FLOOR/WALL/SKIRT/ COUNTER
3.37.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of providing and laying marble g , - ite tile in floor, lift
wall and where necessary with 25/20/18/12mm thick marble laid on cement -sand mortar (1:2) in
accordance with these specifications.
3.37.2 Materials
Marble/granite tiles shall be of Italian/Pakistani origin polished and having approved texture, color, and
size. Before laying sample marble/granite shall have to be approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours before laying. The tiles shall be laid evenly with
slight pressure to ensure close contact with bedding mortar. The mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement
lime to 2 parts of sand (F.M 1.5). A thin neat-cement paste shall be trawled over the cement-sand bed
immediately before laying the tiles.
Constant checks shall be made with reference to previously established levels controlling the finished wall
surface. Best contiguity between the tiles shall be attempted and the joints shall be thinnest possible and
filled with white cement grout. After installing, the tiles shall be left undisturbed and protected by
suitably cordoning off the area for at least 15 days.
Measurement shall be made in sq.meter.
[86]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provide above shall be paid at the
contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing materials,
equipment and labor including transport, storage, handling and mixing of cement sand and
preparing bed, setting, tiles as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to
the applicable plans
3 .3 8 L IM E T ER R AC IN G
3.38.1 Description
T he i te m s ha ll co n si st o f co ns tr uc ti n g a l a yer o f li me co nc ret e 2 :2 :7 o n ro o f s lab s
accordance with these Specifications.
3.38.2 Materials
Lime concrete shall consist of a mixture of 2 parts lime to 2 parts surki and 7 parts chips.
Lime shall be unslaked lime and shall be mixed by weight. Lime weight shall be measured at
Unslaked Condition and one cubic meter of lime terracing work require 4.60 (172.16 kg) of
lime. Slaked lime shall be screened through 3.35mm sieves and the result shall be rejected. The
lime stone should be brought to site and slaked in the ground working place.
Surki shall be made from 1st class (well-burnt but not vitrified) bricks crushed or ground pass
through a 2mm sq mesh. Surki made from underburned or third class brick shall not be used.
Brick chips (khoa) shall consist of 20mm down -graded angular fragments of broken crushed
1st class bricks.
3.38.3 Mixing
The mixing shall be done on a clean pla tform but not on roof. Lime and surki in the specified
quantities shall first be mixed dry till the mixture is of uniform color. Then the mixture shall
be screened. Specified quantity of previously wetted khoa shall be added and the whole
turned over once without adding water and twice by gradually adding small quantities water
for tempering. The mix shall then be allowed to age for at least 7 days. During period the
mixture shall be turned by spading twice a day and further lime water adde d if needed to prevent
drying up. Care should be taken to keep it under cover to protect from r a i n . I f m u s t b e
c o n f i r m e d t h a t t h e m i x t u r e h a s a t t a i n e d d e s i r e d c o n s i s t e n c y a n d l i m e h a s fully been
slaked before carried to the roof. Concrete shall be considered adequate if it forms lump and does not
disintegrate when attempt is made to form a lump.
3.38.4 Installation
The mixture shall then be laid evenly on the roof slab to proper slope and in thickness 30% more than
that shown on the plans and thoroughly beaten for 7 days with wooden mallets to the finished thickness
and proper slope. Before beating a lime slurry shall be laid on the top and allowed to soak well. The lime
water mixed with molasses shall be continually sprinkled on the concrete to keep it wet while being
beaten. Beating should not be stopped until the metallic sound is obtained. The mortar which comes t o
the surface during the beating is to be rendered smooth and finished off with lime rubbing. The terracing
shall be kept wet after completion for a period of not less than one week. The soundness of the lime
terrace roof should be tested by cutting a small portion of the materials 75mm square and 50mm deep in
few representative areas and filling the holes with water and observing for half an hour. If the water
level does not go down in any of the holes the compaction of the L.C. will be considered to have been
adequate. If not, the L.0 shall have to be done again.
[87]
When lime concrete roofing con not be done in one day, each days work shall be terminated on a straight
line with 1:2 side slope. Joining of the new work of the previous days work shall be accomplished by
applying a bonding grouting of lime suck mortar 1:1 to the slope before placing the new lime concrete.
The junction of roof and wall is to be provided with a triangular bank of lime concrete well beaten
commonly known as "Gundi". The size of the "Gundi" will be 75mm x 75mm on the roof and parapet
junction. For passage of rain water gaps should be kept in lime terracing for connecting spout or rain water
pipe.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of area actually covered including ghundi if the
average thickness is mentioned in the Bill of Quantities.
The amount of completed and accepted work as measured above shall be paid for at the contract unit
price per sqm, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
labour including storage. handling. transport. mixing, laying and consolidating including ghundi and
vertical portion on the parapet and for all incidentals necessary to complete the work in accordance with
the applicable plans.
3.39 SCREEDING ON ROOF

3.39.1
Description
Average 50mm thick screeding with concrete C-17 on

top of roof slab with ce - , sand (FM 2.5) & 12mm down
graded stone chips. Concrete is to be laid in slope as per
drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Measurement shall be given as per the finished work in square meter of the completed work. All the
operations described above shall be considered as single finished area for measurement.
3.39.3 Payment
Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment will
constitute full compensation for labour, materials, equipment, taxes, VATS etc. and incidental charges
necessary to complete the work.
3.40 PAVING WITH HOLLOW BLOCKS ON ROOF TERRACE
3.40.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing and laying ceramic hollow blocks with
wire mesh reinforcement on the roof of the building.
3.40.2
Material
Ceramic Hollow Block (240x155X100), Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type -1,
[88]
sand shall be Sylhet sand of number F.M. 2.5, coarse aggregate shall be 12mm down. - graded
stone chips.
Hollow Blocks of 50mm thick shall be clay blocks of 240x155X100 mm having clear gaps 6mm
between the blocks. The laying of blocks shall be done in two operations. At first the
screening of roof slab to hold the hollow block, laying the blocks with 6mm gap. Then wire
mesh made of 14 BWG wires having laid on the hollow blocks as per des i gn. Finally laver of
38/50mm concrete is to be cast on the top of the wire mesh and finished with neat cement
finish. The 6mm gap between the blocks shall be filled up by mortar. The process shall be
repeated vertically at least 50mm with the parapet wall incl uding corners of parapet roof. Again
the corners between parapet and concrete should be sealed bitumen mastic. The work should be
done strictly by engaging expert and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Measurement shall be given as per the finished work in square meter of the completed work.
All the operations described above shall be considered a single finished area for measurement.
However the measurement of the work on the parapet wall shall be given.
3 .40 .5 Pa y ment
Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This
payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, equipment, taxes, VAT etc and
incidental charges necessary to complete the work.
3.41 TIMBER WORKS
3.41.1
Descriptions
The item shall consist of supplying and fixing timber for doors. windows fitted with hardware and
finished in accordance with the applicable plans, schedules and these Specificat
3.41.2 Construction Requirements for Timber Doors
Timber for shutters, trims and frames shall be Silkorai/Teak/Chapalish or as specified in the Bill of
Quantity. Grounds, studs and blocking shall be in sound Jam or other approved wood. All timber
shall be free from sap, shakes, large or loose knots and defects affecting the appearance, strength
and durability of construction and shall be well seasoned, dries moisture content of 6% by weight and
treated with non-swelling, non-staining water repo printable wood preservative.
Glue shall be waterproof approved product consisting of synthetic resin (phenolic, amino plastic or
polyvinyl acetate) emulsion adhesives for wood or any other approved materials conforming BS-1204.
Knotting shall consist of a uniform dispersion of 25% flake shellac in 75% methylated spirit or other
approved natural or synthetic resin in a suitable solvent and conform to BS-1336.
Stopping shall be made from white or red lead and sufficient linseed oil to produce a stiff paste and
conform to BS-544.
Hardware shall be of approved material, finish, type and make and shall be complete with necessary
screws, hinges, trims and all other accessories required for proper installation. All screws and accessories
shall be of suitable size and type and shall match with the pigment as to material and finish.
All hinges and fixture should be of union (U.K.) or equivalent of the specified in U.S. Federal specification FFH-1064.
[89]
Joinery workmanship shall be of the highest quality. All joints shall be well made, cleanly matched and
tight. Verticals shall be plumb. Joints shall be put together with waterproof glue and if necessary further
secured with finishing nails of softwood or with screws of hardwood.
Surface shall be finished smooth free from disfiguring defaces such as raised grain, stain, evidence of
poor and uneven planing and sanding, tool marks, gouges and scratch.
All edges of woodwork shall be carefully trimmed and the arises eased by rounding to a radius 1.0mm.
Door frames in masonry walls shall be installed only after the walls are in place and have been cured.
Styles and rails shall be accurately cut and glued together with close fitting mortise and tenon joints
which shall be further pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins of diameter not less than 5mm or with
hardwood pins of diameter not less than 7mm. The joinings shall be such as to ensure complete rigidity of
framing throughout.
Panels shall be tongued-and-grooved unless otherwise shown on the plans. Wide flat surfaces shall
be made of several narrow strips glued, dowelled, splined or dovetai led together as required.
All faces of frame buried or hidden in masonry shall be painted with 2 coats of tar paint before
erection. The frames shall be installed plumb and fixed to brick, masonry with flat iron hold fasts (175 x
38 x 6)mm tongued and turned at the ends and to concrete with No. 12- 90mm long screws with suitable
expansion-shields or fiber-lugs. The hold fasts and fixing screws shall be spaced not over 1 meter apart.
The screw heads shall be countersunk at least 12mm below the surface and plugged.
Butt hinges shall be set flush. All hardware shall be installed carefully in correct position
strict conformity with the manufacturer's instructions. All hardware, fitting must have previous
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge before using into work.
Application of surface finishes shall conform to British Standard Code of practice CP-231.
After erection and before any finish is applied, all woodwork shall be hand -sanded using a
cession of grit sizes each removing in turn all the coarser grooves created by ng grit. Knots and
resinous streaks shall be treated with 2-3 coats of knotting applied
evenly and thinly. Nail holes, cracks and cavities shall be filled i n with stopping pressed well home
with a stopping knife. Large holes or knots shall be plugged in with a mixture of red lead and
enamel glue in equal quantities laid hot. Knotting and stopping shall extend slightly cavity on to the adjacent
surface beyond the resinous area or cavity.
I
The final preparation shall be by rubbing down with fine abrasive paper and dusting off
with air jet. The sanding shall always follow the line of grain. No cross -grain sanding
marks shall be admissible for any finish system on veneered or solid w ood members.
All wood surfaces p a i n t i n g specification item no. 3.50. If normal finishing procedure.
Painting shall be done as per specifi c ation varnishing is required the following specification
shall be followed.
Oiling shall be done with linseed oil, eit her raw or boiled according to whether a flat c glazed
surface is required. Unless otherwise specified a mixture of raw and boiled oil sha be used. The
oil shall be rubbed into the wood till the surface is dry. The oil shall be applied sparingly and excess
removed to avoid a sticky surface.
Lacquer varnish shall consist of a colorless finish of shellac diluted in alcohol. A washcoat of sealer consisting
of 1/4 kg cut of shellac shall be applied first and when dry sanded lightly.
For internal works, 2 coats of lacquer consisting of 1 kg cut of shellac shall be applied from a we l l c h a r g e d
c l e a n b r u s h wh i c h s h a l l b e wo r k e d o n t h e s u r fa c e n o l o n g e r t h a n i s necessary to ensure
even spreading. For external works 4 coats shall be applied. Each coat of varnish shall be lightly
rubbed down with fine steel wool or abrasive paper and dusted before applying the next.
[90]

The amount of completed and accepted work measured a as provided above sha ll be paid for
at the contract unit price which payment s hall constitute full compensation for furnishing
materials including hold fasts, hinge, hardware, glazing and gaskets, and all equipment a -:
labour in joinry, ironmongry, fixing, fitting, finishing, oiling, painting, varnishing as well as
incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.42 HOLD FAST FOR DOORS & WINDOWS
Hold fast for doors and windows shall be of mild steel bars. The size of hold fast for
does shall not be less than 175mm x 38mm x 6mm or 150mm x 38mr -n x 6mm and for
windows not less then 150mm x 30mm x 6mm
One end of the hold fast shall be split and bent. The hold fast shall be embedded in cer,
concrete 1:2:4 for the full length, and the width of the wall. The depth of embedding shall be 150mm.
Payment will be made as per item of bill of quantities.
3.43 DOOR/WINDOWS/ HARDWARES
The item shall consist of supply and fitting of best quality approved size and q L hardware of
doors windows or where necessary.
Before placing the hardware the sample of the same must be submitted by the contract well ahead of
time to get approval of the Engineer -in-Charge. Door and window hardware included in the item of
doors/ windows in the BOQ it will not be paid separately but if it is not included payment shall be given
as per unit contract price mention in the bill of quantities.
Door lock. Door lock shall be approved quality cylindrical silver/golden or approved colour mortise
lock with round knob (Japan made or equivalent) all complete as per drawing and direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Hydraulic door closer: Hydraulic door closer shall be approved quality "King brand " (made in Japan)/
equivalent hydraulic door closer (big size) etc. all complete as per dra wing and direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Door shock absorber: Door shock absorber shall be of best quality magnetic door shock absorber as
per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Hasp bolt: This item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing app roved quality heavy type 19mm
dia to 300mm long brass hasp bolt including cutting grooves in door shutter & frames etc. all
complete as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.44 SINGLE LEAF FLUSH DOOR
3.44.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fitting, fixing single leaf flush door in
accordance with applicable plan or as per direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.44.2 Materials
[91]
Mechanically seasoned Chittagong teak wood/Burma Teak of finished 36 mm thick.

3.44.3 Construction Requirement of single leaf flush door
The single leaf flush door of approved size of best quality Bangladesh made (as approved) shall be
BFIDC or equivalent standard. Before going for large scale production, specimen of door shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the broad surface of the leaf.
Payment shall be made in square meter for each door installed h finished with supply of necessary
fittings, french polishing etc. at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.45 METAL WORKS
3.45.1 Description
The item shall consist of providing, installing and finishing in place steel door s & windows with grill,
rolling shutters, louvers, ventilators, gates, boundary grill, hand rails or any other items, including
frames made of plain steel structural shapes, plates, angles, pipes rods, wire mesh, steel sheet etc.
where necessary in accordance with the applicable plans, schedule and these Specifications.

Mild steel pipe shall be of specified size conforming to the requirements of ASTM A -53.
Structural steel shall conform to the requirement of ASTM A -36 and shall include plain structural
shapes and plates cut to length or fabricated.
Glazing shall be provided with 3mm thick transparent acrilic panes (sheet).
All components of every item of work shall be accurately cut, formed, cast, fitted, welded and
finished true to form and dimensions as indicated on the plans and drawings. Unless otherwise
specified all welding shall be fillet welding.
All steel surface shall receive 2 coats of hard -gloss paint of approved colour over a coat of
approved anti-corrosive primer unless otherwise specified. Prior to painting, the surface shall be
cleaned of mill scale, rust, oil grease and dirt. Surface not painted to the Engineer ing-Charge
satisfaction shall be repainted at Contractor ' s own cost.
The works under this item shall be measured on the basis of opening area in square meter.
[92]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid fe at the
contract unit price stated in BOQ which payment shall constitute full compensation
Furnishing all materials including hold fasts, hardware, glazing and gaskets, and a equipment and labour
in assembly, fixing, fitting, glaring, finishing painting as well as a incidentals necessary to complete the work
according to the applicable.
3.46 STEEL DOOR ANGLE FRAME
3.46.1 Material and Construction Requirements
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fabricating M.S angle frame (38 x
38 x 6)mm size fitted with brick masonry/ R.C.0 structur e by tutting grooves for clam: &
mending good to the damages and shutter made of 18 BWG steel sheet as per draw - including
supply of all materials, welding, fabrication, hinges, locking arrangement, haft -bolt, tower bolt
etc. complete.
Measurement f o r p a y m e n t s h a l l b e made i n R m fo r fr a m e along outline o f t h e fr a m e a n d
shutter shall be in Sqm.
Payment shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.47 FIRE RATED DOOR
3.47.1 D e s c ri p t io n
This item shall consist of manufacturing, fitting and fixing fire rated steel door.
Steel doors shall be paneled doors with panels having frame in fire escape as per required size for 3 to
4 hour fire rating with 16 gauge face sheets, formed, welded with internal reinforcing channels in full
height of door and horizontal stiffeners welded to face sheets at top and bottom the annular space
completely filled with small cell phenolic resin impregnated honey comb core bonded to the face
sheets in 16 gauge hollow metal frames including vertical members, threshold, mullion etc. true to
line, dimension and position, smooth finished, including supply of component parts of the panel and
the frame factory finished, phosphatized, primed and finished with the one coat of silicon alkyd
enamel paint, and the coats of backed enamel, their fabrication and assembly, and supplying, fitting
and fixing appropriate panic hardware and automatic closing devices, packing and back -up materials,
jambs, lock sets, hinges, closures. push/ pull bars, operators, rowel plugs, bolts and nuts, washers,
springs, cleats, buffer blocks, caulking sealant, weather strips, conforming to standard fire rated doors
for necessary smoke proofing, etc. complete with all essential fittings and accessories.
3.47.3 Basis of Measurement
The works under this item shall be measured on the basis of opening area in square meter.
[93]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract unit price stated in BOQ3.48 M. S. GRILL FOR DOOR, WINDOW AND PARTITION
3.48.1 Description
The M.S. grill shall be made of steel frame of mild steel with grill as per drawing, design and as
specified in the bill of quantities. This is to be fitted at any places as per drawing and direction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
The mild steel shall conform with the requirements of ASTM A -53. The structural steel shall conform
with the requirement of ASTM A-36. These flat and angle M.S. sections are to be cut to sizes,
fabricated, welded (continuous) and to the shape and siz es of the frame as per drawing. This frame shall
have two coats of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of approved anticorrosive primer. The enamel
paint should be of approved colour. Each frame must have as per design.
A frame should be prepared and deposited with the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval. Only after
approval the manufacturing should start.
The measurement shall be in square meter of the gap where the frame is to be fitted. No separate
measurement for 3 coats of painting shall be given. No separate measurement will be considered for
grill on boundary wall.
3.48.4 Payment
Payment shall be in unit rate mentioned in the bill of quantities inclusive of M.S. sections,
electrode, labour, carrying, fitting, fixing, 3 coats of painting and all other insidentals etc.
complete.
3.49 S. S. MAIN ENTRY GATE
3.49.1 Description
The Main Entry Gates shall be made of Stainless steel frame all around and grill inside as per
drawing and design. This is to be fitted over the boundary walls and in between the columns as
per design and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.49.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement
Supplying, fitting, fixing and installation of folding Stainless steel main gates (vehicular and
pedesrtian) with 3 mm thick 50 x50 mm SS square box outer frame with two 3mm thick.
50x5mm SS vertical solid box and two 25 mm dia SS horizontal pipe @ 750 mm cic.ar.: one
50x50X6 mm Sq. SS horizontal box with three 223 mm long vretical 50x5 mm SS sol i : bar each
panel including wheel lo cking arrangements on 3 mm thick S.S. plate pro vid ir: heavy type
clamps fitted and fixed with the outer frame of the main gate, the clamp b e l r : embedded in
R. C. C. o r R. C. co r e pillar wi t h c e me n t co ncr et e ( 1 :2 :4 ) i n ma so nr y i n/ c c u t e ; holes and
mending good the damages, finishing, curing etc. in/c, bearing, fabricate:. welding and riveting
all complete as and where necessary, all complete as per d r a w .
[94]
design and direction of the engineer -in-charge.

A frame with SS should be prepared and deposited with the Engineer -in-Charge foOnly after approval the manufacturing should start.
approval.

The measurement shall be in square reefer of the gun where the frame s to be fitter separate
measurement for polishing sh all be given.
3.49.4 Payment
Payment shall be in unit rate mentioned in the bill of quantities inclusive of M.S. sections,
electrode, labor, carrying, fitting, fixing. 3 coats of painting etc. complete.
3.50 STAIR CASE RAILING WITH M.S. PIPE SQUARE BOX AND PIPE HANDLE
3.50.1 D e s cr i p t io n
T he wo r k p r o vid ed i n t h is it e m co n s is t s o f co n s t ruc ti n g sat as p er specification and
direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing MS stair railing of stan dard height with a of 50mm
dia 5mm thick M.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia 5mm thick M.S. post vertically @ 1 nos.
in every third step, embedded in floor with 75mm x 75mm x 5 mm MS base plate welded at
bottom, and horizontally 4 nos of 5mm thick 20mm M.S sq bar @100mm c/c, paking the post
with 1:2:4 cement concrete. mending good all damages, finishing etc. applying 1st class polish
to hand rail, 2 (two) coats of synthetic enamel paint approved quality over a prime coats of
synthetic. enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coat etc. finished in all respect for all floors as
per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be
considered for measurement.)
Measurement shall be in square area from top of step slab to the top hand rail shall be the basis of
measurement. (Width of railing will be the minimum height from perpendicular on railing to top
corner of stair tread.)
The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at unit contract
price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, requirement, labors eta, all taxes, VAT a ; well as incidental change s
3.51. STAIR RAILING WITH M.S. PIPE
3.51.1 Description
[95]
The work provided in, this item consists of constructing stair drawing, specification and direction of
M.S. Grab Bar in stair/ verandah/roof of 50mm dia 5 mm thick M.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia
5 mm thick M.S. bends fitted horizontally @ 5nos. in one flight , embeded by screws to wall with a
75mm x 75mm x 5mm M.S. base plate, manding good all damages, finishing etc. applying 1st class
polish to hand rail, 2 (two) coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coat etc. finished in all respect for all floors as
per drawing. specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be
considered for measurement.)
Measurement shall be in square area from top of step slab to the top hand rail shall be the basis of
measurement. (Width of railing will be the minimum height from perpendicular on railing to top
corner of stair tread.)
furnishing all materials, equipment, labors etc, all taxes, VAT as well as incidental changes necessary
to complete the work.
3.52 STAIR RAILING WITH STAINLESS STEEL PIPE, SQUARE BOX AND ROUND PIPE
HANDLE
3.52.1 Description
Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing SS railing for Verandah/ Double heigh space/ lobby of
standard height with a hand rail of 50mm dia 3mm thick S.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia 3mm
thick S.S. posts fitted vertically @ 750mm. embedded in floor with 75mm x 75mm x 5mm S.S. base
plate welded at bottom, and horizontally 4 nos of 2 , mm. thick 20mm S.S square box @ 100mm c/c;
paking the post with 1:2:4 cement concrete. mending good all damages, finishing etc.applying 1st
class polish to hand rail, finished in all respect for all floors as per drawing, specification and
direction of the Engineer -in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be considered for
measurement.)
Measurement will be given only exposed area of railing as per schedule of itmes in Sqm.
The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid a: unit
contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute f t compensation
for furnishing all materials; equipment labours etc.. all taxes, VAT as well as incidental charge
3.53 STAIR RAILING WITH STAINLESS STEEL PIPE

[96]
The work consists of supplying, fitting and fixing railing I with stainless steel pipe - veranda or
elsewhere-including cost of all materials, labors, fabrication, welding etc. a complete as per
drawing, specifications and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Stainless steel Grab Bar in stair of 50mm dia 3mm thick S.S round pipe welded with 38r -dia 3
mm thick S.S. bends fitted horizontally @ 5 nos. in one flight. embedded by screws wall with a
75mm x 75mm x 5mm S.S. base plate; mending good all damages , finish etc applying 1st class
polish to hand rail, finished in all respect for all floors as per drawn specification and direction of
the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will considered for measurement.)
Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned in the bill o 3.53.4 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be pa unit contract
price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute compe nsation for
furnishing all materials. equipment. labors etc. all taxes. VAT as vie. incidental changes
3.54 RAIL ALONG WALL/TOP OF PARAPET
The work consists of supplying, fitting and fixing Stainless steel pipe/square box railing roof
along parapet including cost of all materials. labors. fabrication, welding etc complete as per
drawing, specifications and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Stainless steel pipe railing of any design as per drawings fitted on wall & RCC post. railing shall
be fixed and fitted true to alignment. height & elevation and the groove. base be filled with
concrete (1:2:4) & cured for at least 7 days. Care shall be taken so that the railing pipes are not
disturbed before they are fully settled.
Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned In the bill of quantities.
furnishing all materials, equipment, labors etc, all taxes, VAT as well as incidental changes necessary
to complete the work.
3.55 ALUMINIUM DOOR, WINDOW, CURTAIN RAIL, ETC.
3.55.1 Description
The works under this item shall consists of supplying and fixing of aluminum products of various
types such as doors, windows, curtain walls, curtain rails, cladding/ flushing of sills, etc. fitted with
[97]
necessary hardware and finished in accordance with applicable drawings and specification.
Materials and Products: Doors. windows, curtain walls etc. shall be of approved standard
conforming to the U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA) or BTA
specifications. The frames and sash members shall be of extruded shape made of 6063 -T5 high quality
aluminum alloy having a minimum section thickness of 2mm unless otherwise shown on the drawings
or indicated in the schedule of items and shall conform to AAMA or BTA standard.
Fasteners, Hardware and anchors: Fasteners, hardware and anchors shall be of aluminum or non magnetic, non-corrosive material compatible with aluminum. All windows shall be provid ed with
non-jamming latches of rocker type designed to be locked from inside. Window locks shall be flush
type as manufactured by the Adams Rite Manufacturing Company of Gleudale, California or approved
equivalent. The doors shall be provided with cylindrical locks and suitable built-in non jumping
latches and bolts.
Security locks shall be pin type mortice lock, 6 or 7 pins and adaptable to Master, Grand master and
Great Grand Master keys. Sliding windows and doors shall be fitted with adjustable sealed be aring
sheaves of durable hydrated nylon or approved equivalent. Closers, Push/pull and kick plates shall
have to match with the frames Any other hardware to be incorporated in the work shall also snatch
with the frame Assembly and installation screws shall be of stainless steel. Doors, Windows, curtain
walls etc. shall be installed with Teflon injected expanding bolts, Sills shall contain adequate
provisions for drainage. Head sills and jamb members shall be of one piece construction. Aluminum
to aluminum contact between hardware parts or moving members shall not be permitted. Such
contacts shall be properly insulated.
Glass Pane: Glass for all glazing work shall be of the best of imported sheet/float galsr (Japan or
Equivalent) whether are clear tinted. frosted/figured and /or reflective as shown or the drawing or as
indicated in the schedule of items and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge Glass shall be free from
bubbles, distortion and flaws
Glazing Beads: Glazing beads shall be aluminum shape -in interchangeable type.
Glazing Strips: Glazing s t r ip s o r channels sh a l l be o f formed n eo p r en e o f acceptable quality.
Weather Stripping: Wea th er stripping shall be o f neoprene o r s il ico n treated wo v en wood or
approved equal.
Joints: jo in t s sh a l l b e m ech a n ica ll y d o n e sq u a r e (t el es co p i c ) joints. No mit r ed Jo in t s shall
be accepted. No forced fitting shall be accepted All units shall be fabricated at the factory to
accurate dimensions. It shall be rigid and designed to permit complete weather stripping. In
principle, the parts should be put together by self tapping screws.
Surface Finish: All exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall be factory finish and of
substantially uniform appearance conforming to "Architectural" standard.
All exposed surfaces shall be given a natural Anodic Oxide hardcore coating of 15 micron in
thickness arrd a density of 25mg. per square inch and a uniform color tone conforming to the
U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent standard. The color spectrum shall be natural
silver/approved shade of bronze or all exposed surfaces of the Aluminum frames shall be electro
statically painted with VV resistance hard resin powder with minimum coating thickness of 40
micron of approved color shade. Finish of hardware shall match closely with the
door/window/curtain wall finish.
Accessories: Accessories necessary for proper fixing and preparation such as anchors. clips,
fins, sub-frames, metal sills, mullion, covers. casing, other trim, cleaning anchors. glazing beads,
[98]
weathering and glazing strips, hardware and mechanical operators shall be supplied ready to set
in place with the door, window, curtain wall units.
Steel or wood sub frames shall be painted with Zinc-chromatic primer in case of steel alu with
wood preservative in case of wood. Steel anchor shall be properly insulated from aluminum
frame.
Sealant: S ealant shall be on e p art ela stic co mpo und of "Arch itectu ral" g rad e cau lk and sh a
be in matching color or as approved by the Engineer -in-Charge.
Shop D r a w i n g s : The Contractor shall prepare detailed design of all work involved in line with
the Consultants design and prepare Shop Drawings for the total work and submit to the Engineerin-Charge for approval before factory fabrication. All exterior doors, windows a' -: curtain walls
shall be designed to withstand a wind pressure of 301b/sft.
Installation: All units shall be assembled at site under proper conditions, erected, fix ed glazed in
place in strict conformity with manufacturers instruction. All cut -out operations hardware
preparation shall be made accurately and reinforced as required.
All doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be set plumb. square, level and in exact alignment
with surrounding works and shall be securely anchored ready for operation. joints between the
masonry openings and frames hall be caulked and sealed installation of the frames. All installation
works shall be done and finished in such a we, to ensure a free and smooth operation.
Abrasion or other injury to finished surfaces shall be carefully avoided. Cleaning should
accomplished with plain water or a petroleum t ype cleaning agent or with the manufacture
recommended cleaning reagent. No corrosive reagent shall be used.
Measurement for payment shall be made in the basis of BOO of each type installed and finished as
shown on the plans.
contract unit price as mentioned in BOQ which payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials including holdfasts, hardware. glazing and gaskets. and all equipment and labor
in assembly, fixing, fitting. glazing, locking, finishing, painting as well as all incidentals necessary to
complete the work according to the applicable plans. Payment for glass shall be made as per BOQ
items.
3.56 GLASS/GLAZING WORK
3.56.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying all glass and glazing works in Aluminum
doors, windows. curtain wall, louvers, partitions. sky-lights etc. o any size & thickness including cost
of fitting & fixing in position with all necessary accessories etc., complete in all respect as per
drawing, manufacturer's specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.56.2 Materials
[99]
Glass for all glazing work shall be of the best of imported sheet/float glass whether they arr clean
tinted/ frosted/figured or reflected as shown on the drawing or specified in th( Schedule of Items.
Glass shall be free from bubbles, distortion and flaws of every kind. Thi thickness of glass will be as
per schedule of items.
3.56.3 Execution
All glass shall be properly cut to fit and to leave a uniform space of 2mm all around th' panes between
the edge of the glass and rivets.
The glass shall be installed and secured properly with approved sealant in a goo w orkmanship and
manner as per details shown on the drawings or specified by th manufacturer.
Proper care shall be taken to protect glass from scratches breaking, damage etc. during installation
and during subsequent construction operation near the location of the installation.
Watertight installation of each piece of exterior glass shall be so installed with rivet( sealant, packing
materials, weep holes, tolerances etc. to ensure that it withstands norm -_ temperature changes, loading
and impact loading without failure of any kind.
3.56.4 Cleaning and finishing

No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paints and other stains have bee removed
from the surface of the glass. Glass shall be cleaned with mentholated spirit/glass cleaning solution.
The Contractor shall make good at his own cost all glas s broken by h workmen while cleaning or
carrying cut other operations. On completion of the Project, the Contractor shall clean all glazing
works. replace the damaged glazing and leave the premises clean and tidy and fit for occupation and
in all respects and to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter.
The amount of completed and accepted work as measured as provided above shall be paid for at
the contract unit price which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor
as well as incidentals necessary to complete the works as per direction of Engineer -in-Charge.
3.57 FALSE CEILING WORK, PARTITION WALL
3.57.1 Description and C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirements
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying. fitting, fixing false ceiling/ partition wall
by using hard board/ partex board/ ply wood/ fibre glass/combustable mineral board (like
aluminim strip) having specified thickness over wooden/ steel frame/ aluminium as per design or
drawing including, supply, fabrication of fittings, fixing frame with hanging arrangement, supply
of M.S. clamp, french polishing on timber, painting on steel frame etc. complete.
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter including frame area all be measured a l o n g
o u t l i n e o f t h e f r a m e . M e a s u r e m e n t s h a l l b e i n s q u a r e b o a r s u r f a c e i n c l u d i n g fitting
fixing with out frame.
[100]
Payment for all these item shall be according to the contract unit price mentioned in the bi of
quantities.
3.58 FALSE CEILING WITH ALUMINIUM SECTIONS AND GYPSUM BOARD
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying. fabricating, fitting & aluminum Tee
& Angle section frame and gypsum board false ceiling, including a
a c c e s s o r i e s a n d f i n i s h e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e applicable plans. d r a w i n g a n d t h e i r s specifications.
This item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of 12mm thick gypsum board lamina -e: by
mechanical hot press with a milk white PVC membrane with aluminium T -bar frame - natural
anodized finish at 600mm x 600mm in grid. suspended from ceiling by 12 double ply G.I. wire
fixed to the ceiling by rowel plug, screws, hooks, nails, etc., maintain straight lines and desired
finished level at bottom face with vertical wood en strut as regularity including making holes in
slabs. or beams by electric drill machine and mending goon damages, if any, during the execution
of the work including cost of all mate' a accessories, scaffoldings, labor for installation, screws,
nail, etc. all complete as drawing, design, specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.58.3
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of finished ceiling surface.

3.58.4
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be according to the contract unit price of finished area of accepted work, which will cover cost of
all material, labor, transport, profit, tax, VAT and all other incidentals.
3.59
FALSE CEILING WITH ALUMINIUM SHEET/ STRIPS
3.59.1
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fabricating, fitting & fixing aluminum Tee &
Angle section frame and aluminum sheet/strip ceiling, including all accessories and finished in accordance with
the applicable plans, drawing and these specifications.
3.59.2
This item shall consists of supplying, fitting and fixing of suspended ceiling as per design and drawing with
necessary anodized aluminum suspension Tee (25mm x 25mm) and cross bars and edging, adjustable hangers.
clips etc. The suspension grid will be hanged from the floor/roof slab by means of rowel bolts into the slab and
flexible metal wire, all of approved quality according to manufacturers' specification and standard procedure and
design, including supply of all materials, labour, tools, plant etc. complete as per drawing, specification and
direction of the Engineer-in-Charge as per design.
3.59.3
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of finished ceiling surface.

3.59.4
Basis of Payment
[101]
Payment shall be according to the contract unit price of finished area of accepted work, which will cover cost of
all material, labour, transport: profit, tax, VAT and all other incidentals.
3.60
STAINLESS STEEL FRAMED BOUNDARY WALL
3.60.1
Materials and Construction Requirements
Supplying, fitting, fixing and installation of stainless steel Boundary wall with 3 mm thick 50x50 mm SS square
box outer frame with two 3mm thick 50x5mm SS vertical solid box and two 25 mm dia SS horizontal pipe @
750 mm c/c. and one 50x50X6 mm Sq. SS horizontal box with three 223 mm long vertical 50x5 mm SS solid
bar each panel including wheel locking arrangements on 3 mm thick S.S. plate providing heavy type clamps
fitted and fixed with the outer frame of the main gate, the clamp being embedded in R.C.C. or R.C. core pillar
with cement concrete (1:2:4) in masonry in/c cutting holes and mending good the damages, finishing, curing etc.
in/c, bearing, fabricating, welding and riveting all complete as and where necessary, all complete as per
drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge.
Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.60.3 Payment
Payment shall be made as per unit price mentioned in the Bill of quantities.
3.61
ROILING SHUTTER
3.61.1 Materials and Construction Requirements

The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of rolling shutter of any design &
shape made of 10mm shape rod locked together properly to form rolling shutter, top of the shutter to be fitted
with circular spring box made of 22 BWG sheet, containing best quality spring made in China, nutted with 38
mm G.I. pipe at one end and the other end nutted to shutter in/c fitting the G.I pipe again with 375 x 300 x 6 mm
pankha at ends w/ L25x25x4 frame with side guide channel (side channel consist of 100 x25x5 mm M.S. plate)
fixed to wall or column with clamps embedded in R.C.C. part by cement concrete (112.4) in/c cutting holes
(minimum 3 x 25 mm x6 mm) mending the damages, finishing, curing, bottom end of shutter fitted to folded
G.P. sheet (min 125, mm width in two layers), which is again fitted to 25 x 25 x 3 mm angle. providing handle
(with F.I. bar 25 x 6 mm riveted) and locking arrangement in both sides, painting two coats with approved color
and brand of synthetic enamel paint over e coat of priming etc. complete in all respect as per drawing design.
Rolling shutter must be riveted at sides with G.P. sheet and patty)
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the area along outline of the frame.
3.61.3 Payment
Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.62
M.S. LADDER
3.62.1 Materials and Construction Requirements

The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of MS ladde r 750 mm wide of
any height of 50x50x6 mm angle stringer wl10mm dia rung @ 300 mm C/C welded with angle fixing ladder
with 4 nos 18 mm dia HILTI Kwik expansion anchor minimum 125 mm embed with wall/floor as per design
and drawing
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the area along outline of the frame.
3.62.3 Payment
Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.63
SYNTHETC POLYVINYL DISTEMPERING (SPD)

[102]
3.63.1 Description
The item shall consist of applying 2 coat of synthetic polyvinyl distemper of approved colour over a coat of
priming on plastered wall or ceiling surfaces where necessary in accordance with this specification. This is
exclusively for interior decoration and the distempered surface is non-washable.
3.63.2 Materials
High quality SPD from Berger/ Elite of Bangladesh, shell lime, whiting, putty, sealer, clean water.
3.63.3 Application Method
The surface to be distempered shall be dry, well cleaned and free from efflorescence, dirt and stain of grease.
The surface shall be given a thorough rub down to remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface
irregularities shall be repaired with patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. After the
surface has been properly prepared, the wall shall be washed over twice with a solution, made from equal
proportion of whiting and best shell lime. The mixing of distemper shall be carried out in accordance with the
instruction issued by the manufacturer of the particular brand of distemper that is to be used. Before starting
work distemper shall be mixed in such way that one room can be finished with the same mix. Distemper is to be
applied quickly. The brush to be dipped and stroked cross wise on the surface. No patchy overlaps will be
tolerated under any circumstances. Distemper shall only be applied with proper distemper brushes as supplied or
recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared first and got inspected and approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge before the full scale work commences. The distempers shall be used till such time as it
gives a uniform texture.
Whatever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be free standing or of the type so as not to damage or scratch the
painted surface. Adequate precautionary measures shall be taken so as not to damage or stain the floors or any
other work while applying distemper.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of the actually completed surface.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit
price per which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour
including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing scaffoldings
as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.64
PLASTIC PAINT
3.64.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of plastic paint of approved color over a
coat of priming on plastered wall or ceiling surface where necessary in accordance with these specifications.
The painted surface shall he easily washable by soft soap and water.
3.64.2 Materials
The plastic paint should be Robialac (Berger)/or equivalent and must be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The priming consists of appropriate type as specified for the paint by the manufacturer, and shall be applied
accordingly.
The surface to be plastic painted shall be dry. well cleaned and free from efflorescence dirt and stain of grease.
The surface shall be given a Through rub down to remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface
irregularities shall be repaired with patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface.
The mixing of plastic paint shall be carried out in accordance with the instruction issued by the manufacturer of
the particular brand of plastic paint that is to be used. Before starting work plastic paint shall be mixed in such
way that one room can be finished with same mix. Plastic paint is to be applied with proper brushes as supplied
or recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared first and get inspected and approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge before the full scale work commences. The paint work shall not be considered as
complete till a surface of perfect uniformity in color, shade and texture is achieved.
[103]

Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of the actually completed surface.
price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
labour including storage. transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing
scaffolding as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.65
WATER REPELLENT COATING
3.65.1 Description
The item shall consist of applying 2 coats of clear silicone water repellent on exposed brick or concrete surfaces
and cement plaster on wall, ceiling and elsewhere in accordance with these Specifications.
3.65.2 Materials
Silicone water repellent shall consist of sodium silicate or other alkaline silicates based clear approved
product supplied in original sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's trademark.
The application of water repellent coat shall strictly comply with the manufacturer's instruction. The application
shall preferably be carried out after a period of dry weather and before application the surface shall be
thoroughly clean and dry. A heavy coat shall be applied evenly direct from the container by flooding the surface
with a wide brush so that at least 6mm penetration is achieved.
A second coat, applied as above, shall follow after 24 hours subjected dry & clean weather. 3.65.4 Method of
Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be made in sqm of painted surface.
unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment
and labour including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing
scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.66
WEATHER COATING
3.66.1 Description
The item shall consist of applying 3 coats of weather coating paint of approved colour and Brand over a coat
of priming on concrete plastered surfaces and cement render on exterior surface and elsewhere in accordance
with these specifications.
3.66.2 Material
High quality material from approved manufacturer as stated in the schedule of works or as per direction of
the Engineer-in-Charge. The materials shall be delivered to site in unopened original container bearing
approved manufactures label.
Weather coating shall be of approved colour. The application of weather coating shall strictly comply with
the manufacturer's instruction. The application shall preferably be carried out after a period of dry weather.
Before application, the surface shall be thoroughly clean and dry. For mixing paint manufacturer's instruction
details shall be followed. Prime coat shall be prepared according to the manufacturer's instruction and
The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter by using stiff wire brush, sand
papering or other approved means A sample area most he prepared first and got inspected and approved by
Engineer-in-Charge before full scale work commences.
[104]

Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of actually completed acceptable coated surface.
unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment
and labour including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing
3.67
ENAMEL PAINT
3.67.1
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of synthetic enamel paint of approved
color over a coat of priming on timber or metal surface or elsewhere as per direction of the Engineer -inCharge.
3.67.2 Materials
1.
High quality Synthetic enamel paint of approved brand
2.
Sand paper
3.
Putty made of 2 parts of whiting. one part of white lead mixed together in linsed oil kneaded with
wooden mallets until thoroughly incorporated. After kneading it in left for 12 hours when it is
kneaded again to give smooth workable paste. Desired pigment may be added if coloured putty is
needed.
4.
Thinner: Spirit of tarpentine is the most commonly used thinner. It is inflammable, evaporates
rapidly. Use of thinner in excess in paint reduces the protection value of coating, flattens the colour
and lessens the gloss of the linsed. At the most 5 to percent thinner may be used. When shaken
vigorously. it should not porth, or evaporation it should not leave any residue and pape r coated with
tarpentine and led to dry should remain unstained. Thinner shall be used of the same Brand as of the
Brand of paint.
3.67.3 Surface Preparation

Whole success of painting operation depends upon satisfactory preparation of the surface to be painted and great
majority of defects which occur are due to faulty preparation. Wood work shall not be painted unless it is
absolutely dry. If shall also not be done during monsoon months. Knots and holes, it any, shall be filled using
filler made with a mixture of red lead.: and glue in equal quantities called knotting. Dry wood work shall be
brought to a smooth s : even surface by rubbing it with sand paper of different grades from coarser to finer ones.
While dealing with painting in iron and steel work. a perfectly clean and even surface is great importance. Any
paint coat applied on greasy or oily steel surface will lack proper adhesion and will lead to failure of the paint
film. Removal of mill scale and rust is
more difficult but of equal importance. A good all purpose
degreaser is mineral turpentine oil.
Before painting, rust scales and dirts should be removed by means of iron brushing. Special attention shall be
given to the cleaning of corners, reentrant angles, weld spatters.
Iron and steel work must be thoroughly dry before being painted.
3.67.4
Application Method
The timber surface shall he painted with two coats of synthetic enamel ready mixed paint of best quality and
approved color over a coat of priming. The paint shall be app appropriate primer, after the surface has been
finished with filler/pully, etc. No work done under conditions which are unsuitable fo r the prod uctio n of
go od result. No exter ior painting shall be done in rainy, damp weather.
After the wood surface is prepared, the paint shall be applied with brush and spread as evenly and smoothly
as possible. As soon as the whole or a convenient area is covered, the brush shall be passed over the paint in
[105]
one direction contrary to that in which it is finally to be laid off, which is known as crossing. After crossing.
it should be laid off softly, carefully in a direction contrary to the crossing but along the. rain of wood taking
care that none of the brush marks to be left visible. All natural finished wood work, and painted wood work
painted metal shall be slightly sand papered between coats using zero paper.
All steel surfaces shall receive 2 coats of hard-gloss paint of approved color over a coat of anticorrosive
paint. The correct timing of application of primer coat is a very important factor.
Particularly when humidity is high or dew settles on surfaces in the evening : - Roughly speaking, painting of
steel work can approximately be started at about 10 AM which is generally the time whe n all dew has
evaporated.
The enamel paint should be Robialac (Berger)/or equivalent and must be approved by Engineer -in-Charge.
Manufacturer's instructions for application of paint must be followed The color of the palm should be
according to the direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
A sample area must be prepared first and got inspected and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge before the
full scale work commences.
The paint must not be allowed to settle in the cans. To prevent this, each painter will have in his can of paint
a stirring stick with which he must use to stir up the paint occasionally.
After completion of painting work, the contractor shall remove any paint spots and stains caused by this work
in floor, walls, glass, hardware, equipment and other surfaces leaving these surfaces in perfect condition.
Measurement for payment shall be made in sqm of actually completed acceptable painted surface.
unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials,
equipment and labour including storage, transport. preparing, mixing and applying putty, pri mer and paint
and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.68
SILICON COATING
3.68.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of providing Water reperrent Silicon coating work to face brick
surface as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.68.2 Materials
Water soluble Silicon Coating of transparent in colour will he used. Coverin g capacity should be normally 4.5
- 5.sq.m/Itr on the porosity of the brick.
Water soluble Silicon Coating should be directly used on Face Brick surface without thinning. This solution
is applied directly on surface with a standard size brash. Apply repeatedly to a condition so that it runs down
around 150 mm. Avoid dry spray. Use T-6 for cleaning. Keep flame away from the container and application
area. Do not inhale spray dust.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of actually completed acceptable silicon coating
surface.
3.68.5
Basis of Payment
price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
[106]
labor including storage transport preparing mixing and applying putty, primer, polishing and providing
3.69
SURFACE DRAIN
3.69.1
Description
The item shall consist of constructing 200 - 250mm clear width and depth from 300mm to 450mm Brick drain
with 125 mm thick brick work and covered by MS. gutter fitted and 38-50mm dia boulders placed as per design
and in accordance with the specifications.
3.69.2
Materials
Bricks chips, cement, sand, boulders, MS flat bars and all other materials shall conform to the requirement of
respective materials specified in the relevant sections of materials specifications.
3.69.3
The surface drain shall be constructed in true line and level as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-inCharge Representative.
450mm (average) deep drains shall have 200- 250mm clear width with 125mm thick brick work base over
single layer of 75 mm concrete and 75 mm brick flat soling and 150mm sand filling. The exposed surface will
have 15mm thick cement plaster (1:4) with neat cement finishing and curing at least for 7 days must be done.
3.69.4
Measurements for payment shall be made in linear meter.

3.69.5
Basis of Payment
price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials required for excavation, C.C,
B.F.S. plaster and N.C.F and all equipment and labour as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the
works according to the applicable plans.
3.70
APRON
3.70.1
Description
The item shall consist of construction 50mm thick cement concrete blocks (50 mm gap without morat joints)
over a layer of Brick flat soling and sand filling, compacted earth around the structure in accordance to this
specifications.
3.70.2 Materials
Cement Concrete of class C14 with neat cement finishing.
Brick flat soling by first class bricks unless otherwise specified.
Sand shall be clean well graded natural sand with FM as stated in BOQ.
Water shall be same as required for concrete.
3.70.3
The area specified for construction of apron shall be thoroughly cleaned, leveled & compacted to proper slope &
level. Brick flat soling shall be laid over compacted earth according to specification no. 3.9, then cement
concrete of class C14 as per specification no. 3.12 shall be placed over BFS with maintaining proper level &
[107]
slope towards drain, Simultaneously neat cement finish shall be applied on top surface curing for a period of at
least 7 days as prescribed in item no. 3.31 complete as per drawing & direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.70.4
The completed and accepted work shall be measured in square meter of the finished surface.
3.70.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of accepted work shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sq.m which payment shall include
leveling and dressing compaction of earth, BFS, cement concrete with neat cement finish etc. including supply
of all materials, labour, equipment, as well as all incidental necessary to complete the work according to
applicable plan.
3.71
C.C/R.C.C PAVEMENT
3.71.1
Description
The item shall consist of constructing 100mm R.C.C pavement on a 225mm thick base course of water bound
macadam laid over a 50mm thick sand filling in accordance with the specification.
3.71.2 Materials
Materials shall be same as that specified for R.C.C work.
3.71.3
Formation bed shall be prepared by excavating filling and compacting to the required level and profile in
accordance with the provision of items 3.6 and 3.7. All soft and yielding materials and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily when rolled or tampered shall be removed and all depressions made by
removal of such materials shall be filled with sand of F.M. 0.80 and compacted and the whole formation brought
to correct profile and level as per drawing.
An insulation course of sand with a minimum fineness modulus of 0.80 shall be spread uniformly over the
prepared sub-grade and brought to the specified thickness. After spreading, the sand shall be sprinkled lightly
with an amount of water and compacted sufficiently to secure a dense surface of compacted thickness which
will support the base course of water bound macadam.
Base course shall he constructed in layers of not over 75mm compacted thickness. Compaction shall
immediately follow spreading of aggregate by rolling with 10-ton flat steel rollers. Rolling shall proceed from
outer edges towards the crown of the road or from the low side to the high side over lapping the compression
roll by one half its widths on each successive pass. Water in the amount that is necessary for compaction shall
be sprinkled during rolling and blinding material consisting of fine particles of brick dust or medium sand
shall be spread in each layer. unless the base course is constructed in box cutting, the edges shall be backed
up with compacted earth berm to the height of the course to prevent lateral movement under action of rollers.
Any irregularities that develop in the surface of the course during rolling shall be corrected by loosening the
surface, adding or removing material, and recompacting until the surface presents a smooth and regular
appearance and is in conformity with plan requirements in profile and section.
The finished base course shall not be used for through. traffic. Prior to placement of surface course, any ruts
and damage by traffic shall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor by loosening, reshaping and
recompacting, use of necessary water and the addition of more aggregate material.
The base course shall be sprinkled with water prior to the placing of concrete so that it will be sufficiently
moist (but not muddy or have free water standing on surface) when the concrete is deposited thereon and will
not absorb moisture from the concrete.
[108]
Surface course shall be in concrete Class C17 prepared and placed in accordance with the provisions of item
3.13. The concrete shall be deposited on the brick flat soling or compacted sand in successive batches for the
full width between the both sides of the road or as per drawing. The amount of material deposited shall be
sufficiently in excess of that required to form the pavement and to provide a small roll of concrete ahead of
the screed for its full length. After being spread the concrete shall be consolidated and screeded to the
required thickness and profile.
The strike-off shall be passed over the entire surface at least twice. A uniform roll or rid ge of concrete at least
25mm above the finished pavement and 200mm in depth shall be maintained ahead of the strike -off for its
entire length during the first trip. Excessive tampering resulting in bringing on excess of mortar to the surface
will not be permitted.
Proper slope of the pavement shall be maintained throughout the operation.
Reinforcement in pavement shall be placed and secured as shown on the plans in accordance with the
requirements of item 3.13.
Construction and expansion joints shall be constructed exactly' in accordance with the details shown on
plans and with best workmanship and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge representative.
Extreme care shall be exercised in placing, compacting and finishing concrete at the joints to prevent
displacement of the joints and to avoid the formation of honeycombs and voids. The concrete along the joints
shall be thoroughly consolidated by the use of vibrators.
As soon as the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the edges of the pavement, the longitudinal joints, the
construction, and expansion joints shall be carefully executed as per drawing and direction and finished
with an edging tool so that the radius shown on the plans is obtained. curing and protection shall start as
soon as ne wl y laid pavement is sufficiently, hardened and shall be continued for e pe ri od of at
least day
After hardening of concrete the joints shall be cleaned and filled with sand bituminous mastic as
per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge in any ease providing C.C., R.C.C on existing BFS/HBB
pavement. The BFS/HBB shall be cleaned of concrete, dirt, grass etc. and washed with clean water
before pouring concrete.
3.71.4 Method of measurement
Measurements for payment shall be made as per items of bill of quantities
The amount of completed and accepted works measured for at the contract unit price
as per bill of quantities which payment shall constitute lull compensation for
furnishing, excavating, transporting, preparing, mixing, placing, compacting,
finishing, curing all materials including making joints. joints filler, dowels, load
transfer device, labors, supply of mastic, sand, bitumen , partex or spongy hoard
during construction for joints, reinforcement, equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete the works as per applicable plans.
3.72 EXPANSION & ISOLATION JOINTS COVER WORK
[109]
3.72.1 Description
The item shall consist of providing expansion and isolation joints in roofs,
walls, columns floors and elsewhere in accordance with applicable plans.
and as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.72.2 Construction Requirements of Joints Cover Work
Wall and floor expansion joint shall be provided with two strands of bitumen impregnated coir rope
lightly wedged into place and covered on the exposed Mice with aluminum cover with snap -in clip as
per drawing.
Roof expansion joint Shall be provided with sand bituminous mastic. Clean coarse snad (FM 2.5)
shall be thoroughly mixed with hot bitumen in the ratio of 30kg of bitumen with 1 Cum of sand and
the resulting mastic, whicle still hot, shall he carefully poured and rammed into the full depth of the
expansion joint as shown in in drawing. The works shall be done when the contact surface is dry.
When inserting mastic into placle care shall be taken not to foul areas not designated for such
application In the event of fouling/damage the Contractor shall remove all traces of bitumen and
repair all damages at his own expense and to the statist faction of the Engineer.
Joints shall be measured by the linear meter in place.
The completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit
prices per linear meter which price shall be full compensation for all materials, all labor, tool and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.73 CLINKER/PAVERS PAVEMENT
3.73.1
De scr ip t io n
The work covered by this item shall consist of laying clinker tiles of approved quality and
size with cement mortar (1:3) in floor/pavement in accordance with the specification.
3.73.2 C o n st r u ct i o n Requirements
Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant sections of materials
specifications.
Pattern with 25 mm thick 200X100 mm High Load Bearing Pavers (CT -6 of Mirpur Ceramic
Works ltd or equivalent) on all sides of patent stone blocks on Pedestrian entry/ walkway.
Apron and Special pattern on Pedestrian Entry area, on 20 mm cement mortar 1:3, laying the
bricks in proper way and finishing with care etc. all complete as per design an d engineer-incharge.
[110]
The work shall be measured in square meter of finished pavement as per bill of quantities.
contract until price per sq. meter which payment shal l constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, equipment, transport, handling, storage, preparing, mixing, curing and
all incidentals necessary to complete the work as per applicable plans.
3.74 ANTI TERMITE WORK
374.1
D e s c r i p t io n
The work covered by this item consists of protecting the building along
surroundings from the attack of termites.
its
3.74.2 Materials
Government registered chemicals popularly known as the infamous "Dirty Dozen", includes
widely used material like Dieldrin. Heptachlor are quite effective for anti -termite treatment. By
use of Dieldrin, complete protection works for more than 30 years have been achieved in USA.
But dieldrin is highly toxic and is responsible for environmental pollution.
3.74.3 A p p l i ca t io n Method
A.
Site clearance
There should be proper drainage of water in the site and any condition leading to the maintenance
of high soil moisture around the building should be removed. The removal of all forms of wood,
roots, stumps, logs and other debris should be done.
B. Preparing Heptachlor/ Dieldrin Mixture for Treatment
Add I kg. of powdered Heptachlor 40 W.P in 79 liters of pure water or 1 liters of dieldrin E.C. in 39
liters of pure water and mix thoroughly with a stick. For other equivalent registered product, mix
according to the manufacturer's instruction.
C. Termite Mound Treatment
The termite mound found in the plinth area should be destroyed by pouring into the mounds at
several places, after breaking open the earthen structure, and making holes with crowbars, at the
rate of approximately 4 liters of emulsion per cubic meter of mound. The concentration by weight
percent for Heptachlor, Chlordane is 0.5.
D. Disturbance
Once formed, treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed. If, by chance, treated soil b arriers are
disturbed or required to be disturbed, those should again be treated with similar dose before
foundation wall or floor is laid.
[111]
E. Overall Foundation Treatment

Step - 1: After the foundation has been properly excavated & dressed and when the soi l is fairly dry,
apply the prepared mixture of chemicals to the sides and bottom of the foundation trenches at the rate
of 5 liters per sqm. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet with
raw of subsoil water. Lying of mass concrete should start when the chemical emulsion has been
absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry.
Step - 2: Anti termite chemical mixed water should be used in brick works in foundation. In this
process, instead of using plain mixing water, use poisoned water (anti termite chemical mixed water
as described in B of Application Method) only while preparing cement sand mortar for building
foundation wall below the ground level and up to plinth level.
Step - 3: After the column foundation, wall foundations and retaining walls of the basement come up,
the back fill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 liters
per sqm of the vertical surface of the sub -structure for each side. If water is used for ramming the
earth-fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after ramming operation is done by rodding the
earth at 150mm centers close to the wall surface and spraying the chemical with the above doze. As
earth is returned in layers. the treatment shall be carried out in similar sta g es. The chemical emulsion
shall be directed towards the concrete or masonry surfaces of the columns and walls so that the earth
in contact with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical. In the case of R.C.0 framed structures
with columns and plinth beams and R.C.0 basements, the treatment shall start at the depth of 500mm
below ground level. From this depth the back-fill around the columns, beams and R.C.C basement
walls shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres per sq. meter of the vertical surface. The other details of
treatment shall be decorated as above.
Step - 4: The hard-core or other sub-foundation materials should also be treated at the rate of 5 liters
per sqm before the floor is laid. If the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface does not
allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centers both ways may be
ma with crow bars on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with crow bars on the surface to
facilitate saturation of the soil with the chemical emulsion.
Special care shall be taken to establish continuity after vertical chemical barrier or inner
wall surfaces from ground level up to the level of the filled earth/ sand surfaces.
Where water pipes, drains and other services emerge from the soil, the surrounding soil
should be well soaked with emulsified mixture. Electricity cable should be enclosed in
metal or PVC conduit and this should be surrounded b. emulsion treated concrete or sand
cement. Where pipes penetrate through wall or floors, the gap between the pipe and the
structure should be sealed with emulsion treated Sand -Cement -Mortar. The fitting of
Termite shields to pipes is useful especially in preventing the Termites using popes as
bridges to gain entry.
Safety Measures
When using anti termite chemical, keep all children and animals away from the area
where treatment is to be carried out.
In handling concentrated emulsions or liquid, take care to avoid splashing t h e liquid on
to the skin or clothing. Try to use face shield and PVC gloves possible.
If accidentally splashed, wash the skin well with soap and water immediately. DO NOT SCRUB.
Change clothing if necessary and wash soiled clothing with soap. Eves affected by splashing.
[112]
should be immediately well washed with water for at least 15 minutes and consult a doctor
immediately.
Wash well with soap and water after using the chemicals, especially be f ore eating,
smoking or drinking. Use clean clothing and PVC footwear. and change them whenever
contaminated.
Where the chemical is being used, never eat or drink near by. Either remove foodstuffs
away from the place that is being treated or makes certain that chemical do not come in
contract with food or drinking water. Never store chemicals or the emulsions in bottles in
such a way that they can be drunk accidentally.
After use, wash all equipment including spade, korai, karni etc. and lock as a unused
material. All used containers and empty cans should also be washed. Flush away any
washing from drains or troughs with plenty of water - - prevent animals drinking
contaminated water.
DO NOT suck or blow through a pipe containing the chemical.
3.74.4 Method of measurement

The unit price shall be in square meter complete in place.
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed and accepted work
which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, transporting, preparing spraying,
labor, tools and equipment, overhead, profit, taxes and all incidental necessary to complete the
item.
3.75 ROOF TRUSS
3.75.1 Description
The work under this item shall consist of supplying and fabrication of Mild steel sections, as per design
and drawing for roof truss including hoisting, fitting & fixing in position with bolts and nuts or rivets
or welded and providing two coats of anticorrosive paint over a prime coat of red oxide paint, including
using anchor bolts with nut embedded in structure. scaffolding etc. all complete per drawing and
This item shall be measured in metric tonne for solid steel section only.
Payment shall be made of completed & accepted works in metric ton including supply of all materials,
labor and equipment, scaffolding etc. complete at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.76 C.I SHEET ROOFING
3.76.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying & fitting fixing 26 BWG galvanized iron
corrugated sheet roofing on wooden/steel frame with auxiliary fitting such as galvanized screw/J-hook
[113]
with nut, G.l Perlins limpet & bitumen washers, putty etc. complete as per direction, at all height.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter.
Payment shall be made of completed & accepted works in square meter actually covered surface
including supply of all materials, labour, equipment, tools etc. complete at contract unit price
mentioned in the bill of quantities.
3.77 CLEARING AFTER COMPLETION
The contractor shall thoroughly clean all work upon completion. Clean off all strains, marks, spots, and
disfigurements from all works, touch up as required. clean all windows panes, remove all rubbish and
debris from building and site and leave premises clean and tidy and fit for occupation in all respects
and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.78 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings for entire project after completion of construction,
installation and all tests, and obtain approval from Owner/Consultant, and shall submit 3 (three) set of
such as-built drawing to the Owner for keeping record. Minimum one computer soft -copy shall be
accompanied with the as-built drawings.
3.79 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED
The Contractor at his own cost shall perform the following tests for the construction
materials.
1.
SAND
At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not exceeding 275 cubic
meters.
a).
b).
c).
d).
e).
2.
a).
b).
c).
d).
e).
3.
FM
Percentage of clay lump
Mica Content
Organic Impurities
Material fiber than # 200
BRICK
At least 6 bricks to be tested for each consignment not exceeding 50,000 of brick.
Unit weight
Compressive strength
Water absorption
Dimensions (size and shap e)
Efflorescence, if necessary (10 bricks)
REINFORCEMENT
[114]
Each set of - sample shall consist of 3 (three) representation standard places Deformed
bar for each size for each consignment or as directed and shall be tested for the
following properties:
a).
b).
c).
d).
e).
f).
4.
Yield or 0.2% Proof strength test

Ultimate tensile strength test
Elongation
Bend test
Cross' section area
Unit Weight/meter
STONE CHIPS
At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not 600cum.
a).
b).
c).
d).
e).
5.
6.
Gradation
Unit weight
Specific Gravity
Los Angeles Abrasion Test.
Water absorption
CEMENT
At least 3 samples of cement shall be tested for each consi g n m ent but
not exceeding 100 tons.
a). Fineness
b). Setting times
c). Compressive strength
d). 3,7, 28 days
CONCRETE
For all concrete work at least 3 (three) sets of 3 (three) samples cylinder/cubes and for each days
casting or for each 150 cum of concrete shall be preserved and tested to for 7 days and 28 days
crushing strength.
7.
WATER
Sulphate and chloride content
8. PLACE OF TESTING
All tests shall be performed in the BRTC-BUET or in any recognized laboratory approved by
9.
COST OF TESTS
The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor if such test is clearly intended by
or provided for in the specifications or Bill of quantities and is required to ascertain whether
the design of and /or quality of any finished or partially finished work is appropriate for the
purposes which it was intended to fulfill and conforms to specifications.
[115]
Section 9. Drawings
[116]

XXX

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XXX

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specifications

Material, Page No. 1

GOVERNMENT OF THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF BANGLADESH

Dated: 20 September 2011

Museum of Human evolution and Research Center,

Government of Bangladesh (BOG)

Ministry of Science & Technology

Public works department

Construction of the Museum building

Time for completion of the work

24 (twenty four) Months

Open Tendering Method(OTM)

Contractors firm with eligibility stated in tender document

Price of tender document

TK. 2500.00 (two thousand) only

Amount of tender security

TK. 2,50,000.00 (two lac fifty thousand)

Name & address of the office(s) selling

Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.

Name & address of the office(s) receiving

Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.

Name & address of the office(s) opening

Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.

Last date & time for selling tender document

30-Jan.-2012 during office hours on all working days

Last date & time for submission of tender

31-Jan.-2012 up to 12.30 p.m.

Date & time for opening tenders

31-Jan.-2012 at 3.00 p.m.

The procuring Entity reserves the right to reject all tenders

Md. Mamunur Rahman

Instructions to BIDDERS ................................................................6

Tender Document ........................................................................................... 8

Tender: Sealing and Marking ..................................................................................... 15

Tender Opening and Evaluation .................................................................... 16

Tender: Only one ..................................................................................................... 11

Tender Submission ....................................................................................... 15

Evaluation Criteria ...................................................................................................... 9

Tender Preparation ...................................................................................... 11

Tender Document: Sections .......................................................................................... 8

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria .............................................................. 9

Scope of Tender ........................................................................................................... 6

Tender: Opening ........................................................................................................ 16

Tender Data Sheet ........................................................................22

Section 3. Project Brief .....................................................................................27

General Conditions of Contract ...................................................28

Time Control ................................................................................................ 37

Quality Control ............................................................................................ 39

Contractor to Construct the Works ............................................................................ 39

Works open to Inspection ........................................................................................... 39

Cost Control ................................................................................................. 40

Bill of Quantities ........................................................................................................ 40

Completion of the Contract ........................................................................... 45

Termination and Settlement of Disputes ........................................................ 45

Particular Conditions of Contract ..............................................50

Bill of Quantities ..........................................................................54

Section 7. General Specification ......................................................................67

SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................2

Throughout this Tender Document:

the term in writing means communicated in written form with proof

day means calendar day.

Payments by the development partner, if so indicated in the TDS, will be made

The Government requires that Employers, as well as Tenderers and Contractors,